THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES 
 
'A science teaches us to know; an art, to do." 
 
 Whewell's History of the Inductive Sciences. 
 
 The Science and Art 
 
 OF 
 
 PHRASE-MAKING; 
 
 A Series of Practical and Progressive Lessons, designed to 
 
 teach Stenographic Phrasing by Principle, not by 
 
 Rote, thus dispensing largely with Phrase- 
 
 memorization and enabling the 
 
 Student to make Good Phrases 
 
 for himself. 
 
 H'cxt~3300k for Schools, ?*riwate 
 and 2Joung 
 
 Adapted to the use of writers of the Benn Pitman and Graham 
 systems and other Pitmanic systems fundamentally similar. 
 
 BY 
 
 DAVID WOLFE BROWN, 
 
 Official Reporter. U. S. House of Representatives; 
 
 Author of "The Mastery of Shorthand," "The Factors of Shorthand 
 
 Speed," etc. 
 
 "Good phrases are surely, and ever were, very commendable." 
 
 Shakespeare's Henry IV. 
 
 WASHINGTON, D. C. 
 
 SHORTHAND PUBLICATION BUREAU. 
 BLISS BUILDING. 
 

 SUMMARY OF CONTENTS. 
 
 PREFACE. Phrasing to be learned by principle, not by 
 rote. Study of phrasing by principle is far more interest- 
 ing than the memorizing of alphabetically-arranged phrase- 
 lists. Qualifies the learner to make phrases for himself in 
 limitless number. When studied by principle, phrasing 
 can be taken up much earlier than when studied from al- 
 phabetically-arranged lists. Principles of word-formation 
 are extensively used in phrase-formation; thus the framing 
 of phrases may be learned simultaneously with the construc- 
 tion of word-outlines. The book is a practical book, based 
 on the daily practice of practical reporters. .. .Pages 13-18. 
 
 CHAPTER I. PHRASES DEFENDED. DEFINED, AND 
 DISTINGUISHED. A convenient and familiar phraseo- 
 gram is the reporter's godsend. Thomas Allen Reed's testi- 
 mony. Phrasing especially needed in court reporting. 
 American court reporting has developed a peculiar and 
 highly useful phrasing system. Phrases defined. Simple 
 or word-joining phrases. Word-blending phrases. Broken 
 phrases. Elliptic phrases. Composite phrases. Special or 
 irregular phrases Pages 19-25. 
 
 CHAPTER II. THE PHRASING VOCABULARY. Com- 
 mon speech comprises but a few thousand words, with ca- 
 pacity for innumerable combinations. What words may be 
 phrased. What words may not be phrased Pages 26-28. 
 
 CHAPTER III. THE REQUISITES OF A GOOD 
 PHRASE. Should follow natural speech. Sense relation. 
 Easy and fluent junctions. When may bad junctions be 
 tolerated? Don't doubt the power of the hand. Bad junc- 
 tions classified and illustrated. How may bad junctions be 
 obviated? Lineality a requisite of good phrases. A phrase 
 should not contain too many words. Legibility of phrases. 
 A good phrase is spontaneous Pages 29-39. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. LIMITATIONS, CAUTIONS, ETC. 
 Phrasing principles must not be applied indiscriminately. 
 A hurried, spasmodic style to be avoided. Adaptation of 
 particular phrases to individual writers Pages 40-41 
 
 448552 
 
10 SUMMARY OP CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER V. POSITION. General rule of phrase-posi- 
 tion. Exceptions. "Initial displacement," partial or com- 
 plete. When may the first word of a phrase be displaced? 
 Exercise on "Initial displacement." When may first two 
 words be displaced? Should initial is, his, as, and has vary 
 from regular position? Initial 7 and he distinguished. 
 How should exercises in this book be studied and prac- 
 tised? Pages 42-50. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. WORD-DISTINCTIONS. Context an im- 
 portant aid. The law of safe ambiguity. "Preceding con- 
 text" and "succeeding context." When may a single siga 
 safely have several significations? Distinctions by posi- 
 tion, by "exclusion," by difference of outline, and by vocal- 
 ization. How may positional distinction be lost, and how 
 supplied? Distinction by "exclusion" defined. Variation 
 of outline as a substitute for position. Peculiar vocaliza- 
 tion of phrases. Vocalization of badly-shaped outlines.... 
 
 Pages 51-5S 
 
 CHAPTER VII. VARIATION OF OUTLINE. Purposes 
 of variation. Different classes of variation illustrated. 
 "Reporting license." The reporter occasionally prefers 
 contra-normal convenience and speed to normal inconve- 
 nience and slowness. Contra-normal expedients classified 
 and illustrated Pages 59-G6 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. ELLIPSIS: THE LAW OF IMPLICA- 
 TION. \Vhen may words be omitted in writing, to be sup- 
 plied in reading by the sense? The law of safe ellipsis. 
 "Implication" and "indication" distinguished. None but 
 necessary connective words may be implied. List of allow- 
 able ellipses, with illustrations and exercises. . .Pages 67-89 
 
 CHAPTER IX. THE TICK WORD-SIGNS. The most 
 useful connective expressions of the laneuage. Initial ticks 
 of, to. or, but, he, I, etc., illustrated, with exercises. I and 
 he distinguished. Displacement of initial ticks. The how 
 and there ticks. Hooks on ticks. Ticks joined to ticks... 
 
 Pages 90-129. 
 
 CHAPTER X. THE CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. Exercises 
 on initial is, his, as, has. Final circle for us, with exercise. 
 Circles joined to ticks or "brief w and y" word-signs. 
 Coalescing of circles. Exercises on double circles as. phrase- 
 factors. Exercises on the circle following double circle, and 
 circle following loop. Ellipsis of circles. .. .Pages 130-142. 
 
SUMMARY OF CONTENTS. 11 
 
 CHAPTER XI. "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS 
 
 Exercises on initial we, with, icere, ivhat, ivould, you, etc. 
 Junction of "brief w and y" word-signs. 8 circle on "brief 
 w and y" word-signs. Initial w hook for we and with, and 
 exercises thereon. You and would following a circle. In- 
 version of we, were, ivould and you. You used for your. 
 Enlarged way and yay signs to represent we would, you 
 
 were, with you, etc. You represented by quasi r hook 
 
 Pages 143-171. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. "PROXIMITY" AS A MEANS OF 
 WORD-INDICATION. Indication of of the. When of the 
 cannot be indicated. Indication of from-to. Indication 
 of con or com. Initial a con-, and con-, I con-, he con-, etc. 
 Prefixes in the midst of phrases. The terminations ing-a t 
 ing-the, ing-his, ing-their, etc. Exercises. .. .Pages 172-188. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. THE "L-HOOK" FOR "WILL" AND 
 "ALL." Exercises on will and all expressed by hook. All 
 following of and with. Limitations on the use of the I 
 hook as a phrasing factor. L hook on tick word-signs 
 
 Pages 189-193. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. "ARE," "OUR," "OR," AND "WERE" 
 EXPRESSED BY R-HOOK. Princip'e explained, with ex- 
 ercises. Enlarged I and r hooks. The r hook on tick word- 
 signs. Were expressed by the r hook Pages 194-201. 
 
 CHAPTER XV. SOME SPECIAL PHRASE-SIGNS. 
 May be, may have been, to be, to have been, in re-, in recon-, 
 is it. as it, is there, as there, etc. Circle enlarged to a loop, 
 to add there, their, or they are Pages 202-210. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. THE DOUBLE-LENGTHING PRIN- 
 CIPLE. Its application to phrasing explained. Exercises 
 on there and their expressed by double-lengthing. Double- 
 length ing and mb. There as part of a word. Expression 
 of other by double-lengthing. Peculiar method of writing 
 of their, of all their, is there, as there, etc. Double-length 
 strokes joined without an angle. Dear and whether ex- 
 pressed by double-lengthing. Triple-length strokes. Double- 
 lengthing of straight strokes Pages 211-229. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. THE "N" HOOK AS A PHRASING 
 FACTOR. The use of n hook for one. Exception in the 
 case of no one. N hook for own. Special exercises on with 
 our own, in our own, their own. Exception in the case of 
 my own. N hook for than and been Pages 230-240. 
 
12 SUMMARY OF CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. THE HALF-LENGTHING PRINCI- 
 PLE. The expression of it. to, icould, and had by half- 
 lengthing, with exercises thereon. The expression of not 
 by halving and the n hook, with exercises thereon. Expres- 
 sion of not by n hook only Pages 241-255. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. THE F-V HOOK. Expression of have 
 and to have by v hook. Exercises thereon. Ought to have, 
 would have, have . had, or have it. Expression of of by v 
 "hook; of it by v hook and halving. Exceptional v hook on 
 
 consonants iih and the to express of and have 
 
 Pages 256-271. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. "THE N CURL." Peculiar representa- 
 tion of in, in his, in as, with exercises. Ellipsis of a, an or 
 the, following in. Double circle following the "in curl.".. 
 
 Pages 272-279. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. SPECIAL METHODS OF WRITING 
 
 PARTICULAR WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS 
 
 Pages 280-290. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. SUGGESTIONS ON CONSTRUCTION 
 OF SPECIAL OR IRREGULAR PHRASES. When are ir- 
 regular phrases justified? Characteristics of irregular 
 phrases. Sometimes pre-memorized, sometimes extempo- 
 rized. Irregular phrases classified. How are irregular 
 phrases constructed? Intersection. Requisites of irregular 
 phrases. Legibility of irregular phrases. .. .Pages 291-299. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. LIST OF IRREGULAR PHRASES 
 OF GENERAL UTILITY Pages 300-310 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. LIST OF SIMPLE OR WORD-.TOTN- 
 ING PHRASES Pages 311-339 
 
 INDEX Pages 341-354 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 1. A glance at the contents of this volume will show 
 that it differs widely, both in plan and execution, from the 
 ordinary "phrase-book." It seeks to teach phrasing by a 
 new method. From the start it calls on the pupil, not to 
 memorize phrases but to make them for himself, by putting 
 into practice the principles according to which correct 
 phrases are constructed. In the opinion of the author, the 
 mere copying and attempted memorizing of alphabetically- 
 arranged phrase-lists, as a means of learning the art of 
 phrasing, has had its day. Phrase-formation, like word- 
 formation, is governed and guided by certain defined prin- 
 ciples. These are few and simple, although the phrases 
 which are their outgrowth are innumerable. To these prin- 
 ciples all professional reporters, so far as they phrase at 
 all, must conform. Only by acquiring familiarity with 
 these principles, whether such familiarity be acquired di- 
 rectly or indirectly, consciously or unconsciously, with time 
 wasted or time economized, can phrase-writing be learned 
 effectually and thoroughly. 
 
 2. A highly intelligent teacher of long experience* has 
 happily laid down the correct method of teaching or learn- 
 ing the art of phrasing. "If the teacher," he says, "will 
 take up one principle at a time, explain it to the pupil, and 
 give him a sufficient number of phrases to accustom him to 
 its application, and the next day take up another in the 
 same way, and so on from day to day, he will find that the 
 pupil will soon be able to write phrases as naturally as he 
 writes single words." But where is the text-book by means 
 of which phrasing can be thus learned or taught? Where 
 is the book which will inspire the student, in the language 
 of Isaac Pitman, to "grasp the principle of uniting words, 
 
 *W. S. Rogers. 
 
14 PREFACE. 
 
 rather than endeavor to commit phrases to memory?" The 
 very well informed writer just quoted concedes that one 
 who seeks a book from which the principles of phrase- 
 writing may be learned or taught in the manner he recom- 
 mends, will seek in vain. The present volume undertakes 
 to supply that want. It aims to exhibit clearly, systemat- 
 ically and concisely, in a series of progressive lessons, the 
 comparatively few and simple rules and principles of the 
 phrasing art, with illustrations and exercises appropriate 
 to each. The course of study here laid down must, in the 
 opinion of the author, prove not only instructive but highly 
 interesting, and cannot fail to give the student in a short 
 time a far better command of the art of phrasing than can 
 ever be attained by the laborious and uninteresting course 
 of study usually adopted the study of mere phrase-lists 
 arranged alphabetically, with no attempt to reach, through 
 logical classification, the particular principles which dif- 
 ferent phrases exemplify. When the student once learns, 
 as he may from such a book as this, to "grasp the principle 
 of uniting words," the memorizing of tediously-extended 
 phrase-lists is no longer a necessity. Relieved from "the 
 burden of empirical and imitative practice," the student 
 gradually but rapidly learns to make phrases for himself 
 in limitless number not in the dangerously incorrect way 
 so common with young writers, but safely and correctly, 
 because he works along the clearly-illuminated lines of well- 
 understood practical principles. 
 
 3. If any student or teacher should be disappointed 
 when he fails to find opposite each phrase herein given its 
 shorthand representation, he should understand that if the 
 various phrases had been given in shorthand characters as 
 intended to be written by the pupil, the prime purpose of 
 the book to teach students to make correct phrases for 
 themselves would have been defeated. If the lessons be 
 taken up one by one in the order given, no such shorthand 
 key will be necessary; for care has been taken that no les- 
 son shall contain any word or phrase which at the time of 
 
PREFACE. 15 
 
 its introduction cannot be correctly written in accordance 
 with the instruction previously given in this book, or the 
 knowledge which the student may reasonably be presumed 
 to have acquired before undertaking its study. 
 
 4. The author's purpose has been to make this emphat- 
 ically and pre-eminently a practical book. It aims to define 
 and expound, not what in his opinion the art of phrasing 
 ought to be, but what it is. It seeks to exhibit the art as 
 exemplified in the daily work of practical reporters, who, 
 though they do not all phrase to the same extent, do all 
 phrase more or less, and so far as they phrase at all, con- 
 form consciously or unconsciously to well-settled principles 
 as exhibited in this volume. 
 
 5. If the contents of this book should not be found at 
 every point absolutely original, the author will consider 
 this fact no reproach; for an instruction-book, if it is to 
 meet the needs of those who are to use it, must embody, as 
 it is hoped the present volume does, the best fruits of the la- 
 bors of previous workers in the same field. In many cases 
 the views and instructions of others have interwoven them- 
 selves inseparably with the ideas of the author, so that it 
 has been impossible to credit particular suggestions to par- 
 ticular writers. Where the exact words of any author have 
 been used, such use (unless oversight has prevented) is in- 
 dicated. 
 
 6. Among the books which the author has found more 
 or less useful in the preparation of these lessons, the follow- 
 ing may be named: Pitman & Howard's Reporter's Com- 
 panion and Phonographic Dictionary; Graham's Handbook. 
 Dictionary and Second Reader; DementV~Pitmanic Short- 
 hand; Palmer's Expert Reporter; Practical Shorthand, by 
 L. B. Case and others; Isaac Pitman's Phrase-Book; Hum- 
 phrey's Interlinear Shorthand; Barnes's Shorthand Man- 
 ual; T. A. Reed's Leaves from my Note-book; Munson's 
 Phrase-Book; The Phrase, by F. G. Morris. 
 
 7. If some of the views and instructions herein given 
 should, in the opinion of anyone, vary from views hereto 
 
16 PREFACE. 
 
 fore expressed by the author, he can only say that he does 
 not feel too old to acquire new ideas, and that he values 
 truth more highly than consistency. In his previous book, 
 "The Factors of Shorthand Speed," an effort was made to 
 direct the pupil as to what course he should pursue, with 
 the means then within his reach, to acquire the art of phras- 
 ing. Some paragraphs in that book, especially under the 
 title "Practical Suggestions about Phrasing," need not have 
 been written, and probably would not have been, if there 
 had then existed such a Dook as the present, to which the 
 author might have referred the help-needing reader. 
 
 8. The question may be asked, "At what stage of the 
 student's course may the study of this book safely and ben- 
 eficially begin?" The author believes that the learner, 
 with such a book as the present to guide him in right 
 methods and guard him from wrong ones, may not only 
 safely but profitably begin the study of phrasing much 
 earlier than has heretofore seemed wise and practicable. 
 As each abbreviating principle of toord-formation such as 
 the s circle, the double-length principle, the I or r hook, the 
 n hook, the f-v hook, the half-lengthing principle, etc. 
 is reached in its order, there seems to be no reason why 
 the application of this particular word-forming principle 
 to phrase-formation for instance, the use of the I hook to 
 express phraseographically the word will, or the use of the 
 double-lengthing principle to express their, other, etc., or 
 the use of the n hook to express one, own, than, etc. should 
 not immediately be made familiar to the learner. Expe- 
 rience has shown that the eagerness of immature writers 
 to indulge in phrasing practice can scarcely be restrained: 
 let such practice, then, be wisely directed, so that it may be 
 safe and profitable. 
 
 9. Under the system of study heretofore generally pur- 
 sued, many simple word-groups which the mere beginner 
 necessarily meets in his writing and reading, are first pre- 
 sented to him, not as phrases, but as separate words, and 
 for the time being are so read and written by him, because 
 
PREFACE. 17 
 
 of the seeming necessity that the subject of phrasing be 
 reserved until a later stage. Thus the beginner, by read- 
 ing and writing as isolated words some of the commonest 
 and most useful phrases, acquires methods of thinking and 
 writing which must later be unlearned at considerable cost 
 of time and labor. But by the method of study herein laid 
 down, the early introduction of simple phrases is made pos- 
 sible and profitable. The student's primary exercises in 
 reading and writing can, by the judicious introduction of 
 correct phrases, be largely diversified in the scope of their 
 ideas and language, and thus made much more interesting 
 and beneficial. If phrase-formation thus keeps equal pace 
 with word-formation, the study of shorthand, as the author 
 believes, may be made vastly more interesting than at pres- 
 ent, and the student's progress be greatly accelerated. 
 
 10. In respect to most of the principles and methods of 
 phrasing herein presented, the Graham and Benn Pitman 
 systems practically coincide. Wherever any principle or 
 expedient included in this volume is not found in both sys- 
 tems, the fact distinctly appears; so that writers of either 
 may freely use this book without fear of unconsciously im- 
 bibing matter disapproved by the authority whose teaching 
 they have chosen to adopt. No important or useful phras- 
 ing principle of either system has been consciously omit- 
 ted.* In a few cases, methods of phrase-writing are herein 
 presented which possibly neither of these high authorities 
 has approved. Yet because these expedients are somewhat 
 extensively (though not generally) used, and do not appear 
 to the author objectionable, it has been thought best to in- 
 clude them, and thus allow the student or the teacher to ex- 
 ercise his own discretion as to their adoption. In every 
 such case, however, due notification is given, so that these 
 few and minor portions of the book may, if desired, be 
 passed over. 
 
 *If this book should enable Graham and Benn Pitman writers to see 
 in how many points the two~systems agree, and in how few they vary, 
 the author will feel that he has incidentally worked out a result we) 1 
 worth accomplishing. 
 
18 PREFACE. 
 
 11. The lessons in this book, to be profitable, must be 
 not only studied but mastered.* A smattering acquaintance 
 with them will simply confuse the student, and delay or 
 defeat his acquisition of speed. Without genuine study, the 
 art of good phrasing can never be learned; and without a 
 thorough knowledge of this art, no one can ever become 
 a truly accomplished reporter. 
 
 12. The author cannot send out this volume to the pub- 
 lic without acknowledging his indebtedness to his esteemed 
 friend and professional co-worker, Mr. Fred Irland, for 
 valuable aid and counsel, cheerfully and continuously given, 
 from the inception of the work until its completion. 
 
 *For the author's suggestions as to the method in which the exercises 
 may be most profitably used by teacher and student, see note to Para- 
 graph 65. 
 
CHAPTER I. 
 
 PHRASES DEFENDED, DEFINED AND DISTIN- 
 GUISHED. 
 
 13. One of the ablest and most distinguished reporters 
 that ever lived, has said: "In following a rapid speaker, the 
 occurrence of a phrase or sentence which can be condensed 
 into a convenient and familiar phraseogram is a god-send 
 to the writer; and if two or three such occur close together, 
 they enable him, if he is losing ground, to advance by leaps 
 and bounds until he is close at the speaker's heels. The 
 common phrases, as a matter of fact and in point of fact, 
 have often, like good fairies, helped me over the ground 
 when I have been running a hard race; and I felt really 
 grateful for their intervention. In taking evidence, for ex- 
 ample, the occurrence of such a question as, do you mean 
 to say as a matter of fact that the affairs of the company 
 could not l>e settled, will (because of the several useful 
 phrases which may be brought into play) enable the re- 
 porter to make up any amount of lost ground, or if he has 
 none to make up, will permit him, so to speak, to play 
 with the speaker, and record his words with the utmost 
 ease and nonchalance, however rapidly they may be uttered." 
 (T. A. Reed.) 
 
 THE AMERICAN SYSTEM OF PHRASING. 
 
 14. This apt language, illustrating how highly reporters 
 of large experience appreciate the value of good phrases'as 
 speed-promoters, is the testimony of a man conservative 
 almost to the point of timidity in availing himself of the 
 
20 PHRASES DEFINED AND DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 help which good phrasing affords, and who could but poorly 
 conceive the wonderful possibilities of the phrasing art, 
 that advanced system of phrasing the American system, 
 as it may justly be called which the present book under- 
 takes to exhibit. In this country, reporting has been culti- 
 vated to a remarkable and admirable extent; and phrasing 
 as applied to court reporting has been especially developed. 
 The system of phrasing here presented is pre-eminently 
 adapted to the reporting of colloquial matter, such as ex- 
 temporaneous speech or legal testimony. When the stu- 
 dent whose practice has been confined entirely or mainly 
 to book-matter or to ornate compositions of a rhetorical 
 character, undertakes to report matter expressed in collo- 
 quial or informal style, he encounters unexpected difficulty, 
 because required to write commonplace phrases or expres- 
 sions the homely language of every-day life, which rarely 
 occurs in books. For these every-day expressions and col- 
 loquial word-groups, which, because so familiar, are rap- 
 idly spoken, there should be a correspondingly rapid means 
 of expression. This medium of expression has been found 
 in the American system of court reporting, which, so far 
 as it involves the art of phrasing, it is one aim of this book 
 to exhibit. This volume is especially designed to make col- 
 loquial or commonplace expressions easy of execution, and 
 thus to prepare the student for reporting court proceedings 
 and other forms of familiar discourse. 
 
 GOOD PHRASES PROMOTE LEGIBILITY. 
 
 14%. It should not be forgotten that, apart from the 
 question of speed, good phrases conduce to legibility; and 
 this they do in spite of the fact that in a phrase the accus- 
 tomed positions of word-outlines, and even word-signs, are 
 often lost; that ordinary word-forms are often varied; and 
 that, but for the illumination of context, outlines would 
 often be ambiguous. Most emphatically it is true that "in 
 a phrase, words are so related that one helps to read an- 
 other." 
 
PHRASES DEFINED AND DISTINGUISHED. 21 
 
 SIMPLE PHRASES. 
 
 15. Phrasing is sometimes defined as "the joining of 
 words together without lifting the pen." But this defini- 
 tion is for several reasons too narrow. Good phrasing is 
 much more than this. As Benn Pitman has wisely said, 
 "The mere desultory stringing of words together is not 
 phrasing." In the first place, this definition ignores sev- 
 eral highly-useful classes of phrases which, it may be said, 
 illustrate phrasing as a fine art. It includes only one class 
 of phrases, and those the simplest and least artistic "those 
 which simply join together, without alteration, the ordinary 
 outlines of words as they are written when standing alone." 
 These phrases, for the writing of which one needs to know 
 but little more than the separate forms of the words to be 
 phrased, may be called simple or word-joining phrases. 
 
 WORD-BLEXDIXG PHRASES. 
 
 16. But the art of phrasing teaches us to write many 
 common words in a way in which they are not, and cannot 
 be, written when standing alone. Much more important 
 and useful than the simple phrases just defined are those 
 in which, under the operation of what may be called the 
 laws of phrasing, the grouped words, or a portion of them, 
 take different forms from those they would take if written 
 separately not only different, but briefer and more facile. 
 Sometimes a phrase consists of a single consonant stem, 
 with two or three simple modifications or appendages 
 hook, circles, etc. representing additional words by signs 
 briefer than those ordinarily used. In this way much more 
 is accomplished in economy of movement and economy of 
 time than the mere saving of pen-lifts. Practice has demon- 
 strated that by utilizing in phrases the hooks, the circles, 
 the loops, the lengthening and halving principles, and other 
 abbreviating devices, in a manner unknown to and beyond, 
 though not inconsistent with, the principles of word-forma- 
 
22 PHRASES DEFINED AND DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 tinn, numerous common and useful words can, without any 
 loss of speed or legibility, but with a decided gain of both, 
 be written in phrases much more briefly than the separated 
 or isolated word-forms. Thus in phrasing, the elementary 
 principles of phonography are brought into a new service, 
 unforeseen when, for the mere purpose of word-formation, 
 those principles were devised. Phrases of this class "group 
 together by means of stem-signs and the various hooks, 
 circles, loops and other modifications, all the consonants 
 of two or more words, without regard to the form of each 
 individually. In such cases some, or occasionally all, of the 
 words lose their identity or individuality, although as a 
 rule, there is one word-form that stands intact, around 
 which the others gather in a sort of verbal cluster."* 
 
 17. Many word-forming principles, now largely used in 
 phrase-formation, were devised at a time when stenographic 
 phrasing was scarcely recognized as a possibility. Em 
 phatically it is true that the men who in the early years of 
 Pitmanic shorthand arranged the principles of word-forma- 
 tion "builded better than they knew." For instance, when 
 the I and the r hooks were invented as mere factors in the 
 formation or abbreviation of word-outlines, it was little 
 dreamed that later on, as the pressure of reporting needs 
 would push phonetic shorthand to its fullest possibilities, 
 these two hooks would be made useful in phrases to repre- 
 sent respectively the common words will and are. So, too, 
 when the double-lengthing principle was devised for the 
 purpose of giving more facile forms to such words as 
 neither, father, etc., it was not foreseen that this principle 
 would ere long be made useful in phrases for the purpose 
 of representing with admirable brevity the very common 
 expressions there, they are and other. Similar remarks 
 might be made as to the f-v hook, the n hook, the half- 
 lengthing principle and other expedients, familiar to every 
 one who has mastered the principles of word-fornlation. 
 
 18. For the purpose of contrasting these two methods 
 
 *J. E. Munson. 
 
PHRASES DEFINED AND DISTINGUISHED. 23 
 
 of phrasing, we may take the phrase it will have had. By 
 merely joining the ordinary word-forms, we have the phrase- 
 
 '/ V 
 
 form .../... V,.- in which each stroke is a complete represent- 
 
 ative of a word and signifies the same whether joined- to 
 other words or separated; so that the sole gain by phrasing 
 consists in the fact that all of the four words, with no 
 variation from their separate forms, are written without 
 lifting the pen. But when, under well-settled phrasing 
 laws, we express will by the I hook, have by the f-v hook, 
 and had by halving, there results the beautiful, compact 
 
 combination ...0. In this last phraseogram no word takes 
 
 the form it would take if written separately. The words are 
 blended, rather than joined. Each word is inseparably 
 merged with the others. No one of them as written in the) 
 phrase could be taken away from it without marring, or 
 making unmeaning, some of those remaining. 
 
 19. A word-blending phrase, then, as distinguished from 
 a simple or word-joining phrase, is one in which some or all 
 of the words are so merged and intertwined as to be in- 
 capable of separation without destroying, not only the 
 phrase itself, but the significance of some or all of the forms 
 which, under phrasing laws, the different words have as- 
 sumed. 
 
 BROKEN PHRASES. 
 
 20. The definition already cited that phrasing is "the 
 joining of words without lifting the pen" is further de- 
 fective, because it ignores many phrases (commonly and 
 properly so called,) in the writing of which the pen is lifted 
 for the purpose of bringing into operation that useful ex- 
 pedient, "proximity,"* by which, for the purpose of imply- 
 
 *See Chapter XII. 
 
24 PHRASES DEFINED AND DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 ing certain omitted syllables or words, two characters are 
 brought nearer to each other than ordinary, though not 
 near enough to join. Thus the phrase from day to day, (in 
 which, for the purpose of indicating the omitted words 
 from and to, the two d's are brought close together, though 
 not connected,) is a true phrase so named and recognized 
 by all stenographers: yet no words are joined; the two 
 strokes constituting the whole phrase as written are sep- 
 arated by a pen-lift. Phrases in the writing of which the 
 pen is thus lifted for the sake of indicating by "proximity" 
 omitted syllables or wordt may be called broken phrases. 
 
 ELLIPTIC PHRASES. 
 
 21. The definition already cited is further inaccurate, 
 because it ignores the fact that, under the laws of phrasing, 
 many words can be and are omitted altogether not even 
 indicated by any stenographic expedient such as "prox- 
 imity," but suggested or implied to the mind of the reader 
 by the sense or context only. Thus the phrase Jesus of 
 Nazareth is not a joining of the three words constituting 
 the word-group; for one of them of is altogether omit- 
 ted in the writing, to be supplied in reading by the sense 
 or context. Phrases of this sort, in the writing of which 
 there is an ellipsis of certain words words being abso- 
 lutely left out without other indication than what the sense 
 or context gives may be called elliptic phrases. 
 
 COMPOSITE PHRASES. 
 
 22. Somewhat lengthy phrases are often formed by a 
 combination of several shorter phrases. Thus the phrase 
 I think you are of my opinion may be compounded of the 
 three shorter phrases, I think, you are, and of my opinion. 
 A phrase in which several smaller phrases are thus com- 
 bined may be called a composite phrase. The sub-phrases, 
 as they may be called, are frequently connected by the word 
 that, or some other connective word, as in the phrases I 
 think that you icill be, I know that there are many, I sup- 
 
PHRASES DEFINED AND DISTINGUISHED. 25 
 
 pose that it is true. Of the composite parts, some may be 
 simple phrases, and others word-blending phrases. For in- 
 
 stance, in the phrase they will not take offense 
 
 they will not, a word-blending phrase, is followed by take 
 offense, a simple or word-joining phrase. 
 
 SPECIAL OR IRREGULAR PHRASES. 
 
 23. Another class of phrases ignored by the definition 
 cited consists of those in which a brief, compact represent- 
 ation of certain words is attained by arbitrary and irregular 
 methods of expression, peculiar perhaps to a single case or 
 a few cases not in accord with any general law of phras- 
 
 ing. Of such phrases, vice versa .......... " ..... is an illustration. 
 
 DEFINITION OF A PHRASE. 
 
 24. In view of the classification of phrases just given, 
 the following, covering all these classes, will be found to 
 be an accurate definition of a phrase: A combination of 
 characters (simple or complex, continuously written or in 
 close proximity) representing a group of words, as contra- 
 distinguished from signs representing words singly or sep- 
 arately. 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 THE PHRASING VOCABULARY. 
 
 WHAT WORDS MAY BE PHRASED. 
 
 25. "The mere desultory stringing of words together is 
 not phrasing." Even though the words may conveniently 
 be joined, yet to phrase indiscriminately, without regard to 
 the fitness of the words for phraseographic connection, is, 
 especially to the young writer, a decided loss in speed and 
 legibility. As a matter of fact, most reporters confine their 
 phrasing almost entirely to what may be called the phrasing 
 words. The really useful phrases of the language are made 
 from a very limited body of words, which may be called the 
 phrasing vocabulary. The reporter's really indispensable 
 phrases are, in general, varied combinations of a few fre- 
 quently-recurring connective words, which, by reason of 
 their frequency in all ordinary speech, make up at least 
 one-half of any spoken matter. It may be truly said that a 
 few hundred words, such as take, can, shall, may, this, etc., 
 constitute the ordinary phrase-building material of the lan- 
 guage. From this apparently limited material the prac- 
 tised reporter constructs an infinite variety of colloquial 
 and highly useful phrases. The combinations which it is 
 possible to obtain from the joining of these comparatively 
 few common words are practically innumerable. An emi- 
 nent reporter (Mr. Edwin R. Gardiner,) has aptly said: 
 "Common speech comprises but a few thousand words; new 
 opportunities of uniting them are constantly presenting 
 themselves; we may list these combinations by the thou- 
 sands, and never list them all." To learn all these com- 
 binations by rote would baffle the most prodigious memory. 
 
PHRASING VOCABULARY. 27 
 
 Fortunately no such task of memorizing is required; for 
 when the common words which are the factors of all or- 
 dinary phrases are thoroughly familiarized, together with 
 the principles by which these words may be joined, number- 
 less combinations, covering the greatest variety of connec- 
 tions and sequences, can be readily written off-hand, in 
 whatever order they may come, as they fall from the speak- 
 er's tongue. 
 
 26. The words constituting what we call the phrasing 
 vocabulary have certain characteristics in common: 
 
 (a.) They are words of almost constant recurrence 
 the language of ordinary speech words which readily 
 combine on the tongue and should readily combine on the 
 pen. A phrase is generally bad if the words composing 
 it are, in themselves or in their peculiar connection or com- 
 bination, rare or unusual. 
 
 (&.) The word-forms of the phrasing vocabulary are 
 capable of facile execution. Many words, though extremely 
 brief in their ordinary isolated forms, have been provided 
 for phrasing purposes with forms still more abbreviated. 
 Thus it, written when standing alone with a single stroke of 
 the pen, is frequently represented still more briefly in 
 phrases in fact, is not written at all, but merely indicated 
 by simply shortening to half its ordinary length the preced- 
 ing stroke. So will, are and have, each expressed ordinarily 
 by a brief consonant stroke, find still more compact repre- 
 sentation in phrases by means of the hooks for I, r and v. 
 Again^the word their, written very compactly if alone, is 
 often expressed still more briefly in a phrase by doubling 
 the length of the preceding stroke. So also the word us, 
 written when standing alone by a consonant stroke, becomes 
 generally only a small circle when written in phrases. 
 
 (c.) The word-forms of the phrasing vocabulary are 
 readily legible, not only because familiarized by frequent 
 recurrence, but because in general they do not require to be 
 distinguished by position, and hence can, without restric- 
 tion, take their places in any part of a phrase. 
 
 (d.) They have a special capacity for taking on, or 
 
28 PHRASING VOCABULARY. 
 
 merging with themselves, other common words, by means 
 of the hooks, circles and other modifications or appendages 
 which in phrasing represent whole words, and not, as in 
 word-writing, merely portions of words. 
 
 WORDS WHICH MAY NOT BE PHRASED. 
 
 27. While certain words phrase so readily that it may 
 be said they invite the writer to phrase them, others, in 
 order to be perfectly legible, require to stand alone. Among 
 the class of words to be phrased with great caution, because 
 in general they need isolation to make them legible, are the 
 following: 
 
 (a.) Unique or uncommon words, including proper 
 names. Especially should rare words of long outlines be 
 phrased sparingly. When in phrases such words are com- 
 bined with others, the reader is often puzzled to guess 
 where a particular word-outline begins or ends. With an 
 unfamiliar word, isolation is generally necessary for legi- 
 bility, while, on the contrary, familiar and especially col- 
 loquial words are often more legible when written in groups 
 than singly. It should be added, however, that a word 
 unfamiliar when first encountered may by repetition, even 
 during the course of a single brief speech, become familiar 
 enough to be freely phrased. 
 
 (&.) Words which ordinarily require distinctive posi- 
 tion to make them legible cannot in general be used in a 
 phrase except at the beginning, unless some method of dis- 
 tinction other than position such, for instance, as vocali- 
 zation be resorted to. The subject of position as a* means 
 of word-distinction will be fully treated in a later chapter. 
 
 (c.) Incomplete outlines, unless the words represented 
 be very familiar, are phrased less freely and more cau- 
 tiously than words in which all the consonants are ex- 
 pressed, because in general the former are not intrinsically 
 so legible as the latter. If, for instance, one should join 
 the words my influence, the phrase, on account of the use 
 of the word influence, would probably not be legible, while 
 my reasons would be be readily recognized. 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 
 THE REQUISITES OF A GOOD PHRASE. 
 
 "A good phonographic phrase is easy to write anil pleasant to read. 
 It brings the words harmoniously together like the members of a happy 
 family; and to see them in such loving juxtaposition gives one a certain 
 sense of satisfaction and pleasure." <.T- A. Reed.) 
 
 SHOULD FOLLOW NATURAL SPEECH. 
 
 28. A good phonographic phrase simply groups upon 
 paper, words already grouped by the mind and tongue. 
 Words which nature has thus blended and coalesced which 
 "flow together as if they were the syllables of a single 
 word,"* and, therefore, are uttered with more than average 
 rapidity suggest and require some briefer mode of ex- 
 pression than isolated word-forms. This suggests the first 
 requirement of a good phrase. 
 
 29. (a.) "It should as nearly as possible follow the 
 groupings of natural speech." (Irland). Back of, and an- 
 terior to, the sign-group, there should be a natural thought- 
 group and a natural word-group. Words are joined in sten- 
 ographic phrases, not entirely because it is convenient to 
 join them, but because, by the laws of thought and lan- 
 guage, they belong together. 
 
 SENSE RELATION. 
 
 30. (&.) Words between which there is naturally a 
 rhetorical or grammatical pause should not be joined. To 
 connect words whose sense relation is not close gives a 
 combination which is not suggestive. Two words may so 
 
 "Fred Irland. 
 
30 REQUISITES OF A GOOD PHRASE. 
 
 constantly recur together that in ninety-nine cases out of a 
 hundred they would be easily and properly joined; yet in 
 some rare instances those words, though one immediately 
 succeeds the other, may De so separated in sense relation 
 as to require a separation of their written signs. Thus 
 it is not is a very common and, in general, an unobjection- 
 able phrase; yet the sentence I said that it is, not that it 
 was, would be very perplexing to the reader if not were 
 joined to it is, immediately preceding. So the phrase in 
 this is ordinarily unimpeachable; yet in the sentence, the 
 vessel came in this morning, the words in this could not 
 properly be written as a phrase. 
 
 31. (c.) The words of a phrase should join each other 
 easily and fluently; otherwise no time is saved by joining. 
 "Awkward joinings, however closely the words may be 
 related, are to be avoided." If the phrase is one in which 
 the hand must pause as it passes from word to word, it is 
 better to lift the pen, because such phrases waste time, 
 instead of saving it. There are many cases in which the 
 tyro loses time by joining, or undertaking to join, words 
 which might much better be written separately. Defining 
 generally the characteristics of a bad junction, it may be 
 said that either it is non-facile (on account of clumsily- 
 joined outlines, forced hooks, etc.,) or, while manually easy 
 of execution, it leads to ambiguity or difficulty in reading. 
 
 32. Prom the fact that some of the letters of the alpha- 
 bet do not so easily and gracefully connect as others, bad or 
 indifferent junctions in the writing of single words are 
 sometimes unavoidable; but such junctions are generally 
 avoidable when they occur between two words in the midst 
 of a phrase. 
 
 SOME BAD OR DIFFICULT JUNCTIONS MUST BE TOLERATED. 
 
 33. But "the young writer should not reject a phrase 
 because he cannot at first make it with perfect ease and 
 accuracy; for it may be a phrase quite desirable with refer- 
 ence both to speed and legibility." (Practical Shorthand.) 
 
REQUISITES OF A GOOD PHRASE. 31 
 
 It may correspond with certain natural word-groups, so 
 that the writer instinctively feels that the words should be 
 written together, rather than separately, and the sense re- 
 lation of the words may be so close that they will be more 
 readily recognized together than apart. 
 
 " A LITTLE EXTRA CARE." 
 
 34. It is impossible that all junctions should be equally 
 good; and the writer must be content occasionally with 
 some which are not absolutely unimpeachable which are 
 merely admissible. A distinguished stenographic author 
 has said: "It is generally better to disjoin than to make 
 phrase-outlines that contain difficult junctions; but occa- 
 sionally speed is gained and legibility not impaired by in- 
 cluding in a phrase, junctions which require a little extra 
 care." (Munson's Phrase-Book, 121.) 
 
 35. Besides, the supposed difficulty of a particular junc- 
 tion, as it strikes the writer on the first trial, may not be 
 intrinsic or insurmountable, but may arise simply from 
 want of practice on that particular combination. These 
 difficult but not inadmissible phrases should be treated as 
 the beginner treats certain letters of the alphabet. When 
 he finds any particular consonant stroke more difficult of 
 execution than others, He does not for that reason discard it. 
 He simply recognizes the fact that this particular character 
 calls for a movement which habit has not made easy for his 
 hand or fingers. He accepts the unusual difficulty of the 
 stroke as a reason for giving it an exceptional amount of 
 practice; and thus he finally reaches a point where every 
 alphabetic stroke is made without conscious difficulty or 
 effort. The same remark applies to apparently difficult 
 phrase combinations. There are some phrases which, 
 though difficult at first, become eventually easy by contin- 
 ued practice, or if not absolutely easy, easy enough to be 
 preferable to a pen-lift, particularly if the phrase be a very 
 common one, and one which embraces words closely con- 
 nected in sense. Though the joinings be imperfect and on 
 
32 REQUISITES OF A GOOD PHRASE. 
 
 first trial somewhat awkward, the phrase may be unambig- 
 uous and in practice too useful to be dispensed with. 
 
 DON'T UOVUT THE POWER OF THE HAND. 
 
 36. We should not too readily doubt the power of the 
 hand to execute apparently difficult stenographic forms and 
 combinations. What the untrained hand can do is no meas- 
 ure of what can be done by a Land whose powers have been 
 developed by practice. For a couple of hundred years pre- 
 ceding the era of Isaac Pitman, the devisers of stenographic 
 alphabets assumed that it was impossible in rapid writing 
 to make distinctions between heavy strokes and light. 
 Until this delusion was exploded, a simple, philosophic al- 
 phabet was unattainable. And while the Pitmanic system 
 was in its vigorous childhood, an enlarged circle or hook 
 at the beginning of a shorthand outline, was, on account of 
 its supposed awkwardness and difficulty, excluded for years 
 from the system, though now accepted as a part of every 
 version of Pitmanic shorthand. In phrases, as elsewhere 
 in stenography, hand-training plays an important part. To 
 what point should such training be extended? Until "the 
 hand carries out the mind's intention without requiring 
 any special effort to be directed to the mere mechanical 
 execution." (Munson's Phrase-Book, 122.) 
 
 37. When a certain combination which trained writers 
 have approved and adopted seems to the student difficult,, 
 it should for that reason be the more practised until it 
 becomes easy. The shorthand student may well follow the 
 example of a brilliant young English stenographer (Mr. 
 George W. Bunbury), who, detailing the methods of practice 
 by which he won a "speed certificate" for writing 250 words 
 a minute for ten consecutive minutes, says: 
 
 "After taking down any given matter on the first trial, I 
 proceeded to transcribe or read what I had written, circling 
 each outline or phrase ichich I had formed badly or which 
 looked shaky. These outlines and phrases I carefully noted 
 in a small book I carried aixu. with me for that purpose; 
 
REQUISITES OF A GOOD PHRASE. 33 
 
 and when an opportunity presented itself, / wrote and re- 
 wrote them until I acquired the greatest possible facility in 
 forming them." 
 
 38. In this way, junctions which it is desirable to have 
 readily at command, because of their frequency or because 
 of their correspondence with the groupings of ordinary 
 speech, may, though seemingly difficult at first, be made 
 easy by continued practice. 
 
 BAD JUNCTIONS CLASSIFIED. 
 
 39. It would be impossible to classify all the various 
 species of bad junctions, and therefore the following list 
 is not to be considered as exhaustive or complete. 
 
 40. (a.) One class of bad junctions may be called 
 "patched joinings," in making which the writer, in order 
 to accomplish the junction, lifts the pen and replaces it. 
 In this way some young stenographers undertake to write 
 
 such phrases as do not care ....^ gave them 
 
 41. (&.) Bad junctions of another class occur when a 
 full-length and a half-length stroke are run together without 
 a distinct point of junction, so that there is nothing 
 to show where one stroke ends and the other begins, the 
 effect of which is that the characters as intended to be 
 written are not easily recognized. Illustrations: might 
 
 know, right after 
 
 42. (c.) But it must not be assumed that the joining 
 of a full-length and a half-length stroke without an angle 
 is always objectionable. Such phrases as so that are al- 
 lowable, because they come under the rule (applicable to 
 phrases as well as individual words) that a heavy half- 
 Itngth curved stroke may follow a light full-length, straight 
 
34 REQUISITES OF A GOOD PHRASE. 
 
 or curved, without an angle, as in the words feared and 
 named. 
 
 43. (d.) Another class of bad junctions comprises 
 those in which a tick vowel-sign is allowed to glide into or 
 merge with the adjoining character, without any distinct 
 
 point of junction, as in the phrase of opinion 
 
 44. (e.) In other cases an attempt is made to join 
 the final hook of one word and the initial hook of another. 
 
 Illustrations: again call - , , in whichever direc- 
 
 -/ 
 tion , k\ . It should be remembered as a rule 
 
 without exception, that a hook cannot join a hook, unless 
 both be made in the same direction, as in the word ranger 
 
 W '" * - ; . 
 
 45. (f.) In another objectionable class of phrases, two 
 consonant strokes are brought together which cannot be 
 joined without special effort, because the junction is non- 
 angular or obtusely angular, as, which they -/ ., reg- 
 
 ular order w^.-^raJX,^ , from which. 
 
 46. (g.) Again, a bad phrase results where a hook at 
 the beginning or the end of a word joins imperfectly with 
 
 the adjacent stroke, as in the phrase we are told 
 
REQUISITES OF A GOOD PHRASE. 35 
 
 47. In such methods as those just enumerated, the young 
 writer sometimes undertakes to force a junction by special 
 effort, the result being characters which offend the eye and 
 cause loss of time. 
 
 HOW MAY BAD JUNCTIONS BE OBVIATED? 
 
 48. (a.) By refraining from making the contemplated 
 
 phrase; as by writing so large 2 ./.. instead of. ) 
 
 (&.) By changing one of the word-forms, writing, for 
 
 instance, so much ^bs^, ...instead of 
 
 (c.) In cases where, though the junction is somewhat 
 difficult, the phrase is considered allowable or desirable, 
 there must be sufficient extra practice to make the seem- 
 ingly difficult junction easy. 
 
 LINEALITY, ETC. 
 
 49. A good phrase should not extend inconveniently far 
 above the line of writing, like the phrase literary re- 
 searches, or rare resources; nor too far below, like the 
 phrase to this day there appears to ~be; nor too far horizon- 
 tally, like the phrase as many know their necessary effect. 
 Many beginners seem to think that, to phrase properly, 
 all that is necessary is, as word follows word, to keep the 
 pen on the paper until some impossibility of junction re- 
 quires it to be lifted. The objection to phrases which un- 
 duly extend upward or downward or sideward is not only 
 that they "interfere with the writing above or below," or 
 that "time is lost in the pen's return to the line of writing." 
 These objections are strong; but a stronger one is that 
 phrases of undue length upward, downward or sideward 
 disturb the adjustment of the hand by carrying it away 
 from the field in which it is accustomed to move and in 
 which it moves easily. Anyone by careful observation can 
 
36 REQUISITES OF A GOOD PHRASE. 
 
 see that in general the pen performs its work within a lim- 
 ited range. The hand, as it travels across the page, adjusts 
 itself again and again to a constantly changing area of 
 writing, very limited in extent. Each new adjustment pre- 
 pares it for action in a new field, and, generally speaking, 
 is accomplished, if possible, during a pen-lift, not while the 
 act of writing is being performed. This instinctive craving 
 of the hand at certain points for readjustment is what con- 
 stitutes the difficulty of so decided a lateral movement as is 
 required in writing, for instance, the phrase as soon as an- 
 
 other case may occur f }*LjL^^s. ^.T.rr^,. A phrase is 
 
 too long when the hand feels the inconvenience of a too ex- 
 tended movement upward, downward or laterally. But it 
 must not be forgotten that phrases too long for some writers 
 are not too long for others. Some hands can make, without 
 readjustment, a wider sweep of movement than others. 
 This is less on account of intrinsic ability or inability of a 
 particular hand than on account of the way the hand has 
 been trained or is managed. 
 
 50. A good phrase should not contain a confusing suc- 
 cession of similar signs in the same direction, such as the 
 
 phrase in my nomination. : Such phrases 
 
 cause hesitation, the hand and the eye seeming to lose their 
 bearings. 
 
 NOT TOO MANY WORDS. 
 
 51. A good phrase does not contain an excessive num- 
 ber of words. The more words a phrase comprises, the 
 harder it is for the mind, either in writing or in reading, 
 to follow its course without confusion. A distinguished 
 English reporter (T. A. Reed) has said: "It is seldom that 
 more than half a dozen words can be conveniently and ju- 
 
REQUISITES OF A GOOD PHRASE. 37 
 
 diciously joined not often so many. A phrase of three or 
 four nearly-related words is easily written, catches the eye 
 readily, and is deciphered with the utmost ease." This is 
 the view of one whose practice in phrasing was far more 
 conservative than that of many other expert reporters. On 
 this particular point no absolute rule can be given. The 
 individual writer, when he has had the benefit of proper 
 practice, is in the last resort the only competent judge with 
 regard to the number of words which he can include in a 
 phrase, without defeating speed, convenience or legibility 
 
 A GOOD PHRASE IS LEGIBLE. 
 
 52. A prime requisite of a good phrase is that it should 
 be capable of being read easily and unmistakably. Some- 
 times one phrase is liable to be mistaken for another, or for 
 a word of several strokes. Sometimes there is difficulty in 
 reading, because there has been introduced into the phrase 
 a word-sign (that is, an incomplete outline, containing less 
 than all the consonants of the word) not common and sug- 
 gestive enough to be recognized when thus combined with 
 other words. Certain incomplete outlines, such as shall, 
 will, thinlc, opinion and many others, may be freely intro- 
 duced into phrases, while other outlines, to be legible, re 
 quire to be written separately and in their normal positions. 
 The phrase, many different times, would not be easily read, 
 because the signs different and times require isolation and 
 special position to make them legible. What incomplete 
 outlines and what unvocalized word-forms may without 
 peril be introduced into phrases will be best learned by ex- 
 perience and practice especially by practice upon phrases 
 given in this book, in collecting which the effort has been 
 to introduce as many as possible of those common words 
 which go to make up the phrasing vocabulary. 
 
 53. Sometimes a phrase is hard to read because it con- 
 tains some difficult and unfamiliar word, which ought to 
 have been, but is not, made clear by vocalization, more or 
 less full. 
 
38 REQUISITES OF A GOOD PHRASE. 
 
 A GOOD PHRASE IS SPONTANEOUS. 
 
 54. A phrase, to be of value, must be spontaneous. It 
 should flow from the pen smoothly and pauselessly, with- 
 out perceptible mental effort. Phrases which, while being 
 written, require close attention in following their intrica- 
 cies, hamper the free movement of the hand and cause hesi- 
 tation. But when it is said that phrases should be spon- 
 taneous should indeed be written almost automatically 
 we do not mean that only such phrases are to be written 
 as can be flung from the pen without thought or effort by 
 one who has never given time or attention to the study of 
 phrasing as a fine art. A good phrase should be sponta- 
 neous in the same sense that the speaking of correct Eng- 
 lish is spontaneous with those who have been educated so 
 to speak. The spontaneity desired is not the spontaneity 
 of ignorance, but the spontaneity of education and culture. 
 Good phrasing habits do not come without cultivation. 
 Phrasing rules, and in some cases particular phrases, aie 
 to be studied until thoroughly familiarized. While it is 
 true that "any conscious effort to make phrases, except as 
 a matter of mere experiment, is a mistake," yet the absence 
 of "conscious effort" should come as the natural result of 
 a masvery of the phrasing art in its principles and details. 
 That phrase which to a tyro may seem difficult, requiring 
 him to "wrestle" with it letter by letter or stroke by stroke, 
 may be in fact not a bad phrase, but an extremely good one, 
 because one that comes easily and naturally (that is spon- 
 taneously) to the writer, if by study and practice he has 
 properly prepared himself for his work. 
 
 55. But though phrases should in general be sponta- 
 neous, it is not meant that all the phrases useful to a re- 
 porter can be devised off-hand, on the spur of the moment, 
 during the hurry of reporting. It would be a mistake to 
 disparage certain highly-useful special phrases which the 
 books have provided to be memorized or which the practical 
 reporter constructs for himself. Through the labor and ex- 
 
REQUISITES OP A GOOD PHRASE. 39 
 
 perience of reporters and authors there have been evolved, 
 and placed in the text-books, to be mastered by every one 
 who would be an expert, certain highly useful phrases 
 which, (because they involve in their construction abstruse 
 rules, or complex mental processes, or arbitrary or unique 
 methods of abbreviation), could scarcely be extemporized 
 by the most accomplished reporter. Besides these highly 
 useful and almost indispensable phrases, others of similar 
 nature are almost daily invented by every practical reporter 
 to meet his personal and immediate needs. Some are not 
 invented during the stress of reporting, but are devised de- 
 liberately beforehand, because their necessity is foreseen. 
 Others of the same nature are gradually evolved during 
 actual reporting work, being suggested by the continued 
 repetition of certain verbal combinations. The reporter, as 
 a particular group of words is spoken again and again, 
 gradually writes it more and more briefly, achieving at last 
 a special phrase, arbitrary perhaps in its character fol- 
 lowing perhaps in its construction no general law but 
 which possibly, because of its aptness and prospective use- 
 fulness, becomes thereafter a permanent part of his report- 
 ing equipment. While insisting that phrases should in gen- 
 eral be spontaneous, we by no means discourage or dispar- 
 age the memorizing or invention of a certain number of 
 these highly useful special or irregular phrases. 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 
 LIMITATIONS, CAUTIONS, ETC. 
 
 56. As the student, by practice and experience, gains 
 gradually a mastery of the principles and rules of phrase- 
 making, he will almost instinctively form, and form cor- 
 rectly, more phrases than can be put in any collected list. 
 But in too many cases, beginners "take much longer time 
 in jerking out inconvenient and illegible joinings than 
 would be occupied in writing words separately." In their 
 zeal they carry phrasing to excess by undertaking to "join 
 every word that is physically capable of uniting with an- 
 other." 
 
 57. The student, ambitious to acquire the art of phras- 
 ing, often errs in assuming that, because a certain number 
 of phrases are formed by the application of a particular 
 principle, the same principle may be indiscriminately ex- 
 tended to all cases apparently similar that can possibly 
 arise. For instance, having employed the I hook to express 
 will in the phrases it will, they will, which will, etc., some 
 students, jumping wildly to the conclusion that in any case 
 the I hook can thus be used, may undertake to express will 
 by the hook in such combinations as the country will, the 
 kingdom will, time will, the result of which must be forms 
 unsuggestive and illegible. 
 
 58. The various phrasing expedients are but a means, 
 not an end, and are always to be used in subordination to 
 the great laws of convenience and legibility. Useful ex- 
 pedients, intended to be time-saving, must not be forcibly 
 and violently brought into play in cases where their em- 
 ployment would really be a hindrance. Correct and con- 
 servative habits in this matter will be a natural outgrowth 
 of a study of these lessons, if the student conscientiously 
 
LIMITATIONS, CAUTIONS, ETC. 41 
 
 confines his phrasing efforts for the time being to the mod- 
 els here given. 
 
 59. The student must especially aim to "avoid a hur- 
 ried, spasmodic style of writing." With many young 
 writers, somewhat familiar with ordinary word-forms, but 
 frequently at loss in determining whether and how to join 
 them, the pen, when phrasing is undertaken, halts at the 
 end of each word, and the writing becomes a succession of 
 spasmodic jerks. Instead of this, there must be acquired 
 the habit of steady, continuous writing. The student should 
 determine not to indulge himself in the too common habit 
 of starting a phrase and then, pen in hand, feeling his way, 
 ;as it were, through the mazes of the phrase, word by word 
 or stroke by stroke. If there must be a hesitating pause, 
 let it come before the phrase is begun and while the writer 
 is deciding, not how a particular word, but how the phrase 
 as a whole, is to be written. Thus the mind will gradually 
 learn to outrun the hand, to think out a phrase as the pen 
 begins to write it; and in this way there will be formed 
 that habit of pauseless, unhesitating movement at which 
 every student should aim. 
 
 60. It should not be assumed that all the phrases or 
 methods of phrasing presented in this book are adapted 
 to all writers. Some hands are naturally fitted for the ex- 
 ecution of minute characters and delicate distinctions, while 
 other hands, in attempting such contractions, must fail. 
 Adopting in substance the language of Thomas Allen Reed, 
 it may be said that if the student has a naturally heavy 
 hand, he will require more time and labor to acquire a 
 facile shorthand execution than his light-fingered brother, 
 and may not indulge in some of the refinements of abbrevia- 
 tion requiring delicate and minute distinctions. But even 
 such should remember that lightness of hand, though large- 
 ly a matter of constitution and temperament, may be culti- 
 vated. What an undisciplined hand can do is no criterion 
 of what the same hand may do after patient, well-directed 
 training. 
 
CHAPTER V. 
 
 POSITION. 
 
 61. With a few exceptions, to be hereafter explained, 
 "the first word of a phrase must be written in its own po- 
 sition, that is, in the position which it properly occupie& 
 when standing alone; and the subsequent words of the 
 phrase must accommodate themselves to the position of the 
 first." (Benn Pitman). If a word be unconnected with any 
 other, or if it be the first word of a phrase, it may be as- 
 signed a particular position for the purpose of indicating 
 some omitted vowel or in some other way distinguishing 
 the word from some word of similar outline; but when a 
 word occurs in the midst of a phrase, the reader cannot 
 know whether it is a word of the first position, or the sec- 
 ond, or the third. Its actual position signifies nothing, be- 
 cause the writer makes no attempt to assign it its normal 
 place, and in fact cannot do so, except by breaking the 
 phrase. Such a word, for instance, as right, though it be- 
 longs normally in the first position, may in the midst of a 
 phrase happen to be written in the second, as in the phrase 
 I must do right; or in the third, as in the phrase our rights^ 
 So the word take, normally belonging in the second posi- 
 tion, may in a phrase occupy the first position, as in the 
 phrase I will take; or the third, as in the phrase let us take. 
 And though the flow of the phrase may chance to throw a 
 word into its normal position, the place it thus occupies, 
 being the result of accident, not intention, counts for noth- 
 ing, either in indicating an omitted vowel or in any other 
 way distinguishing the word from one of similar outline. 
 
 62. To the statement that the first word of a phrase is 
 always written in its own position and thereby determines 
 
POSITION. 43 
 
 or controls the position of the remainder of the phrase, the 
 following exceptions are to be noted: 
 
 63. First exception: A phrase beginning with "Saint," 
 "Mount," "Court," or any other expression which is the 
 common prefix of a familiar class of words, is occasionally 
 treated as a compound word and is given position accord- 
 ingly. This frequently avoids an awkward descent of the 
 
 pen below the line. Illustrations: Mount Vernon 
 
 . ..,.../ 
 
 not ; Saint Joseph , , .../.-.^ not 
 
 64. In accordance with the same general principle, any 
 phrase which by continued repetition has become so familiar 
 that the eye recognizes it as a ivhole, without regard to its 
 separate parts, may be treated as if it were one compound 
 word, and as such may be put in the most convenient posi- 
 tion, without regard to the normal position of the first 
 word. 
 
 *EXERCISE. 
 
 65. Each of the following phrases is to be written, un- 
 der the rule just given, as if it were a compound word, omit- 
 ting the words in parenthesis: 
 
 *The various exercises contained in this book are not, except in a few 
 cases, designed to be memorized certainly not in the dreary and tedi- 
 ous way in which shorthand students ordinarily attempt to memorize 
 phrase-lists. The student should in the first place acquire a perfectly 
 clear understanding of the principle which the particular exercise ex- 
 emplifies. Next he should settle clearly in his mind the approved forms 
 of the various words introduced in the phrases which the exercise calls 
 upon him to write. For this purpose he should refer, if necessary, to his 
 teacher or his text-book. Then he should deliberately and carefully copy 
 the exercise into shorthand, once only, for the purpose of further im- 
 pressing the principle; after which he should write it from dic/aton(the 
 rate being suited to his speed) a sufficient number of times to make the 
 application of the given principle instinctive. After the exercise has 
 thus been mastered, it should, as often as may seem necessary, be recur- 
 red to by way of review. A long exercise may of course be divided, if it 
 should seem advisable, into two or more lessons. (.See note, next page.) 
 
44 POSITION. 
 
 court (of) bankruptcy St. Joseph 
 
 court (of) chancery St. Paul 
 
 court (of) justice St. Peter 
 
 Mt. Vernon St. Vincent 
 
 66. Second exception: When the first word of a phrase 
 is represented by a sign which never stands alone (like the 
 a tick or the "n curl") and hence has no position of its 
 own, the second word is written in its normal place, and 
 the position of the first word is accommodated thereto. II- 
 
 lustration: a voice- >', a few ..,1 , , in similar 
 
 , in 
 
 67. This rule operates not only when the initial a tick 
 is joined, but when, under a rule to be given hereafter, it is 
 disjoined to indicate that con or com follows the a, an or 
 
 and expressed by the tick. Illustrations: and confined 
 
 a confused 
 
 68. The a tick, when it is followed by another tick hay- 
 ing no definite position, or when, as authorized by the Gra- 
 
 The list given in the final chapter of this book embraces none but sim- 
 ple phrases, in which each word as phrased retains the form which it 
 takes when written separately. All of these phrases may be correctly 
 written, without any previous knowledge of phrasing principles, by any 
 student far enough advanced to be acquainted with the ordinary short- 
 hand forms of the individual words. These phrases may therefore be 
 used, in convenient portions, for dictation exercises as soon as the 
 scholar begins the study of this book. Thus used, they will not only di- 
 versify the regular course of study, but will do much toward making 
 the phrasing habit spontaneous, and will incidentally familiarize the 
 student, without rote memorization, with many common and exceeding- 
 ly useful verbal combinations. 
 
POSITION. *5 
 
 ham system, it has a hook prefixed or affixed, is written on 
 
 the line. Illustrations: and a .._,,, and the..^ and 
 
 have ~-z~-, and willu^*,, and are^ But when, in the 
 
 Craham system, the and tick is prefixed to ivhat or would, 
 the tick accommodates itself to the normal position of the 
 added word. (See Paragraph 239.) 
 
 When the first two words of a phrase are in as or in Ms, 
 expressed by the "in curl" and its accompanying circle, the 
 third word of the phrase takes its own position, and the 
 first and second are accommodated thereto. Illustrations: 
 
 /" 
 
 in Ms life --------- ,in Ms letter & _______ f i n MS laugh. 
 
 INITIAL DISPLACEMENT. 
 
 69. Third exception: In some cases the first word of a 
 phrase is partially or wholly displaced in order to give the 
 second word its normal position, and thus distinguish it 
 from some word of similar outline. But in such cases, of 
 course, care must be taken that the word displaced from 
 its regular position, shall still be legible. For convenience, 
 this method of shifting the first word of a phrase from its 
 regular position may be called Initial Displacement. The 
 displacement may be either (a) partial; or (&) complete. 
 
 PARTIAL DISPLACEMENT. 
 
 70. (a.) Sometimes normal position can be given to 
 the second word of a phrase by slightly raising or lowering 
 the first enough to show that displacement is intended, but 
 
46 POSITION. 
 
 not enough to take the word entirely out of position. Illus- 
 
 C 
 
 trations: on these -, of those ..../.. ,1 thank . I .... 
 
 (_ -t 
 
 what if , in these *_...., in those.... 
 
 In each of the examples just given, the word displaced is 
 one belonging to the first position, and is still recognizable 
 as such, in spite of partial displacement. Thus, while the 
 second word gains in legibility by securing its normal and 
 distinctive place, the legibility of the first word is not ob- 
 scured, because its position is merely modified, not abso- 
 lutely sacrificed. 
 
 WHAT WORDS ARE THUS DISPLACED. 
 
 71. The words whose position may thus be modified 
 without being absolutely sacrificed, are always words of the 
 first position, and embrace, 
 
 Certain tick word-signs, such as on, of, all, including 7 
 when it takes the form of a tick; 
 
 Certain "brief w or y" signs, as we, what, with; 
 
 The first-place circle representing his or is; and 
 
 Certain words consisting of horizontal strokes, full- 
 length or half-length, with or without attachments, as any, 
 in, because, my, seem, not. 
 
 ^COMPLETE DISPLACEMENT. 
 
 72. (6.) In some cases distinctive position is secured 
 for the second word of a phrase by taking the first entirely 
 out of its normal place, provided it can be readily recog- 
 nized when thus displaced. But the cases are few and ex- 
 ceptional in which it is desirable to sacrifice altogether 
 the position of the first word of a phrase. 
 
 73. The following words may with safety be entirely 
 displaced at the beginning of a phrase: 
 
POSITION. 47 
 
 The "brief w" sign for we. Illustration : we had not. c..^ 
 We and with, expressed by the initial w hook. Illus- 
 trations: with him ."">..., icith whom, , . 
 
 f N 
 
 The "brief y" word-sign you, especially when inverted.* 
 
 1 
 Illustrations: you did ~~ . V u had JL 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 74. In writing the following pnrases, the first word of 
 each is to be raised or lowered enough to bring the second 
 word into its normal position: 
 
 all these on much 
 
 all those on our part (on downward) 
 
 give these on these 
 
 give tfiose on those 
 
 in these we had 
 
 in those we thank you 
 
 in those days we took 
 
 not these what if 
 
 not those what if they 
 
 of each when these 
 
 of these things when those 
 
 of those things with each 
 
 of those who are with much 
 
 of those who would be with these 
 
 on each with those 
 
 on her part with those who can** 
 
 *The inverted form of the word-sign you is recognized by Graham, 
 but not by Henn Pitman. See Paragraph 304. 
 
 **The author has found it advantageous to write can in all cases with 
 the stroke k, without the final hook. This form is sanctioned by Isaac 
 Pitman and Munson, though.uot by Graham or Benn Pitman. Besides 
 saving one motion of the hand, it facilitates many phrases otherwise dif- 
 ficult or impracticable. 
 
48 POSITION, 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 75. In the following phrases, in order to bring the 
 second word into its regular place, the first word is not 
 merely modified in position, but is completely displaced: 
 
 as if to whom you may 
 
 as if that we found 
 
 as if they we had not 
 
 his own with him 
 
 *to whom with whom 4j 
 
 to whom you can with whom you are 
 
 FIRST TWO WORDS DISPLACED. 
 
 76. In a few cases, especially where u phrase begins 
 with the a tick (which has no position), both the first and 
 second words are accommodated to the position of the third, 
 which is accorded its regular place for the sake of distinc- 
 tion. Illustrations: and with these... ^ , end with 
 
 whom , in my brief. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 77. In the following exercise, the first two words of 
 each phrase are to be so written as to bring the third word 
 into its normal position: 
 
 and we had and with those 
 
 and with each and with whom 
 
 and with him in his opposition 
 
 and with much in his possession 
 
 and with these in my brief 
 
 WHEN IS INITIAL DISPLACEMENT PROPER? 
 
 78. Initial displacement is not to be resorted to when- 
 ever practicable, but only when necessary. For the sake of 
 
 *In this exercise whom is supposed to be written with the ra stroke 
 in the third position, according to Benn Pitman. 
 
POSITION. 49 
 
 legibility, it is generally desirable that the first word of 
 the phrase, rather than the second or the third, should be 
 in its normal position. To bring the second or the third 
 into position by displacing the word or words preceding, 
 is an exceptional device, not readily applied off-hand, and 
 to be resorted to only when it serves some useful purpose. 
 The young student should be chary of undertaking to invent 
 for himself phrases of this class. There will be little need 
 of such phrases outside of those included from time to 
 time in the exercises of this book. 
 
 "is," "HIS," "AS," "HAS." 
 
 79. Some authors allow, and some reporters practise, 
 complete and indiscriminate displacement of is, his, as, has, 
 when any one of these words occurs as the first word of a 
 
 phrase. Thus we see such phrases as is curious _ 9 ^ 
 
 c 
 
 ie nowhere &>*/.. , as these.. , The habit- 
 ual sacrifice of the position of these four words for the 
 purpose of bringing the second word of a phrase into a 
 more desirable place must, in the opinion of the author, 
 be hazardous; and he does not believe it is in accord with 
 the general practice of conservative and careful reporters. 
 All stenographic authorities recognize that when any one 
 of the words is, his, as, has, is written alone, it should be, 
 because it needs to be, distinguished by position. The need 
 of distinctive position would seem to be equally strong or 
 stronger when any one of these words begins a phrase; 
 for the first word of a phrase is the key to the whole ex- 
 pression. The indiscriminate sacrifice of the position of 
 these fcej/-words seems likely to cause hesitation, if not abso- 
 lute inaccuracy, in reading; and it is to be remembered that 
 
60 POSITION. 
 
 the reporter needs to read his notes not only accurately, but 
 promptly. 
 
 DISTINCTION OF "l" AND "HE." 
 
 80. The learner should be especially warned against 
 writing initial / tick so low as to be mistaken for he, and 
 initial he tick so high as to be mistaken for J. For cer- 
 tainty of distinction, as well as convenience of phrasing, 
 the author prefers to assign he to the second position, ac- 
 cording to Mr. Graham, rather than to the first, according 
 to Benn Pitman. Although some writers give to both these 
 ticks the first position, undertaking to preserve a distinc- 
 tion by writing them in different directions (the I tick, 
 when struck in the direction of chay, always upward, and 
 the he tick always downward), the demands of the reporter 
 would appear to be more fully met by allowing some lati- 
 tude in respect to direction, while constantly and strictly 
 preserving distinction of position. If the / tick, when 
 struck in the direction of chay, is never to be written down- 
 ward, and the initial he tick never upward, such useful 
 
 phrases as I would .......... _, he thinks ....... /*.. ..... are im- 
 
 practicable. 
 
 UTILITY OF INITIAL DISPLACEMENT. 
 
 81. Where initial displacement occurs, the second word 
 of the phrase is known to be in its normal position, be- 
 cause the first word is displaced. When, without initial 
 displacement, the second word simply happens to fall into 
 its normal place, its position has no significance, and gives 
 no aid in reading the word. In such a case the word is 
 read, not by the aid of position, but by means of context 
 or outline, or, if necessary, vocalization. 
 
CHAPTER VI. 
 
 WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 CONTEXT. 
 
 82. One of the greatest aids to a stenographer in read- 
 ing his notes is context. Frequently it illuminates a sen- 
 tence which otherwise would be hopelessly obscure. It is 
 one of the commonest and most useful means by which 
 the practised reporter distinguishes words whose outlines 
 are to the eye precisely similar. The assumption is often 
 made that two or more words embracing the same con- 
 sonants must be in all cases distinguished by differing 
 methods of shorthand representation. But the danger of 
 using a single sign with two or more different significa- 
 tions is often exaggerated. If it were the business of the 
 stenographer to report isolated words, with no connection 
 in sense, very different systems of shorthand from those 
 now in vogue would be required. But practical reporting 
 is the reporting of words as they stand in sentences words 
 connected by grammar and sense in short, words with a 
 context. Whilst theoretically it may seem desirable that 
 no stenographic sign should in any case have more mean- 
 ings than one, the reporter finds that in many cases a char- 
 acter having two or more significations may be in practice 
 as unambiguous as if it had but one; because, generally, 
 in sensible sentences, as they actually occur in reading, 
 writing and speaking, the possible significations of a par- 
 ticular character or word, if they have been properly as- 
 signed, cannot be substituted one for another and still 
 
52 WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 "make sense." In ordinary discourse the listener very rare- 
 ly has difficulty in giving to each word the sense intended 
 (though words of multiple meaning are constantly em- 
 ployed), because the context gives the key. So it is not 
 strange that the shorthand representatives of words should 
 admit of similar latitude of signification. 
 
 THE LAW OF SAFE AMBIGUITY. 
 
 83. The law of multiple meanings, or safe ambiguity, 
 may be stated thus: Two or more significations may safely 
 be attached to a single sign, if those significations are so 
 remote in sense that when the signs are linked with a con- 
 text in any intelligently constructed sentence, the wrong 
 signification cannot reasonably or sensibly be substituted 
 for the right one. It will be found that in the arrangement 
 of the word-signs of the stenographic system, where two or 
 more meanings have been assigned to a single character, 
 the assignment has in general been made in accordance 
 with the principle just stated. 
 
 84. Context as a means of word-distinction becomes 
 especially helpful in the reading and writing of phrases; 
 for, as has been well said, "When phrase combinations are 
 well chosen and correctly written, the words are more 
 easily read than when written separately." (Isaac Pit- 
 man.)* 
 
 THREE METHODS OF WOKD-DISTINCTION. 
 
 85. Two or more words embracing the same consonants, 
 if liable to be mistaken one for another (that is, if not dis- 
 tinguished by context), are, when written as isolated words, 
 distinguished either by position, by difference of outline, 
 or by vocalization. Words needing to be thus distinguished 
 
 *Mr. Clarence E. Walker, in his recent work entitled "Speed and 
 Legibility," draws this acute and important distinction between "a pre- 
 ceding context" and "a succeeding context:" "Forms which . . have to 
 be determined from context can be safely used, if a preceding context 
 determines them ; but where you have to refer to a succeeding context, 
 unless an immediately succeeding context, your reading will suffer, even 
 though such determination can always be made." 
 
WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 53 
 
 make up the lists of "distinguished words" as found in the 
 text-books. So far as possible, words joined in phrases are 
 distinguished in the same way as when standing alone. But 
 in phrasing, the reporter's favorite method of distinction 
 by position is to a large extent impracticable. Words 
 which, standing alone, are distinguished by position cannot 
 be thus distinguished in phrases except in two cases: 
 
 (a.) A word which begins a phrase can, of course, and 
 generally does, retain its accustomed place, and is thus 
 distinguished from any antagonistic or conflicting word as 
 fully as if it were not phrased. 
 
 (&.) The second or third word of a phrase is sometimes 
 brought into its normal position by displacing the pre- 
 ceding word or words, as explained in the last chapter. 
 
 86. As, in phrases, positional distinction between words 
 liable to conflict is in most cases lost, care must be taken 
 that, if necessary, some other and effective method of dis- 
 tinction be substituted. We should, however, discriminate 
 between words ordinarily written in position because they 
 need to be so distinguished, and words which are in no 
 danger of conflict, which can readily be distinguished by 
 context, but which, when standing alone, are written in po- 
 sition, not because there is danger from some conflicting 
 word of similar outline, but merely in deference to a gen- 
 eral rule of locating words according to their accented vow- 
 els. Astonishingly numerous are the words which lose their 
 positional distinction in phrases, and yet, with no substi- 
 tuted method of distinction, are perfectly legible. For ex- 
 ample, some and seem, mind and amount, etc., when writ- 
 ten separately, are written in position in accordance with 
 their accented vowels; but in such phrases as there are 
 some, it may seem, to my mind, large amount, the ordinary 
 positional distinction between some and seem, mind and 
 amount, is lost; yet (thanks to that potent friend of the 
 reporter, context), there is no loss of legibility. 
 
 87. To know what words commonly written in position 
 may be phrased without regard to position or any other 
 
54 WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 method of distinction, is a species of knowledge which the 
 young reporter will gradually learn from practice upon 
 such exercises as this book gives. In determining whether 
 any particular word, ordinarily written in position, may be 
 freely introduced in phrases without positional or other 
 distinction, the question to be asked is, can this word be 
 recognized infallibly by its outline alone, or must it, be- 
 cause similar in outline to some other word, be in some 
 way distinguished? In the case of a word which, standing 
 alone, is necessarily distinguished by position, the loss of 
 positional distinction may be supplied in phrases, first, by 
 the rule of Exclusion (a method of distinction peculiar to 
 phrasing); or, second, by Difference of Outline (sometimes 
 called "Variation") ; or, third, by Vocalization. 
 
 EXCLUSION DEFINED. 
 
 88. Two words of similar outline, ordinarily and ne- 
 cessarily distinguished by position, may be distinguished for 
 phrasing purposes by adopting it as an invariable rule that 
 one of the words shall never be admitted into any phrase 
 (except of course when it begins a phrase), while the other 
 word may be freely joined. This is called distinction by 
 Exclusion. For instance, indeed and no doubt, perfectly 
 distinguished by difference of position when unconnected 
 with other words, are liable to conflict when phrased, ex- 
 cept at the beginning of phrases. To obviate this difficulty, 
 it is generally adopted as a rule that indeed must not be 
 admitted into any phrase except at the beginning, while no 
 doubt may be phrased freely. It is obvious that, if one of 
 the words or expressions be always written separately and 
 in position, the other, though freely phrased without regard 
 to position, cannot be mistaken. 
 
 WHICH WORD SHOULD BE EXCLUDED* 
 
 89. When it is decided that of two particular words, 
 one shall, for the sake of avoiding ambiguity, be excluded 
 from phrases, the word selected for exclusion, (that is, 
 
WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 55 
 
 i 
 
 selected for the slower method of writing), should be *he 
 less common and useful of the two words; or if there seema 
 to be no room for preference in this respect, then we should 
 reserve for phrasing purposes the word which the phrase 
 brings into or nearest to its own position, rather than the 
 word which the phrase carries away from its own position. 
 For instance, as to go and to give must be distinguished, 
 we join go in order to bring it into its own position; and 
 we disjoin give for the same reason. So, in distinguishing 
 of me, and of him, we join me, and disjoin him; but in the 
 phrases, to me and to him, we join him, and disjoin me. 
 
 VARIATION OF OUTLINE. 
 
 90. Words of similar outlines which in phrases lose 
 their positional distinction, may be distinguished, if dis- 
 tinction be necessary, by giving to one of them a different 
 outline from its usual one. Thus the stroke t standing 
 alone, above the line, is perfectly clear as a word-sign for 
 time, but in many phrases, would scarcely be legible. The 
 method of distinction adopted in such a case is to substi- 
 tute the full outline of the word for the incomplete outline 
 used as a word-sign. The substitution of a full outline for 
 an incomplete outline is one of the several methods cf 
 "Variation" which will be explained in the next chapter. 
 
 VARIATION FACILITATES JUNCTIONS. 
 
 91. It may be remarked incidentally that in a phrase, 
 an unusual outline is often given to a word, not for the 
 sake of word-distinction, but to accomplish an easy junction 
 with the preceding or following word. This subject will 
 be more fully treated in the next chapter. 
 
 VOCALIZATION AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR POSITION. 
 
 92. When distinction by Exclusion or by Variation 
 seems unadvisable, there remains the method of distinction 
 by Vocalization; that is to say, two words of similar out- 
 line, if liable to be confounded, are often distinguished by 
 
56 WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 adopting it as an inflexible rule that one of the pair, not 
 necessarily' both, shall always be vocalized. For instance, 
 the words there and other, if occurring in the midst of a 
 phrase, are distinguished by uniformly vocalizing other. 
 
 WHY VOCALIZATION IS TO BE PREFERRED. 
 
 93. Of the three methods of distinction already pointed 
 out as open to the phrase-writer Exclusion, Variation and 
 Vocalization the last is generally the best. Unlike Varia- 
 tion, it does not disturb the uniformity of the writer's out- 
 lines. To write a given word at different times in two or 
 three different ways, tends to cause hesitation, and there- 
 fore is not a desirable expedient, though sometimes neces- 
 sary. 
 
 94. Vocalization is better, too, than Exclusion, because 
 the latter frequently compels the writer to break a natural 
 and desirable phrase, and excludes from his phrasing vo- 
 cabulary one of two words, both of which may be common 
 and useful. 
 
 WHICH WORD SHOULD BE VOCALIZED/ 
 
 95. When, for the sake of word-distinction, resort is 
 had to Vocalization, both of the words may be vocalized 
 whenever they occur, or (what is decidedly preferable), 
 one only may be vocalized, allowing the other to be distin- 
 guished by the absence of vocalization. Thus, in the 
 phrases by their and by other, if other be always vocalized, 
 their will always be legible without vocalization. If the 
 two words needing to be distinguished are of frequent oc- 
 currence, it "pays" to vocalize habitually only a particular 
 one of the pair. 
 
 96. The word selected for vocalization should be uie 
 less common of the two; or if the two words seem equally 
 common and useful, let that one be vocalized which the 
 phrase takes out of position. In this way we distinguish 
 we may live and we may love by vocalizing love, which the 
 phrase takes away from its ordinary place. 
 
WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 57 
 
 FULL VOCALIZATION NOT NECESSARY. 
 
 97. Usually the word distinguished by vocalization need 
 not be fully vocalized; that is to say, all the vowels need 
 not be inserted. Generally a single characteristic or dis- 
 tinctive vowel (that is, a vowel belonging to one of the 
 words and not the other) is sufficient. But a rare word, if 
 introduced into a phrase, should be vocalized as fully as 
 time may allow, just as it would be by any careful writer 
 if it stood alone. It is fully vocalized, not for fear it may 
 be mistaken for some other word, but for fear that, being a 
 strange outline, it may not be read at all. 
 
 98. A word which sometimes needs vocalization may 
 not need it in every case. The stenographer, as he grows 
 in experience, will frequently see on the instant, as he 
 writes a word, the impossibility of misreading the unvocal- 
 ized outline, and will, of course, omit vocalization, though 
 the same word in another case might require it. 
 
 PECULIAR VOCALIZATION. 
 
 99. A method of vocalization peculiar to phrasing is 
 practised by many reporters. Though an incomplete out- 
 line used as a word-sign does not usually require or even 
 allow vocalization, such an outline is sometimes made clear 
 in phrasing by the insertion of a vowel. For example, the 
 reporter, having hurriedly phrased the words this language, 
 may immeditely see a possibility of the phrase being read 
 this thing; so, by way of precaution he inserts a distin- 
 
 guishing vowel, thus ...\^...^,.... Or, having, on the spur of the 
 
 moment, phrased th.is object L , he instantly sees that, 
 
 though this subject would be written .. >O....,, the small dif- 
 
58 WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 ference between a single and a double circle may not insure 
 the phrase against being hastily misread. So, instead of re- 
 writing it, he inserts, as a safeguard against mistake, a 
 
 characteristic or distinguishing vowel, thus.....V$ (Gra- 
 
 ham's Second Reader, page 99.) In such cases, the vowel 
 inserted is, of course, the one belonging to the particular 
 part of the word-sign which is written in lieu of the whole. 
 
 VOCALIZATION OF BADLY-SHAPED OUTLINES. 
 
 100. Sometimes a word or a phrase which, if the char- 
 acters were carefully shaped, would be perfectly legible, is, 
 in the hurry of writing, slightingly or imperfectly formed; 
 and 1he defect is instantly recognized by the writer. In 
 such cases vocalization is often his hastily-seized safeguard 
 against possible misreading. A vowel or two, however hur- 
 riedly inserted, may show clearly the word intended, and 
 the insertion may be much more quickly accomplished than 
 retouching the outline of the word or re-writing the phrase. 
 
CHAPTER VII. 
 
 VARIATION OF OUTLINE. 
 
 101. Occasionally a word assumes in a phrase a form 
 different from that which it takes when it stands alone. 
 Uniformity of outline (in general highly desirable) is in 
 these cases departed from in order to accomplish one or 
 more of the following-named purposes: First, to promote 
 brevity by writing certain words much more briefly under 
 phrasing laws than they could be written if standing alone; 
 second, to promote legibility by distinctions of outline be- 
 tween words which, if written alike, might be confounded; 
 third, to secure facile junctions where, if ordinary word- 
 forms were adhered to, junctions would be difficult or im- 
 possible. 
 
 102. The variations of outline which take place in the 
 accomplishment of the objects just named may be classified 
 as follows: 
 
 PHRASE WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 103. (1.) The circles, the hooks, the halving princi- 
 ple, the double-lengthing principle, etc., are used to fur- 
 nish a body of word-signs peculiar to phrasing signs which 
 represent many of the leading words of the phrasing vocab- 
 ulary, but which are not and cannot be used to represent 
 such words when standing alone. A few of the very com- 
 mon and useful words for which in phrasing we provide 
 briefer signs than the ordinary ones are, will, represented 
 by the I hook; are and our, represented by the r hook; own 
 and one, represented by then hook; it, had and would, repre- 
 
60 VARIATION OF OUTLINE. 
 
 sented by halving the preceding stroke; their and they are, 
 represented by making the preceding stroke double length, 
 etc. Thus there arise a number of what may be called 
 phrase word-signs. 
 
 104. (2.) In the use of these phrase word-signs, the 
 word-forms to which they are applied or attached undergo 
 frequently some change of outline. For instance, in the 
 phrase at it, we make at half length to add it; and the two 
 words merge or coalesce in such a way that both lose their 
 distinctive forms. The stroke which before modification 
 was one word loses its accustomed length and -thereby be- 
 comes two words. So, when we attach their to have by 
 making v double length, both words lose their original or 
 ordinary forms, and merge or coalesce into a single stroke. 
 
 "WORD-SPLITTING." 
 
 105. (3.) In some cases modifications may be applied 
 to a stem to represent, not the whole of a succeeding word, 
 'but only the first part of it, the remainder being supplied 
 
 lay the next stroke. Thus, in the phrase my time > 
 
 the first letter of the word time is expressed by halving the 
 preceding stroke; and the word is completed by joining the 
 
 m. So in the phrase in like manner , the I 
 
 hook on in supplies the first letter of the succeeding word 
 
 like. In the phrase in receipt .."""[ , the r hook on in 
 
 gives us the r which begins the word receipt. 
 
VARIATION OF OUTLINE. Gl 
 
 "RESTORATION." 
 
 106. (4.) For the sake of convenient phrasing, a full 
 outline (that is, an outline embracing all the consonants 
 of the word) may be substituted for an incomplete outline 
 ordinarily used as a word-sign. Thus, in the phrase: so 
 much and very much, much is written with the full outline 
 because the ordinary word-sign, chay in the third position, 
 cannot easily be attached to so or very. In various phrases, 
 time, always written when standing alone with the word- 
 sign t in the first position, is, for the sake of legibility, ex- 
 pressed by the two strokes tm, as in the phrase this 
 
 time .:*?. , because in such cases the stroke t, no longer 
 
 standing alone and no longer distinguished by position, 
 would scarcely be recognized as intended to represent time. 
 This process of substituting a full outline for an incom- 
 plete outline ordinarily used as a word-sign, is sometimes 
 called "Restoration." 
 
 VARIATION WITHOUT CURTAILMENT. 
 
 107. (5.) The varied form may embrace all the con- 
 sonants of the regular form, but these (for the purpose of 
 word-distinction or facile phrasing) may be combined or 
 expressed in a different way from the ordinary, or may be 
 written in a different direction. Illustrations: in that State 
 
 . , bear in mind ... V:. , this shipment 
 
 A variation of the same nature is practised^tgjGraham 
 writers when, in order to meet phrasing exigencies, you is 
 
 inverted, as in the phrase when you do 
 
62 VARIATION OF OUTLINE. 
 
 FICTITIOUS PRIMITIVES. 
 
 108. (6.) Occasionally, to achieve a phrase, a conso- 
 nant stroke is substituted for a tick word-sign or a "brief 
 w or y" word-sign or a circle word-sign, as where or is rep- 
 resented by the upward r in the phrase three or four. In 
 many cases, however, the stroke thus substituted for the 
 briefer sign is never used unmodified, but is merely made 
 tue basis for abbreviations or modifications which cannot be 
 applied to the briefer ordinary sign. Thus, by assuming 
 the stroke v represents of (though never so used in fact,) we 
 
 obtain the useful phrases, of their ..?***.., of all .,,_ 
 
 and of all their ....... >?>. By treating,,.^. as if it repre- 
 sented were, though never used unmodified for that pur- 
 pose, we obtain, by applying abbreviating principles, the 
 
 useful phrases were it^, were it not,...c^..^ t were not,.tS>. 
 
 The substituted consonant stroke which, by a convenient 
 fiction, is treated in these cases as if it were the accepted 
 sign of the primitive word (though it is not such in fact 
 and possibly is never written as such) may be called a "fic- 
 titious primitive." 
 
 OMISSION OF LETTERS. 
 
 109. (7.) Ordinary word-forms may be varied by the 
 omission of one or more letters. This is sometimes done 
 under some general law of ellipsis, as when we convert the 
 st loop into a circle, and write mws'&e instead of must be. 
 (See Paragraph 153.) In other cases, a letter or several 
 letters of a word are omitted, not in pursuance of any gen- 
 eral phrasing principle, but arbitrarily, giving us what is 
 
VARIATION OF OUTLINE. 63 
 
 called a "special phrase," as honorable Senator 
 
 CUSTOMARY PHRASES VARIED. 
 
 110. (8.) Sometimes a particular phrase, ordinarily 
 written in a particular way, may, when it becomes part of 
 a larger phrase, be varied in form or direction in order to 
 facilitate a junction. Thus it will, usually represented by 
 
 J. 
 
 drops its ordinary form in the phrase when it 
 
 will . 
 
 COXTRA-XORMAL EXPEDIENTS JUSTIFIED. 
 
 111. (9.) Another form of variation occurs when, in 
 t.:e exercise of what may be called "reporting license," we 
 give to certain shorthand characters or elements a value or 
 signification different in phrases from that assigned them 
 iu the writing of isolated words. In such cases, rules, 
 (which are made to facilitate the reporter's work, not to 
 hamper it,) are overruled by the great law of convenience. 
 The practical results thus obtained are in many cases of too 
 great value to be sacrificed in deference to abstract, theo- 
 retical consistency. The reporter finds that in exceptional 
 cases it is better that strict rule or principle be violated 
 than that he should continue endlessly to write cumbrous 
 forms, or be deprived of facile phrases because they con- 
 travene some of the ordinary principles of word-formation. 
 
 112. A fundamental truth in the practice of phrasing 
 and it can scarcely be too often repeated is that words 
 naturally and instinctively grouped by the tongue should, 
 if possible, be grouped by the pen. To accomplish this end, 
 
64 VARIATION OF OUTLINE. 
 
 the reporter with cultivated reporting instincts is willing 
 now and then to forego a strict conformity to rule. For 
 instance, he feels it an intolerable detention to break the 
 natural phrase we may be by writing we separately, when 
 the three words may readily be phraseu if mr ia. 
 this particular case can be treated as wmb. True,, 
 the effect is that a particular character represents in 
 two different cases two different things, thus violating ap- 
 parently a fundamental principle of phonographic short- 
 hand, that each stroke or mark should represent one, and 
 only one, sound. But the reporter asks himself, "Does this 
 irregular use of a character to represent exceptionally 
 something which it does not ordinarily or regularly repre- 
 sent, involve in this particular case real danger of mis- 
 reading? Is it not a fact in this instance, as in others, 
 that, though two readings are in a certain sense possible, 
 only one can 'make sense'?" When he has satisfied him- 
 self that a substantial advantage is to be gained by tolerat- 
 ing an ambiguity which is only apparent, because it entails 
 no uncertainty in reading, he boldly prefers contra-normal 
 convenience and speed to normal inconvenience and slow- 
 ness. 
 
 CONTRA-NORMAL EXPEDIENTS CLASSIFIED. 
 
 113. So far as these contra-normal expedients expe- 
 dients not so much outside of ordinary rules as against 
 them appear in the practice of reporters, they may be 
 classified as follows: 
 
 114. (a.) The use of the r hook as a w hook in cer- 
 tain cases where the w hook is, according to rule, inadmis- 
 sible, as in the instance just given, where mr is treated 
 as if it were wmb, so that it may be used to represent we 
 may be. 
 
 115. (6.) The double-lengthing of mb to add thr,. 
 
 as in the phrase you may be there ... ,....jxr ^~, notwith- 
 
VARIATION OF OUTLINE. 65 
 
 standing the fact that, according to strict rule, double 
 length m& means mbr or mpr, not mb-thr, 
 
 116. (c.) The double-lengthing of ing to add tTir, 
 
 as in the phrase wrong their ..../.. .notwithstanding 
 
 the fact, that according to strict rule, double-length ing 
 means nkr or ngr, not ing-thr. 
 
 117. (d.) The dropping of an initial hook in the midst 
 
 of a phrase in such a way that vr ... .,. ..\... takes in fact 
 
 the form of w ....^..J , though still read vr, as in the 
 
 phrase it is very important ..^..J^ / that wir.... w ,^r"\ iii) 
 
 V - 
 
 takes in fact the form of mp, though still read mr, as in the 
 
 phrase much more ^. ../.^......; that thr ^./...^ takes in fact the 
 
 A-s 
 
 form of 2 * , though still read thr, as in the phrase 
 
 Tie is therefore....^. ,,. 
 
 118. (e.)The use of the r hook as if it were you, as 
 
 in the phrases do you say ,L ; which you do 
 
 : L ; which you do -A- ,' 
 
66 VARIATION OF OUTLINE. 
 
 you shall. ..... ..... xw, ..... (Sanctioned by Graham, not by 
 
 */ 
 
 Pitman.) 
 
 119. (f.) The use of an apparent n hook as a "brief 
 tc" sign for what or would, as in the piirases of what 
 
 ... ; and would ...... ~,..-.-^>.. M ..... (Sanctioned by Graham, 
 
 not by Pitman.) 
 
 120. (g.) The inversion of you, we, were and would, 
 
 In such phrases as when you do^., ,.!.../ there were many 
 
 
 
 '^-^^ , . (Sanctioned by Graham, not by Pitman.) 
 
 121. (h.) The use of an I hook for a w hook where 
 the w hook is not practicable, as when....,.^,,^^.^ and, 
 
 are written for we can and we could. (Sanctioned by 
 Graham, not by Pitman.) 
 
 (Further illustrations of the principles of "Variation," 
 together with exercises for making them familiar to the 
 pupil, will be found at appropriate places in later chap- 
 ters.) 
 
CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 ELLIPSIS: THE LAW OF IMPLICATION. 
 
 "Words may often be entirely omitted, and yet no ambiguity ensue." 
 Mavor's Universal Stenograp/ty, (published 1807.) 
 
 122. For the sake of brevity, or to secure a facile 
 phrase, several words, or a single word, or a part of a 
 word, may be altogether omitted from a phrase, provided 
 the sense or the grammatical construction will neces- 
 sarily show that there is an omission, and will readily sug- 
 gest the word or words to be supplied. The words omitted 
 are generally small connecting words usually articles, 
 conjunctions or prepositions. Words thus omitted in writ- 
 ing, and suggested in reading by the sense or grammatical 
 construction, are said to be implied. The omission may oc- 
 cur at the beginning of a phrase (as in the case of on the, 
 omitted in writing the phrase on the one hand) ; or, in the 
 midst of a phrase (as when of is omitted from the phrase 
 court of justice) ; or, at the end of a phrase (as when the 
 word to is dropped from the phrase in reference to). In 
 thus omitting words which may safely be omitted, and fear- 
 lessly trusting to the sense or construction to suggest them, 
 the writer takes advantage of the fact that certain words 
 necessarily precede others; that certain words necessarily 
 come between others; and that certain words necessarily 
 follow others. Thus, when we write as a phrase face face, 
 it is obvious that between the two words there is an omis- 
 sion, and the word to necessarily suggests itself to fill the 
 gap. So, when we write more more, the necessity of and 
 as a connecting word must be obvious. If we write for 
 sake justice, we cannot but observe that, to make the 
 sense complete, we must, in reading, supply the before 
 
68 . ELLIPSIS. 
 
 sake, and of before justice, making the clause read for the 
 sake of justice. 
 
 123. This law of implication, as an aid to the reporter, 
 has been stated by an early phonographic author in these 
 words: "It is sometimes allowable, in a phraseogram, to 
 omit some portions of a word, or whole words, where the 
 phrase embodied in the skeleton is so familiar and sug- 
 gestive that the context will readily assist us in decipher- 
 ing it." (Robert Patterson's Reporter's Assistant, page 18.) 
 
 124. The same principle is thus stated in Graham's 
 Handbook, (Revised Edition), page 233: "Generally it 
 is allowable, in reporting style, to omit any words which 
 must, and may readily, be supplied to complete the sense 
 or construction." 
 
 125. Prof. F. G. Morris ("The Phrase," page 49), in 
 stating the same principle, uses this language: "Any ele- 
 ment, circle, loop, stroke, syllable, word, which prevents 
 a good phrase, and which at the same time will certainly 
 and readily be supplied in reading, is omitted for the sake 
 of the phrase." 
 
 "IMPLICATION" AND "INDICATION" DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 126. The terms "ellipsis" and "implication" are not 
 to be applied to a case where omitted words, or parts of 
 words, instead of being supplied by the sense or construc- 
 tion, are indicated by some stenographic expedient, such 
 as the writing of two words close together to indicate the 
 omission of the intervening words of the, or the bringing of 
 part of a word into proximity with a preceding stroke, to 
 indicate an omitted con or com. In such cases the omitted 
 syllables or words are said to be indicated, not implied, 
 indication being simply one method of expression. But if 
 (as when we write word God for word of God) the fact 
 of omission, and the word necessary to supply the omission, 
 are suggested by the context or construction only, not by 
 any peculiar method of writing or arranging the written 
 
ELLIPSIS. 69 
 
 words, it is said that the omitted syllable, word or words 
 are implied. 
 
 127. It should be remembered that, in all cases of 
 ellipsis or implication, properly so called, where the miss- 
 ing words are implied, not indicated, there is no lifting of 
 the pen on account of the omission. When the phrase 
 is once begun, the pen remains upon the paper until it is 
 completed. Implied tvords are, in writing, treated as if 
 they did not exist; in reading they are brought out by 
 means of the sense or grammatical construction. In ap- 
 plying the principle of ellipsis or implication, nothing is 
 left to guesswork. The brief connecting words omitted, 
 and no others, are necessarily supplied to make the clause 
 complete. The nature of the omission is such that the 
 careful writer, when he comes to read the notes, must 
 notice the omission, and cannot be in doubt as to the 
 word or words necessary to fill the gap. 
 
 CAUTION. 
 
 128. The principle of ellipsis should not be applied to 
 an unfamiliar phrase, and nothing is to be omitted except 
 what may be called necessary connective words. The stu- 
 dent, or even the advanced practitioner, should not venture, 
 in note-taking, to omit words upon the impulse or caprice 
 of the moment, and without regard to any clearly-settled 
 principles of ellipsis. No more dangerous habit can be 
 acquired by the young reporter than that of leaving out 
 words in a heedless, helter-skelter manner, trusting to be 
 able to supply them in reading by means of the context 
 or his own "gumption" in other words, by mere guess- 
 ing. The cases where ellipsis may be safely and properly 
 indulged, have, to a large degree, been ascertained and 
 classified; and to these, or to cases similar or analogous, 
 the prudent writer will confine himself. With the excep- 
 tion of "special or irregular phrases," involving methods 
 of ellipsis peculiar to particular cases, it is believed that 
 
7V ELLIPSIS. 
 
 this chapter exhibits substantially all the classes of cases 
 coming under the great law of implication or ellipsis. 
 
 In the exercises given in this and subsequent chapters, 
 the words or letters to be omitted are always indicated by 
 parentheses. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "A." 
 
 129. The article a, occurring in the midst of a phrase, 
 is often omitted and implied. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting in each the ar- 
 ticle a: 
 
 at such (a) moment in such (a) case 
 
 for (a) long time (tin) in such (a) place 
 
 for (a) longer time (tm) in such (a) position 
 
 for (a) moment such (a) man 
 
 in (a) great measure that is (a) question 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "AND." 
 
 130. And, in the midst of a phrase, is frequently omit- 
 ted and implied. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting in each the con- 
 junction and: 
 
 again (and) again longer (and) longer 
 
 better (and) better lower (and) lower 
 
 deaf (and) dumb more (and) more 
 
 east (and) west north (and) south 
 
 forever (and) ever over (and) over 
 
 heaven (and) earth right (and) left 
 
 ladies (and) gentlemen right (and) wrong 
 
 larger (and) larger such (and) such 
 
 less (and) less through (and) through 
 
 life (and) death worse (and) worse 
 
 lord (and) master yeas (and) nays 
 
ELLIPSIS. 71 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "OB." 
 
 131. Or, occurring in the midst of a phrase, is frequent- 
 ly omitted and implied. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting in each the con- 
 junction or: 
 
 black or white sooner (or) later (down- 
 more (or) less ward?) ls ^gf 3 a . ) 8iBD ' 
 
 one (or) two two (or) three 
 
 right (or) wrong white (or) black 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "THE." 
 
 132. The, occurring in the midst of a phrase, is fre- 
 quently omitted and implied. 
 
 EXEECISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting in each the ar- 
 ticle the: 
 
 all (the) world in (the) meantime (tm for 
 
 at (the) present day time) 
 
 at (the) request in (the) name 
 
 during (the) latter part in (the) world 
 
 (prt) on (the) (con)trary (o 
 for (the) benefit downward) 
 
 for (the) mos(t) part to (the) world 
 
 for (the) present under (the) circumstances 
 
 for (the) support under (the) necessity 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "OF." 
 
 133. Of, in the midst of a phrase, is frequently omit- 
 ted and implied. 
 
72 
 
 ELLIPSIS. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting in each the pre- 
 position of: 
 
 act (of) (Con)gress 
 act (of) Parliament 
 bill (of) lading 
 bill (of) particulars 
 bill (of) sale 
 board (of) trade 
 by way (of) illustration 
 child (of) God 
 children (of) God 
 children (of) men 
 church (of) England 
 church (of) God 
 church (of) Rome 
 city (of) Boston 
 city (of) Manchester 
 city (of) New York 
 city (of) Norwich 
 city (of) Philadelphia 
 condition (of) things 
 constitution (of) England 
 course (of) business 
 court (of) chancery 
 court (of) claims 
 court (of) justice 
 fear (of) God 
 freedom (of) speech 
 good many (of) them 
 gospel (of) Christ 
 house (of) God 
 house (of) prayer 
 In point (of) fact 
 In the presence (of) God 
 Jesus (of) Nazareth 
 
 kingdom (of) Christ 
 kingdom (of) heaven 
 kingdom (of) this world 
 kingdoms (of) this world 
 laws (of) God 
 laws (of) life 
 laws (of) Moses 
 legislature (of) Maine 
 letters (of) marque 
 life (of) Christ 
 life (of) Jesus 
 loss (of) life 
 love (of) Jesus 
 man (of) business 
 many (of) them 
 many (of) these (vocalize 
 
 these) 
 
 many (of) those 
 matter (of) course 
 matter (of) fact 
 matter (of) importance 
 Member (of) (Con)gress 
 Members (of) (Con)gress 
 Member (of) Parliament 
 Members (of) Parliament 
 neither (of) them 
 one (of) them 
 people (of) God 
 people (of) this country 
 point (of) order 
 point (of) view 
 right (of) way 
 rights (of) another 
 
ELLIPSIS. 78 
 
 rights (of) man water (of) life 
 
 rights (of) mankind wisdom (of) God 
 
 rights (of) nations word (of) God 
 
 service (of) God words (of) God 
 short space (of) time (tm) word (of) man 
 
 spirit (of) Christ * world (of) fashion 
 
 spirit (of) Jesus world (of) nature 
 
 sum (of) money world (of) spirits 
 
 sums (of) money writ (of) error 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "OF THE." 
 
 134. Of the, in the midst of a phrase, is frequently 
 omitted and implied. Cases of this kind, where of the 
 is omitted, the adjacent words being joined, with nothing 
 but the sense or construction to show the fact of omission, 
 must not be confounded with cases in which the omitted 
 words are indicated by proximity; that is, by a small space 
 between the adjacent words. (See Paragraphs 317-323.) 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting in each the 
 "words of the, and connecting the adjacent words: 
 
 act (of the) legislature constitution (of the) Gov- 
 
 at the end (of the) day ernment 
 
 Attorney General (of the) constitution (of the) United 
 
 United States States 
 
 circuit court (of the) Unit- every part (of the) world 
 
 ed States freedom (of the) people 
 
 circumstances (of the) case freedom (of the) press 
 
 citizen (of the) United gentlemen (of the) jury 
 
 States history (of the) world 
 
 citizens (of the) United in this part (of the) world 
 
 States legislature (of the) Terri- 
 tory 
 
 *In this phrase and the next two, world is supposed to be written 
 with the Benn Pitman sign. 
 
74 ELLIPSIS. 
 
 liberty (of the) press one (of the) worst 
 
 member (of the) bar (br) President (of the) United 
 
 members (of the) bar States 
 
 member (of the) legislature Supreme Court (of the) 
 
 one (of the) best United States 
 
 one (of the) most 
 
 135. Where the phrase in which of the occurs, is not a 
 familiar one, or where the preceding and following words 
 will not readily join, of the should be expressed by proxim- 
 ity or by the two joined ticks. (See Paragraphs 318-323.) 
 
 "ON THE" OMITTED AND IMPLIED. 
 
 136. The ellipsis olj on the at the beginning of a few 
 phrases, such as on the one hand, on the other hand, etc., 
 is so rare, and there are so many cases where, to make 
 the sense clear, on the must be written, not implied, that 
 it is deemed best to include under the head of "Special or Ir- 
 regular Phrases" the few phrases in which this method of 
 ellipsis is resorted to. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "WITH." 
 
 137. With may be omitted and implied at the end of 
 such phrases as in conjunction with, etc. <(See Paragraphs 
 328-329.) 
 
 In the following phrases, with may be omitted: 
 
 in accordance (with) in (con) junction (with) 
 
 in (com)parison (with) in (conn)ection (with) 
 
 in (com)bination (with) in harmony (with) 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "TO." 
 
 138. To is frequently omitted and implied at the end 
 of such phrases as in reference to, in regard to, in reply to, 
 in relation to, etc. 
 
 139. To phrases from which the last word is thus 
 omitted, additional words may be attached, if the form of 
 the last stroke will admit of such additions; and the stroke 
 
ELLIPSIS. 
 
 75 
 
 itself may be modified by circles, hooks, ticks, half-length- 
 ing and double-lengthing. Illustrations: in regard to this, 
 
 .; in reply to them,... ">.; in reference to 
 
 the 
 
 ,.~ ; in reference to their, ,. ... ; in re- 
 
 .,... . (For explanation of method of 
 
 spect to your, 
 
 writing phrases beginning with in re-, see Paragraph 385.) 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting to and joining 
 the following word: 
 
 in reference (to) that 
 
 in reference (to) the 
 
 in reference (to) the matter 
 
 in reference (to) this 
 
 in reference (to) which 
 
 in reference (to) your 
 
 in regard (to) it 
 
 in regard (to) its 
 
 in regard (to) that 
 
 in regard (to) that which 
 
 in regard (to) them 
 
 in regard (to) this 
 
 in regard (to) this one 
 
 in regard (to) you 
 
 in regard (to) your 
 
 in reply (to) him 
 
 in reply (to) it 
 
 in reply (to) many 
 
 in reply (to) several 
 
 in reply (to) some 
 
 in reply (to) such 
 
 in reply (to) that 
 
 in reply (to) their 
 
 in reply (to) theirs 
 
 in reply (to) this 
 
 in reply (to) you 
 
 in reply (to) your 
 
 in reply (to) yours 
 
 in respect (to) 
 
 in respect (to) him 
 
 in respect (to) his 
 
 in respect (to) many 
 
 in respect (to) many more 
 
 in respect (to) one 
 
76 ELLIPSIS. 
 
 in respect (to) several in respect (to) themselves 
 
 in respect (to) some in respect (to) this 
 
 in respect (to) such in respect (to) which 
 
 in respect (to) that in respect (to) you 
 
 in respect (to) them in respect (to) your 
 
 140. To, following the word according, is generally 
 omitted, and, if convenient, the next word is joined, as in 
 
 the phrase according to this v> 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting to and joining 
 the next word: 
 
 according (to) its own according (to) these (vo- 
 
 according (to) justice calize these) 
 
 according (to) law according (to) this 
 
 according (to) that according to tnose 
 
 according (to) the according (to) such 
 
 according (to) their according (to) which 
 
 according (to) them according (to) your 
 
 141. To, the sign of the infinitive, may in many cases 
 be omitted and implied, when it is immediately followed by 
 the verb to which it belongs. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting to, the sign of 
 the infinitive: 
 
 every reason (to) think it seems (to) mak6 
 
 have (to) be it is never (to) be 
 
 help (to) make it is not (to) be 
 
 is this (to) be it is sure (to) be 
 
 It seems (to) be it is (to) be 
 
 it seems (to) have said (to) be 
 
ELLIPSIS. 
 
 77 
 
 seems (to) be 
 
 seems (to) make 
 
 seems (to) take 
 
 so as (to) be 
 
 so as (to) become 
 
 so as (to) make 
 
 that is (to) be 
 
 that is (to) say (vocalize 
 
 say) 
 there is (to) be 
 
 want (to) be 
 
 want (to) say 
 
 was (to) be 
 
 we wish (to) do (I. D.*) 
 
 we wish (to) say (I. D.' 
 
 when is this (to) be 
 
 wish (to) be 
 
 wish (to) do 
 
 wish (to) say 
 
 you are (to) be 
 
 142. In the following phrases, to, the sign of the infini- 
 tive, is to be omitted after the special phrase in order 
 
 in order (to) answer 
 
 in order (to) keep 
 
 in order (to) be 
 
 in order (to) know 
 
 in order (to) become 
 
 in order (to) observe 
 
 in order (to) carry 
 
 in order (to) pay 
 
 in order (to) determine 
 
 in order (to) say 
 
 in order (to) develop 
 
 in order (to) see (vocalize 
 
 in order (to) distinguish 
 
 see) 
 
 in order (to) do 
 
 in order (to) send 
 
 in order (to) effect 
 
 in order (to) show 
 
 in order (to) encourage 
 
 in order (to) take 
 
 in order (to) enjoy 
 
 in order (to) test 
 
 in order (to) have 
 
 in order (to) touch 
 
 in order (to) inquire 
 
 in order (to) turn 
 
 in order (to) judge 
 
 in order (to) understand 
 
 143. But to, the sign of the infinitive, should not be 
 omitted if a better junction can be obtained by writing it. 
 
 *These letters, meaning "Initial Displacement," indicate that the 
 first word of a phrase is written put of its ordinary position in order that 
 the second word may be written in its normal place. Occasionally they 
 indicate that the first two words are displaced in order to bring the third 
 into its ordinary position. 
 
78 ELLIPSIS. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 In the following phrases, insert to: 
 
 designed to make in order to refuse 
 
 in order to blame in order to reject 
 
 in order to charm in order to remember 
 
 in order to deliver in order to reply 
 
 in order to direct in order to retain 
 
 in order to limit in order to tell 
 
 in order to make in order to throw 
 
 in order to manage in order to treat 
 
 in order to modify in order to write 
 
 in order to move mean to make 
 
 in order to place want to make 
 
 in order to receive who is to make 
 
 144. The preposition to may be omitted in the midst 
 of a phrase, where the sense or construction will supply 
 it. Illustrations: it seems (to) me, it seemed (to) me, 
 it appears (to) me. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following: 
 
 appears (to) me say (to) you 
 
 in addition (to) this seemed (to) me 
 
 it appears (to) me seems (to) me 
 
 it seemed (to) me there appears (to) me 
 
 it seems (to) me there seems (to) me 
 
 145. To, the sign of the infinitive, is never omitted and 
 implied at the beginning of a phrase, though, by some 
 writers (following the .teaching of Mr. Graham)., it may 
 be omitted and indicated by dropping the next word to "the 
 fourth position." 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "FROM." 
 
 146. When in Congress, State Legislatures, or other 
 deliberative assemblies, members of the body are referred 
 
ELLIPSIS. 79 
 
 to, not by their names, but by the localities from which, 
 they come, the word from, preceding the name of the State, 
 county or other locality, may be omitted for the sake of 
 forming a convenient phrase. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Write the following, omitting the preposition from: 
 
 delegate (from) Alaska member (from) Massachu- 
 delegate (from) Texas setts 
 
 gentleman (from) Chester my friend (from) Delaware 
 
 gentleman (from) Illinois my friend (from) Nevada 
 
 gentleman (from) Jackson my friend (from) New York 
 
 gentleman (from) New my friend (from) Pennsyl- 
 
 Hampshire vania 
 
 gentleman (from) NewJer- my friend (from) Tennes- 
 
 sey see 
 
 gentleman (from) New my friend (from) Texas 
 
 York senator (from) New York 
 
 gentleman (from) Texas senator (from) Pennsylva- 
 member (from) Alleghany nia 
 
 member (from) Kansas senator (from) Texas 
 
 member (from) Louisiana senator (from) Virginia 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "CON" OB "COM." 
 
 147. The prefix con or com, usually expressed in sep- 
 arately-written words by the dot, and in phrases by prox- 
 imity,* may sometimes be omitted in a phrase, and the re- 
 mainder of the word joined to the preceding word. Illus- 
 
 trations: some (consideration .ar^i , ; in any (con)- 
 
 L 
 
 dition U.., But no word beginning with con 
 
 *See Paragraphs 328-336. 
 
80 ELLIPSIS. 
 
 or com should be thus joined except those familiar out- 
 lines from which, when standing alone, the con dot is ha- 
 bitually omitted. For instance, as the con dot would 
 scarcely b& omitted from the word confession if it stood 
 alone, the phrase by his own confession is better written. 
 
 ., ...\^.~.... than 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 148. In the following phrases, con or com is to be 
 omitted, and the remainder of the word joined to the pre- 
 ceding word: 
 
 every (con)sideration some (con)sideration 
 
 extra (com)pensation some (con)versation 
 
 in any (con)dition such (con)sideration 
 
 in (con) sequence they may (con)sider 
 
 in my (con)versation upon no (con)sideration 
 
 into (con)sideration very ( considerable 
 
 it is (con)venient will be (con)sidered 
 
 on (the) (con)trary (on you will (con)sider 
 downward) 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "ING." 
 
 149. The participial termination ing may often be omit- 
 ted and implied, to facilitate a junction with the next 
 word; but in separately-written words or at the end of a. 
 phrase, the expression of ing will generally aid in ready 
 reading. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting ing: 
 
 are you go (ing) there enact (ing) clause 
 
 board (ing) school enter (ing) wedge 
 
 command (ing) officer labor (ing) classes 
 
 draw (ing) room labor (ing) people 
 
 drink (ing) saloon look (ing) glass 
 
ELLIPSIS. 81 
 
 presid(ing) elder stepp(ing) stone 
 
 read (ing) room this even (ing) 
 
 resolv(ing) clause this morn (ing) 
 
 sew(ing) machine visit(ing) board 
 
 smok(ing) car (kr) water(ing) place 
 
 sitt(ing) room without tak (ing) time (tm) 
 
 speak(ing) tube work(ing) classes 
 
 OMISSION OF SYLLABLES OR LETTERS. 
 
 150. As a general rule, to facilitate a phrase, we may 
 omit a letter or a syllable when the omission does not 
 make the word illegible, especially if the letter or syllable 
 proposed to be omitted is obscurely sounded. For instance, 
 in log cabin, the omission of fc in cabin enables us to phrase 
 two words which otherwise could not be easily joined. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF THE TERMINATIONS "AL" AND "LY." 
 
 151. The adjectival termination al and the adverbial ter- 
 mination ly are sometimes omitted to facilitate a junction, 
 as in the phrases nation (al) expenditure, nation (al) re- 
 sources, absolute (ly) necessary, absolute (ly) impossible, 
 perfect ( ly ) excellent. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF INITIAL "H." 
 
 152. The h tick at the beginning of a word may fre- 
 quently be omitted and implied, to facilitate a phrase. 
 
 Illustrations: Ladies' (H)ome Journal >,../;.. .Jrrrsa.... , our 
 
 (h)ome market _-x. y~T.-. , at (h)ome 
 
 such (h)armony / _ .. , do (h)arm 
 
 *>.> A*<, - *~ - 
 
82 
 
 ELLIPSIS. 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "T" OR "D." 
 
 153. To secure an easy junction, the sound of t at the 
 end of a word may be omitted by changing an st loop to a 
 
 circle. Illustrations: mus(t) ~be , 
 
 .jus(t) now, 
 
 *2z**a. 
 
 By means of this elision in writing, which corresponds with 
 an elision frequent in ordinary pronunciation, we secure 
 many phrases which otherwise would be difficult or im- 
 possible. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting t by changing 
 the loop to a circle: 
 
 almos(t) always 
 
 almos(t) impossible 
 
 almos(t) ready 
 
 bes(t) interests 
 
 bes(t) material 
 
 bes(t) (of) my belief 
 
 bes(t) regards 
 
 bes(t) way 
 
 everlas(t) (ing) day 
 
 everlas ( t ) ( ing ) Father 
 
 everlas(t) (ing) God 
 
 everlas (t) (ing) happiness 
 
 everlas (t) (ing) life 
 
 it mus(t) always be 
 
 it mus(t) be 
 
 it mus(t) be done 
 
 it mus(t) go 
 
 it mus(t) have 
 
 it mus(t) never 
 
 it mus(t) not be 
 
 jus(t) been 
 
 jus(t) enough 
 
 jus(t) now 
 las(t) April 
 las(t) day 
 las(t) December 
 las(t) hour 
 las(t) Monday 
 las(t) month 
 las(t) night 
 las(t) time (tm) 
 mos(t) beautiful 
 mos(t) distinguished 
 mos(t) excellent 
 mos(t) happy 
 mos(t) important 
 mos(t) likely 
 mos(t) necessary 
 mos(t) powerful 
 mos(t) reasonable 
 mos(t) sure(ly) 
 mus(t) admit 
 mus(t) also 
 mus(t) always 
 
ELLIPSIS. 
 
 -S3 
 
 mus(t) come 
 
 mus(t) have 
 
 mus(t) it be 
 
 mus(t) likely 
 
 mus(t) necessarily 
 
 mus(t) never 
 
 mus(t) there be 
 
 mus(t) therefore 
 
 next (ns) day 
 
 next December 
 
 next July 
 
 next November 
 
 next (ns) time (tm) 
 
 pos(t) -chaplain 
 
 Pos ( t ) master-General 
 
 pos(t) -office 
 
 pos(t)-paid 
 
 such as mus(t) be 
 
 that it mus(t) be 
 
 that which you mus(t) be 
 
 that which you mus(t) do 
 
 there mus(t) always be 
 
 there mus(t) be 
 
 there mus(t) be somethiag 
 
 there mus(t) come 
 
 there mus(t) never be 
 
 there mus(t) not be 
 
 they mus(t) do 
 they mus(t) have 
 they mus(t) recollect 
 you mus(t) appear 
 you mus(t) be 
 you mus(t) become 
 you mus(t) beware 
 you mus(t) be careful 
 you mus(t) be sure 
 you mus(t) be (w)illing 
 you mus(t) bring 
 you mus(t) have 
 you mus(t) make 
 you mus(t) not 
 you mus(t) not attempt 
 you mus(t) not be 
 you mus(t) not become 
 you mus(t) not decide 
 you mus(t) not do 
 you mus(t) not go 
 you mus(t) not take 
 you mus(t) not think 
 youmus(t) probably 
 you mus(t) receive 
 you mus(t) recollect 
 you mus(t) recollect that 
 you mus(t) say 
 
 154. Where zcl at the end of the word is ordinarily 
 represented by a loop, the sound of cl may be elided in 
 phrases, and a circle substituted for the loop, in order to 
 secure an easy junction with the next word. 
 
 EXEP.CISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, substituting In each a circle 
 for the loop: 
 
 authorize (d) version civilize (d) globe 
 
 civilize (d) country civilize (d) nation 
 
ELLIPSIS. 
 
 civilize (d) world 
 
 close (d) door 
 
 enclose (d) letter 
 
 I am authorize (d) (to) ask 
 
 I am authorize (d) (to 1 * say 
 
 propose (d) legislation 
 
 recognize (d) necessity 
 revise (d) code 
 revise (d) edition 
 surprise (d) that 
 surprise (d) (to) be 
 surprise (d) (to) have 
 
 155. By omitting d or ed (the termination of the past 
 tense) and writing the present form of the verb instead of 
 the past, we may often secure a useful phrase which would 
 be difficult or impossible if the past tense were expressed. 
 
 Illustrations: have you live(d) there 
 
 have 
 
 receive (d) their, 
 
 156. By an ellipsis of t we are sometimes enabled to 
 express their or their by a double-length stroke, which 
 would otherwise be impracticable, as in the phrases I 
 
 wen(t) there , they sen(t) there 
 
 In these cases it is advisable to vocalize the double length 
 stroke, as shown in the illustrations, for the sake of in- 
 suring legibility. 
 
 157. "The t or d sound which, if written, would be ex- 
 pressed by halving, may be omitted in some cases, princi- 
 pally from verbs, to secure advantages which would other- 
 wise be lost, as by adding have by an f-v hook. Thus trf 
 may represent tried to have as well as try to have, the 
 omitted ed being supplied by the context." (Graham's 
 Hand-book.) 
 
 TWO CIRCLES MERGED. 
 
 158. A circle written instead of a loop at the end of 
 a word may merge with a circle at the beginning of the 
 
ELLIPSIS. 85 
 
 next word, thus making a double circle, as in the phrases 
 
 jus(t) as well as yO--- , almos (t) as well as _..._.* 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "S." 
 
 159. For the sake of convenient phrasing, a single cir- 
 cle may be used for two sounds of s, and a double circle 
 
 for three.** Illustrations: all that is said 
 
 (cir cum) stance ......... V>"i J' ust as soon as. . 
 
 , this 
 
 V>"i J' 
 
 HOOKS ELIDED. 
 
 160. In order to facilitate phrasing, hooks, initial or 
 final, are sometimes elided. Under this principle, the w 
 at the beginning of well, willing and week is frequently 
 omitted. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Write the following phrases, omitting the w: 
 
 as (w)ell as it may as (w)ell 
 
 as (w)ell as it should be it might as (w)ell 
 
 as (w)ell as you may las(t) (w)eek 
 
 I am willing next (ns) (w)eek 
 
 it is (w)ell enough (well such as are (w)illing (are 
 
 downward) downward) 
 
 it is (w)ell known (well this (w)eek 
 
 downward) very (w)ell 
 
 See Paragraphs 255-263. 
 **See Paragraphs 269-272. 
 
86 ELLIPSIS. 
 
 "R" HOOK OMITTED AND IMPLIED. 
 
 161. To facilitate a junction, the r hook is frequently 
 elided or imperfectly expressed, as in the phrases it is per- 
 
 haps ,J*<- * n which consideration 
 
 162. Sometimes, in consequence of the elision of the r 
 hook, the consonant to which it belongs assumes an im- 
 perfect and apparently ambiguous form. Thus mr in the 
 midst of a phrase takes frequently the form of mp by 
 reason of the omission of the r hook, as in much more 
 
 ..../ .....; vr, with the hook omitted in the midst of a 
 
 / v 
 
 phrase, has the appearance of the consonant stroke w, as 
 
 in the phrase there is very little eJL...sr. ; thr, with 
 
 the hook omitted under similar circumstances, looks like 
 the consonant stroke z, as in the phrases he is therefore 
 
 t 
 
 , which is therefore / For the sake of 
 
 brevity, these apparent anomalies are tolerated, because in 
 practice no confusion or illegibility results. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting the r hook as in- 
 dicated: 
 
 he is the(r)efore it is ve(r)y strange 
 
 he is ve(r)y likely much mo(r)e 
 
 it is thei(r) matter much mo(r)e important 
 
 it is ve ( r ) y likely so ve ( r ) y little 
 
 it is ve(r)y little which is the(r)eby 
 
ELLIPSIS. 87 
 
 "N" HOOK ELIDED. 
 
 163. The n nook is occasionally elided for the sake of 
 securing a convenient junction. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting the n hook as in- 
 dicated: 
 
 all that has bee(n) said upo(n) their 
 
 America (n) people upo(n) them 
 
 dow(n) there upo(n) themselves 
 
 has bee (n) able upo(n) those 
 
 has bee(n) there upo(n) those who 
 
 it has bee(n) suggested woma(n)'s rights 
 
 Norther (n) Democracy wome(n)'s rights 
 
 164. In the word can, the n may frequently be elided for 
 the sake of phrasing.* 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Write the following phrases, omitting the n in can: 
 
 ca(n) be it ca(n) be 
 
 ca(n) only be it ca(n) never be 
 
 ca(n) there be there ca(n) be 
 
 ca(n) they do this ca(n) only be 
 
 ca(n) this be what ca(n) they do 
 
 ca(n) you what ca(n) they remember 
 
 ca(n) you go which ca(n) be 
 
 ca(n) you receive you ca(n) generally 
 
 ca(n) you remember you ca(n) now 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 165. The personal pronouns I, you, he, we, they, 
 when they occur in the midst of phrases like as near as you 
 can, as much as I can, may be omitted, if the context will 
 
 *The author's practice is to writ* can without the n hook in all cases. 
 Tins is not in accord with Graham or Benn Pitman, but is recognized by 
 Munson and Isaac Pitman. 
 
ELLIPSIS. 
 
 clearly and certainly suggest the word to be supplied. In 
 testimony, such phrases are very common in both questions 
 and answers, and are often uttered very rapidly. The ex- 
 pression of the personal pronoun in such cases would often 
 compel the breaking of a natural and useful phrase, which, 
 when the pronoun is elided, flows from the pen unbroken. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following phrases, omitting in each the per- 
 sonal pronoun: 
 
 as fa(r) as (I) can 
 
 as far as (you) can 
 
 as far as (he) can 
 
 as far as (we) can 
 
 as far as (they) can 
 
 as fas(t) as (I) can 
 
 as fas(t) as (you) can 
 
 as fas(t) as (he) can 
 
 asfas(t) as (we) can 
 
 as fas(t) as (they) can 
 
 as long as (I) can 
 
 as long as (you) can 
 
 as long as (he) can 
 
 as long as (we) can 
 
 as long as (they) can 
 as many as (I) can 
 as many as (you) can 
 as many as (he) can 
 as many as (we) can 
 as many as (they) can 
 
 as much as (I) can 
 as much as (you) can 
 as much as (he) can 
 as much as (we) can 
 as much as (they) can 
 as near as (I) can 
 as near as (you) can 
 as near as (he) can 
 as near as (we) can 
 as near as (they) can 
 as soon as (I) can 
 as soon as (you) can 
 as soon as (he) can 
 as soon as (we) can 
 as soon as (they) can 
 as well as ( I ) can 
 as well as (you) can 
 as well as (he) can 
 as well as (we) can 
 as well as (they) can 
 
 PHRASES WITH TWO OMISSIONS. 
 
 166. Frequently there are two omissions (and there 
 may be more) in a single phrase. Illustrations: for (the) 
 
 sake (of) 
 
 in (the) sight (of) God 
 
ELLIPSIS. 89 
 
 IRREGULAR ELLIPSIS. 
 
 167. The cases of ellipsis already given in this chap- 
 ter are capable of regular classification, each case falling 
 under a given principle of omission. But there are some 
 phrases which follow no general principle; for instance, 
 where a part of a word (not a regular word-sign) is in 
 particular phrases written for the whole. Illustrations: 
 
 Honor(able) Senator _ , in (the) sec(ond) 
 
 place 
 
 168. Certain familiar questions occurring in the exam- 
 ination of witnesses, and generally spoken very rapidly, are 
 usually written by court reporters in a highly elliptical 
 
 style. Illustrations: where do you reside fe. .. , how 
 
 long have you Known him*' /-.v*^^-^"^ , ivhat is your 
 
 business . ...N^A.-. or ~-,.JScL. .- ... Phrases of this kind, 
 
 as well as those referred to in the last paragraph, being so 
 irregular as to be incapable of classification under any 
 general rule, will be found included and appropriately illus- 
 treated under the head of "Special or Irregular Phrases."** 
 
 *This phrase introduces the Graham sign for ?iow. . 
 
 **In this chapter no reference has been made to Mr. Graham's expe- 1 
 client of omitting liarr in such phrases as wouhl hare bt>/>n, because when I 
 been is expressed by the n hook as explained in a subsequent part of this 
 book, would hare been is as briefly written as would been. 
 
CHAPTER IX. 
 
 THE "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 169. The tick word-signs, single and in groups, repre- 
 sent some of the most common and useful connective ex- 
 pressions of the language. They have been aptly termed 
 "the joints or hinges on which sentences turn." To gain 
 a mastery of these (without which a mastery of phrasing 
 is impossible), the student should spare no effort. These 
 small but extremely valuable signs (with which as used 
 separately the student is assumed to have become familiar 
 in his earlier lessons) are, of, to, or, out, on, should, he, 
 all, too, already, before, ought, who. 
 
 170. This list includes most of the vowel word-signs 
 represented by a single stroke, heavy or light. The I 
 tick, the the tick and the a tick are omitted for the 
 present, because the conditions and rules affecting them are 
 in some respects exceptional. Two ticks peculiar to the 
 Graham system the how tick, and the there tick are 
 
 also reserved for separate treatment. Before, included 
 in the preceding list, is in the Benn Pitman system a 
 heavy perpendicular tick on the line, but in the Graham 
 system is represented by 6 with the f hook. 
 
 INITIAL TICKS. 
 
 171. Of the ticks included in the list just given, all ma/ 
 be used initially (that is, at the beginning of a phrase), 
 and when so used they occupy the position they would oc- 
 cupy if standing alone, the second and subsequent words of 
 the phrase accommodating themselves to the position' of the 
 first. Most of these ticks are also legible when attached 
 to a preceding stroke, because (though they can have no 
 distinctive position except when standing alone or at the 
 beginning of a phrase) they may, by reason of the context, 
 be read just as well out of position as in ii. For instance. 
 
'TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 in the phrase for it should be, should is perfectly unam- 
 biguous, although the reader cannot tell the normal posi- 
 tion of the tick from its position in the phrase. The excep- 
 tional ticks which require to preserve their positional dis- 
 tinction, because without it they may be misread, will be 
 enumerated and explained hereafter. 
 
 172. Each of the ticks embraced in the preceding list 
 is invariably written downward except on, should and tie, 
 which, for convenience in phrasing, may be written either 
 upward or downward. 
 
 173. EXERCISE ON "OF" TICK (INITIAL). 
 
 of advantage 
 
 of course 
 
 of course it is 
 
 of course they will 
 
 of course they will be able 
 
 of course this 
 
 of everybody 
 
 of God 
 
 of honor 
 
 of importance 
 
 of law 
 
 of life 
 
 of many 
 
 of me 
 
 of men 
 
 of my 
 
 of my opinion 
 
 of one 
 
 of one thing 
 
 of several 
 
 of some men 
 
 of something 
 
 of some 
 
 of some kind 
 
 of such as have 
 
 of such people 
 
 of such things 
 
 of that 
 
 of that day 
 
 of that which is 
 
 of them 
 
 of themselves 
 
 of this 
 
 of this act 
 
 of this age 
 
 of this bill . 
 
 of this country 
 
 of this generation 
 
 of this work 
 
 of this world 
 
 of which 
 
 of which you are 
 
 of which you will 
 
 of which you must 
 
 of which you mus(t) be 
 
 yours* 
 
 yourself 
 of you 
 of your 
 of yourselves 
 
 (of 
 {of 
 
 Throughout these exercises, wherever two phases are represented 
 in the same way, they are connecteit by a brace. 
 
92 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 174. EXERCISE 03 "TO" TICK (INITIAL). 
 
 *to believe 
 
 to-morrow 
 
 to blame 
 
 to one another 
 
 to bring 
 
 fto our 
 
 to church 
 
 to place 
 
 to claim 
 
 to receive 
 
 to come 
 
 to reply 
 
 to (con)sider 
 
 to some 
 
 to-day 
 
 to some degree 
 
 to do 
 
 to strike 
 
 to do good 
 
 to strike out 
 
 to do right 
 
 to such 
 
 to do so 
 
 to such as are (r down- 
 
 to do something 
 
 ward ) 
 
 to do that 
 
 to such as may 
 
 to do their 
 
 to such persons 
 
 to every 
 
 to suppose that 
 
 to every man 
 
 to take 
 
 **to have 
 
 to that which you 
 
 ( inthe phrase to we, write 
 
 to their 
 
 to him separately, in accord- 
 ance with Paragraph 89). 
 
 to them 
 
 to it 
 
 to think that 
 
 ( to its 
 
 to this 
 
 { to itself 
 
 to those who 
 
 to love 
 
 to which you are 
 
 to make 
 
 to which you will 
 
 to make them 
 
 to write 
 
 to make this 
 
 to you 
 
 to many 
 
 to your 
 
 to many such 
 
 to your honor 
 
 to mention 
 
 to your many 
 
 *See Paragraph 175. 
 
 Represented, acco 
 
 k. - 
 
 t Represented, according to Graham, by prefixing r hook to the tick. 
 
 **Rep resented, according to Graham, by attaching the v hook to the 
 tick. .! r 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 175. In certain cases, including many of the phrases 
 in the foregoing list, initial to or to the is omitted by Mr. 
 Graham, and implied by writing the succeeding word below 
 "the line, in what is called "the fourth position." As this 
 is a principle of word indication rather than of phrasing, 
 no exercises upon it are required by the plan of this book. 
 
 176. EXERCISE ON "OR" TICK (INITIAL).* 
 
 or can 
 
 or something 
 
 or something else (else down- 
 ward, and vocalized to distin- 
 guish it from less, which in a 
 similar case is written down but 
 unvocalized.) 
 
 or such 
 or sure(ly) 
 
 or the 
 
 or this 
 
 or themselves 
 
 or we have 
 
 or w(h) ether 
 
 or w(h) ether you are 
 
 or with 
 
 or you 
 
 or you can 
 
 or you have 
 
 or you may 
 
 or you will 
 
 or your 
 
 or yourself 
 
 177. EXERCISE ON "BUT" TICK (INITIAL).** 
 
 but has no 
 
 but is not 
 
 but lately (or little) 
 
 but may 
 
 but must 
 
 but mus(t) be 
 
 but once 
 
 but one 
 
 but one such 
 
 but only 
 
 but rather 
 
 but some 
 
 but somebody (smb) else 
 
 but something 
 
 but sure(ly) 
 
 but tell me 
 
 but that 
 
 but that is not 
 
 but themselves 
 
 but there (their) 
 
 *See Paragraph 199. 
 **See Paragraph 199. 
 
9-1 
 
 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 !but theirs 
 but there is 
 but there has been 
 but when 
 but whenever 
 
 I 
 
 but you are 
 but you will 
 but your 
 but yours 
 but yourself 
 
 178. EXERCISE ON "ALL" TICK (INITIAL.) 
 
 *all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 ( all 
 (all 
 all 
 all 
 t all 
 {all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 all 
 
 are (are upward) all 
 
 blessings all 
 
 churches all 
 
 (circum) stances all 
 
 classes all 
 
 (con)siderations all 
 
 directions all 
 
 his all 
 
 his money all 
 
 his own all 
 
 honor all 
 
 important all 
 
 is all 
 
 his all 
 
 is not all 
 
 it all 
 
 its all 
 
 it is all 
 
 its own all 
 
 kinds all 
 
 mankind all 
 
 matters all 
 means ( all 
 men I all 
 
 mention all 
 
 might have all 
 
 might not all 
 
 mine all 
 
 must all 
 
 mus(t) be 
 
 my 
 
 my friends 
 
 my reasons 
 
 particulars 
 
 people 
 
 persons 
 
 places 
 
 right 
 
 such 
 
 such matters 
 
 such things 
 
 that 
 
 that has been 
 
 that is necessary 
 
 that this 
 
 that you may 
 
 the matter 
 
 themselves 
 
 there is 
 
 therefore 
 
 they 
 
 their 
 
 they are 
 
 think 
 
 think so 
 
 this 
 
 we do 
 
 we have 
 
 *Represented, a 
 
 according t> Grahau: 
 
 Graham, by prefixing r hook to the tick. 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 95 
 
 all which all you 
 
 all will be all you are (are upward) 
 
 all we do all you may 
 
 all we have all you must 
 
 all which all your 
 
 all will be all yours 
 
 179. EXERCISE ON "TOO" TICK (INITIAL.) 
 
 too careful too much (men)* 
 
 too full too recent 
 
 too grave too respectful 
 
 too great too short 
 
 too important too soon 
 
 too late too sure 
 
 too little too true 
 
 too many too valuaole 
 
 180. EXERCISE ON "BEFORE" TICK (INITIAL.)** 
 
 before him before there can be 
 
 before many days before this 
 
 before that before you 
 
 before that time before you are 
 
 ( before their before your 
 
 ( before there ( before yours 
 
 before them ( before yourselves 
 
 181. EXERCISE ON "WHO" TICK (INITIAL.) 
 
 fwho are (are downward) who can 
 
 who are going ft who ca(n)not 
 
 who are laboring who could 
 
 who are mostly who could not 
 
 who are only \ who do 
 
 who are you ( who had 
 
 who become who is 
 
 *See Paragraphs 90 and 106. 
 
 i *Xot used by Mr. Graham. 
 
 i I!y Mr. Graham, r hook is prefixed to who to add are. 
 
 "See note to Paragraph 74 and first note to Paragraph 1*7. 
 
9*J 
 
 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 who 
 
 has 
 
 has been 
 
 has had 
 
 has never 
 
 has not 
 
 is 
 
 is doing 
 
 is having 
 
 is it 
 
 is necessary 
 
 is never 
 
 is not 
 
 is now 
 
 is only 
 
 is taking 
 
 is this 
 
 is (to) be 
 
 is to make 
 
 is your 
 
 makes 
 
 may 
 
 may never 
 
 may receive 
 
 might 
 
 who mus(t) be 
 
 who never 
 
 who now 
 
 who say 
 
 who shall (upward sft) 
 
 who shall be 
 
 who should 
 
 who should have 
 
 who should know 
 
 who sure(ly) 
 
 who was 
 *who will 
 *who will be 
 
 who would 
 
 who would be 
 
 who would come 
 
 who would do 
 
 who would have 
 
 who would know 
 
 who would make 
 
 who would never 
 
 who would not 
 
 who would not have done 
 
 who you are 
 
 EXERCISE ON "ON" TICK (INITIAL). 
 
 182. In each of the following phrases, on is to be made 
 upward: 
 
 on both sides 
 
 on business 
 
 on demand 
 
 on different occasions 
 
 on each side (I. D.) 
 
 on them 
 
 *In these cases will is represented, according to Graham, by prefix- 
 ing the I hook to the tick. _ 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 97 
 
 on themselves on that side 
 
 on this on the 
 
 on it on this occasion 
 
 on its merits on these things (I. D.) 
 
 on its own on those cases (I. D.) 
 
 on several on which 
 
 on that on your 
 
 183. In each of the following phrases, on, except where 
 otherwise indicated, is to be made downward, because of 
 convenience of junction: 
 
 on account on one 
 
 on account of on one another 
 
 *on his on one side 
 
 on his own on short notice 
 
 on his own part on so important 
 
 on important matters on so little 
 
 on many on so many 
 
 on many days on so necessary 
 
 on many occasions on (the) (con)trary 
 
 on me on (the) part (of) 
 
 on my on (the) subject 
 
 on my assurance on their objection 
 
 on my matter on their receipt 
 
 on my protest on their terms 
 
 on my refusal on what 
 
 EXERCISE ON "SHOULD" TICK (INITIAL). 
 
 184. In the following phrases, should is to be made up- 
 ward, except where otherwise indicated: 
 
 should be should be remembered 
 
 should be able should be there 
 
 should be aware should beware 
 
 should be made should do 
 
 should be mentioned should do something 
 
 *On, followed by his, made either upward or downward. 
 
98 
 
 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 should do that 
 
 tshniilrl a n (should made either 
 1 go up ward or downward) 
 
 should have 
 
 should not say 
 should not suppose 
 should not think 
 
 should have done 
 
 should not understand 
 
 should have found 
 
 should take 
 
 should have said 
 
 should they 
 
 should have thought 
 
 should they do 
 
 should he 
 
 should think 
 
 should his 
 
 should this 
 
 should it be 
 
 should this be 
 
 should never 
 
 should this one 
 
 should not 
 
 should understand 
 
 should not be 
 
 should we do 
 
 should not do 
 
 should we have 
 
 should not have 
 
 should we think 
 
 185. In the following phrases, should is to be made 
 downward, except where otherwise indicated: 
 
 should ask should you accept 
 
 should go ( shouf d made either should you go 
 
 "upward or downward) 
 should make should you impose 
 
 should make some should you improve 
 
 should many should you leave 
 
 should rather should you reside 
 
 should receive should you resign 
 
 should say should you respect 
 
 should therefore should you respond 
 
 EXERCISES ON "HE" TICK. 
 
 186. In the following phrases, Tie is to be made upward, 
 except where otherwise indicated: 
 
 *he calls 
 he claims 
 
 he finds 
 
 he has another 
 
 *It is strongly recommended that initial he be always written on the 
 line, thus distinguishing it clearly, by position, from initial "/," writ- 
 ten above the line and expressed frequently by the upward tick. This 
 arrangement allows Tie to be written either upward or downward, and 
 thus makes possible many useful phrases otherwise impracticable. 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 he has been 
 he has come 
 he has not 
 he intends 
 he judges 
 he knows 
 he never 
 
 he now 
 
 he shall 
 
 he shall be 
 
 he 
 
 he supposes 
 
 he takes 
 
 he took 
 
 
 
 shall be 
 
 shall not D^i 
 
 supposes 
 
 1 1 **4S 
 
 187. In the following phrases, lie is made downward: 
 
 he accepts 
 he acknowledges 
 he addresses 
 he asks 
 he asserts 
 he assumes 
 he came 
 he ca (n) 
 he ca(n) be 
 he ca(n) make 
 he ca(n) never 
 he ca(n) take 
 he ca(n) therefore 
 *he ca(n)not 
 he cannot be 
 he cannot do 
 he cannot hare 
 he cannot know 
 he cannot say 
 he cannot take 
 he cannot understand 
 he comes 
 he embraces 
 
 he gave 
 he goes 
 
 **he had 
 
 **he had not 
 he has had 
 he has not had 
 
 ( he is 
 
 | he has 
 
 ( he is known 
 
 I he has known 
 
 ( he has now 
 
 ( he is now 
 he has never 
 he is never 
 he is not 
 he has not 
 he is having 
 he is not known 
 he is not (to) be 
 he is doing 
 he is saying 
 he keeps 
 he made 
 
 *In the opinion of the author, cannot is best written by using k for 
 can, as already recommended, and joining the ordinary form for not. 
 
 **Tick made downward to distinguish he had from Ihad, zndhehad not 
 from / had not. As an absolutely sure method of distinguishing he had 
 from Ihad,(a, most important distinction),Mr. Dement recommends that 
 he ha<l be represented by hay half length, in the third position; that is, 
 just under the line. The suggestion is well worthy of consideration. 
 
100 
 
 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 lie maintains 
 
 he may 
 
 he may always 
 
 he may never 
 
 he might 
 
 he might as well 
 
 he might not be 
 
 he mus(t) be 
 
 he mus(t) come 
 
 he mus(t) go 
 
 he mus(t) not be 
 
 he mus(t) not do 
 
 he mus(t) not have 
 
 he mus(t) probably 
 
 he mus(t) recollect 
 
 he mus(t) remember 
 
 he mus(t) say 
 
 he mus(t) see (vocalize 
 
 see) 
 
 he mus(t) not take 
 he mus(t) not think 
 he only knows 
 ( he pleases 
 
 he rather 
 
 he receives 
 
 he receives them 
 
 he recollects 
 
 he regrets 
 
 he renders 
 
 he replies 
 
 he represents 
 
 he requires 
 
 he respects 
 
 he says 
 
 he seems 
 
 he seems (to) be 
 
 he seems (to) have 
 
 he should 
 
 he should never 
 
 he should not be 
 
 he sure(ly) 
 
 he trusts 
 
 he values 
 
 he wants 
 
 he wants (to) be 
 
 he was 
 
 he would be 
 
 | he places 
 
 188. Before words beginning with the stroke I, where 
 a tick in the direction of ch would be inconvenient, Mr. 
 Graham authorizes a he tick in the second position, in 
 
 the direction of p; thus, he will M. , he loves .. 
 
 In spite of the similarity of this tick to to, no conflict or 
 ambiguity appears to result. In these cases, most Benn 
 Pitman writers make the he tick in the ordinary direc- 
 tion, as nearly as the junction will permit. For writers 
 who wish to adopt the Graham expedient, the following 
 exercise is inserted: 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 101 
 
 he also he will do 
 
 he always he will find 
 
 he always may he will have 
 
 he likes he will make 
 
 he loves he will never 
 
 he loves them he will probably 
 
 he will he will receive 
 
 he will ask he will understand 
 
 he will be he will wonder 
 
 FINAL TICKS. 
 
 189. Most of the tick word-signs are joined freely to a 
 preceding word without risk of illegibility, although when 
 thus used they lose positional distinction, which can only 
 be preserved at the beginning of a phrase. Like many 
 other words, they may, in the midst of phrases, be readily 
 read, though out of their normal places. 
 
 190. Or (first position) and tut (second position) 
 should be used only at the beginning of phrases, because, 
 if joined to a preceding word, they may conflict with each 
 other or with the perpendicular a tick, to be explained here- 
 after. 
 
 191. On also is excluded from phrases, except at the 
 beginning, for fear of conflict with should, which is freely 
 phrased. 
 
 192. He and I must always be carefully distinguished, 
 whether at the beginning of a phrase or attached to a 
 preceding word. (For methods of securing this distinction, 
 see Paragraphs 220 and 221 and note to Paragraph 186.) 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 193. The following exercise illustrates the manner in 
 which of, to, should, he and who are safely phrased, though 
 connected with a preceding word, thereby losing positional 
 distinction: 
 
 be said to by reason of 
 
 by means of do you mean to 
 
102 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 in such manner as to there should have 
 
 it is to there should not be 
 
 it should those who are (are down- 
 it should do ward) 
 
 it should not you are to make (are up- 
 it should not he ward) 
 
 on account of you should do 
 
 so as to you should never 
 
 so many as to you should not be 
 
 there should want of means 
 
 there should be want of money 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 194. In the following list, he, attached to a preceding 
 word, is to be made downward: 
 
 after he if he 
 
 all he if he was 
 
 all he asks that he 
 
 all he says think he is 
 
 because he think he is not 
 
 because he was though he 
 
 because he would be thus he 
 
 does he when he 
 
 does he ask when he is 
 
 does he say where he 
 
 for he must where he may 
 
 for he was where he is 
 
 CAUTION IN EEGARD TO TICKS. 
 
 195. The ticks, as phrasing factors, are most conve- 
 niently used when prefixed to words having few or no 
 initial circles, hooks, loops, etc., or affixed to words hav- 
 ing few or no final appendages. To attempt to join ticks 
 where there are such modifications, results often in such 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 103 
 
 y 
 
 inconvenient or difficult junctions as joins the 
 
 express the ,.,.\$. ..... , etc., which should not be made. 
 
 THE "A" TICK. 
 
 196. A tick representing a, an or and (made according 
 to convenience, either horizontally or perpendicularly that 
 is, in the direction of either k or t) may be prefixed or af- 
 fixed to any word with which it makes a convenient junc- 
 
 tion. Illustrations: a day ,,... ...... an age i--^an oath 
 
 ^L ..... . 
 
 at a time . 
 
 and there .... u __f\.... T>y and 
 
 6j/ ..... _v. , ..... .. , Lord and Savior ......... 7f ..... , and it is ....... b 
 
 197. The a tick, as it never stands alone, and has no 
 position of its own, accommodates itself at the beginning 
 of a phrase to the position of the next word. Illustrations: 
 
 V / , 
 
 and if _ ......... ,, , and each ..................... , and which ...,../....., 
 
 I 
 
 and much ,....2 , a few n t a choice 
 
 a chance 7 , and for -* 
 
104 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 198. The initial a tick, if followed by any tick having 
 a regular position, is accommodated thereto. But if fol- 
 lowed by a tick having no position of its own that is, by 
 the or a it is written on the line. Illustrations: and the 
 
 "?* , and a .._.... . 
 
 199. For the sake of avoiding conflict with but or or, 
 many writers prefer to avoid the use of initial a tick per- 
 pendicular. (See Pitman and Howard's Dictionary, "A.") 
 
 200. When the a tick may with equal convenience be 
 affixed to the preceding word, or prefixed to the following 
 word, it is generally considered better to write it as a prefix 
 rather than an affix, for the sake of distinguishing it more 
 effectually from the the tick, which is always an affix. But 
 where any considerable pause precedes a, an or and, the 
 tick would, of course, not be joined to the preceding word, 
 because such junction would be contrary to the rule of 
 sense relation. - 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 201. In the following phrases, prefix the horizontal a 
 tick, and observe the rule of position in Paragraph 197: 
 
 a branch a discovery 
 
 a break a dismissal 
 
 a business a disorder 
 
 a decrease a dispatch 
 
 a defense a distance 
 
 a delay a distinction 
 
 a demagogue a diversion 
 
 a deposition a domestic 
 
 a deprivation a drama 
 
 a design a dream 
 
 a diagram a drive 
 
 a dictionary a duplicate 
 
 a dilemma a failure 
 
 a disadvantage a faith 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 105 
 
 a fancy 
 a finish 
 a frank 
 a frenzy 
 a friend 
 a glimmer 
 a globe 
 a glove 
 a grasp 
 a grave 
 a grief 
 a grip 
 a groan 
 a group 
 a jest 
 a job 
 a judge 
 a junction 
 a labor 
 a lady 
 a Latin 
 a laugh 
 a legislature 
 a life 
 
 a lithograph 
 a location 
 a love 
 a package 
 a pardon 
 a permission 
 a person 
 a practice 
 
 a prayer 
 a preamble 
 a precaution 
 a presumption 
 a prison 
 a process 
 a program 
 a provision 
 a table 
 a task 
 a tax 
 a temper 
 a throb 
 a title 
 a tooth 
 a touch 
 a track 
 a trial 
 a trick 
 a triumph 
 a trouble 
 a tunnel 
 a turn 
 a vacancy 
 a vapor 
 a verse 
 a version 
 a very 
 a vexation 
 a visit 
 a voter 
 a voucher 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 202. In the following phrases, prefix the horizontal an 
 tick, and observe the rule of position in Paragraph 197: 
 
106 
 
 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 an absence 
 an abuse 
 an adage 
 an addition 
 an address 
 an admirable 
 an admirer 
 an adult 
 an advantage 
 an agency 
 an agreement 
 an aggravation 
 
 an aggression 
 an apology 
 an apprehension 
 an approximation 
 an elevation 
 an Italian 
 an officer 
 an operation 
 an outrage 
 an overflow 
 an oversight 
 an ultra 
 
 EXEBCISE. 
 
 203. In the following phrases, prefix the horizontal 
 and tick, and observe the rule of position given in Para- 
 graph 197: 
 
 and do you mean to 
 
 and either 
 
 and for such 
 
 and general (or generally) 
 
 and have 
 
 and have you 
 
 and if 
 
 and if such 
 
 and if we 
 
 and if -you are 
 
 and is this 
 
 and its 
 
 and it is not 
 
 and it was 
 
 and only 
 
 and only such - 
 
 and other 
 
 and that 
 
 and that has been 
 and that this 
 and their (or there) 
 and then 
 and therefore 
 and there ca(n) be 
 and there mus(t) be 
 and there was 
 and these 
 and this 
 and those 
 and we 
 and we did 
 and we do 
 *and we had (I. D.) 
 and we have 
 and we think it is 
 and we think you may 
 
 *We is displaced in order that had may take its normal position, 
 through the line. 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 107 
 
 and we were and where have you 
 
 and when do you and wherever 
 
 ( and when he is and wherever it is 
 
 ( and when he has and wherever you are 
 
 and when he was and which 
 
 and when is this and which is 
 
 and when that is done and which you are ( ar unw&r<.i) 
 
 and when they and which you may 
 
 and where and which you will 
 
 and where do you and with this 
 
 and where does it and you will be 
 
 204. In the following phrases, affix a horizontal tick for 
 a or an: 
 
 (about a (such a 
 
 (about an [such an 
 
 (at a j that is not a 
 
 (at an (that is not an 
 
 (before a (to be a 
 
 ( before an ( to be an 
 
 Jby a (was a 
 
 ( by an (was an 
 
 (had a (when a 
 
 (had an (when an 
 
 '(in a | whether a 
 
 (in an* [whether an 
 
 f near a (which a 
 
 (near an "[which an 
 
 (in which a (why a 
 
 (in which an [why an 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 205. In the following phrases, affix a perpendicular tick 
 for a or an: 
 
 *If the horizontal and the perpendicular tick are both practicable, 
 the horizontal is generally to be preferred as less likely to conflict with 
 the. 
 
108 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 (according (to) 
 
 a (make a 
 
 (according (to) 
 
 an (make an 
 
 (after a 
 
 (such is a 
 
 (after an 
 
 ( such is an 
 
 (because a 
 
 (take a 
 
 (because an 
 
 ( take an 
 
 (does a 
 
 J think a 
 
 (does an 
 
 ( think an 
 
 (give a 
 
 ( upon a 
 
 (give an 
 
 (upon an 
 
 (gives a 
 
 ( we have a 
 
 (gives an 
 
 ( we have an 
 
 (if a 
 
 (whenever a 
 
 1 
 
 
 (if an 
 
 (whenever an 
 
 (it is a 
 
 (without a 
 
 J 
 
 
 ( it is an 
 
 (without an 
 
 
 THE "THE" TICK. 
 
 206. This tick is written either upward or downward, 
 sometimes in the direction of p, but generally in the direc- 
 tion of chay, the effort being in each case to secure the 
 best possible angle. Unlike the tie tick, it is never used 
 initially and never stands alone.* He and the, as final 
 ticks, cannot be distinguished from each other except by 
 the context, which, howeTer, may be safely relied upon for 
 this purpose. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 207. In the following phrases, the the tick is to be 
 made downward: 
 
 about the among the many 
 
 according (to) the among the most 
 
 after the because the 
 
 against the between the 
 
 all the been the 
 
 among the know that the 
 
 *Th phrase the first, used by some writers, seems a needless excep- 
 tion to an otherwise universal rule. 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 J09 
 
 behind the 
 
 being the 
 
 being the means 
 
 being the most 
 
 *believe the 
 
 by the 
 
 by the many 
 
 by the means 
 
 by the most 
 
 by the way 
 
 could the 
 
 does the 
 
 for the 
 
 give the 
 
 gives the 
 
 have the 
 
 if that is the 
 
 if the 
 
 in the 
 
 in the church 
 
 in the direction 
 
 in the main 
 
 in the meantime (tin) 
 
 in the midst 
 
 in the order 
 
 in the presence 
 
 in the truth 
 
 it is the 
 
 it is not the 
 
 make the 
 move that the 
 mus (t) have the 
 neither the 
 never the 
 nor the 
 of the 
 only the 
 so that the 
 say that the 
 see that the ' 
 shall have the 
 should have the 
 take the 
 that the 
 think the 
 though the 
 thus the 
 towards the 
 under the 
 upon the 
 when the 
 whenever the 
 where the 
 which is the 
 with the 
 without the 
 would be the 
 would have the 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 208. In the following phrases, the is to be made up- 
 ward: 
 
 at the 
 
 at the end 
 
 *The best form for believe is btf. A final hook is unnecessary for legi- 
 bility and prevents the formation of many useful phrases. 
 
110 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 beyond the than the 
 
 but the there the 
 
 by which the through the 
 
 do the throughout the 
 
 during the under which the 
 
 even the until the 
 
 from the unto the 
 
 had the was the 
 
 into the what the 
 
 into the world* whether the 
 
 over the world which the 
 
 say the which was the 
 
 see the why the 
 
 so the would the 
 
 THE "I" TICK. 
 
 209. For the personal pronoun 7, beginning a phrase, 
 we usually write only half the ordinary sign, striking the 
 first half downward before certain strokes, or the second 
 half upward before certain other strokes, according to con- 
 venience of junction. Illustrations: 
 
 shal1 
 
 2,...., ... I do ...... . ..... J....... The two- 
 
 stroke form for I is rarely written in phrases; so, as I 
 becomes habitually a tick, it is properly classed with the 
 other ticks. 
 
 210. At a hasty glance, the / tick, when made down- 
 ward, would appear to be confusable with of, and when 
 made upward, with on, as in the phrases of my and I am, 
 written precisely alike. But in point of fact, no difficulty 
 on the score of ambiguity has been found to arise in prac- 
 tice. It would seem that all danger of actual mis-reading 
 of I for of, or of for I may be averted, if the student will, 
 
 *Benn Pitman sign for world. 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 Ill 
 
 in the few cases where it is necessary, watch carefully the 
 context. 
 
 211. A uniform and unhesitating habit with reference 
 to the upward or downward direction of the I tick will con- 
 duce to speed. To establish such a habit the learner 
 should familiarize himself by means of the appended exer- 
 cises with the appropriate tick for each of the ordinary 
 junctions. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 212. The following phrases should begin with the I 
 tick made upward: 
 
 EXERCISE ON "I" TICK (UPWARD). 
 
 I admit 
 
 I agree 
 
 I agree that 
 
 I agree with 
 
 I became 
 
 I become 
 
 I beg you will 
 
 I beseech you 
 
 I call 
 
 I call for 
 
 I can 
 
 I ca(n) be there 
 
 I ca(n) never be 
 
 I ca(n) only say 
 
 I ca(n)not 
 
 I cannot be 
 
 I cannot do 
 
 I cannot say 
 
 I cannot think 
 
 I clearly 
 
 I could 
 
 I could not 
 
 I could not do 
 
 I could not say 
 
 I dare 
 
 I declare 
 
 I decline (to) say 
 
 I demand 
 
 I depend 
 
 I depend upon 
 
 I derive 
 
 I design (to) be 
 
 I desire 
 
 I did 
 
 I dislike 
 
 I do 
 
 I do believe 
 
 I do many things 
 
 do say 
 
 fear 
 
 find 
 
 I intend (to) be 
 
 I intend (to) do 
 
 I intend (to) have 
 
 I insist that 
 
 I judge 
 
112 
 
 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 *I have 
 
 have also 
 have generally 
 
 I have just 
 
 I have no doubt 
 
 I have no objection 
 
 I have received 
 
 I have (the) honor (to) be 
 
 I know 
 
 I know nothing 
 
 I know that 
 
 I merely 
 
 I need 
 
 I need not 
 
 I never 
 
 I nevertheless 
 
 now 
 
 now propose 
 
 object 
 
 observe. 
 
 I often (I. D.) 
 
 I remark 
 
 I send 
 
 I shall 
 
 I shall be 
 
 I shall have 
 
 I shall have (to) be 
 
 I shall not be 
 
 I submit 
 
 I subscribe 
 
 I suppose that 
 
 I take this 
 
 I think 
 
 I think you may as (w)ell 
 
 I think you will 
 
 I thought 
 
 I thought it important 
 
 I understand 
 
 I understood 
 
 I undertake 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 213. The following phrases should begin with the / 
 tick made downward: 
 
 I always 
 I am 
 I may 
 I am able 
 I am afraid 
 I am also 
 I may also 
 I am anxious 
 I am aware 
 
 I am certain 
 
 I am inclined 
 
 I am inclined to think 
 
 I am making 
 
 I am never 
 
 I am now 
 
 I am obliged 
 
 I am opposed 
 
 I am persuaded 
 
 *In this phrase and those immediately following, I have is supposed 
 to be written according to the method of Benn Pitman. As hereafter 
 explained, / have in the .Graham .system is expressed by a perpendicular 
 tick with v hook attachecT (See I RlgniJll 219.) 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 113 
 
 I am rather 
 
 I am ready 
 
 I am receiving 
 
 I am right 
 
 I am said (to) be 
 
 I am sorry 
 
 I am sure 
 
 I am sure (to) be 
 
 I am told 
 
 I am very 
 
 I am (w)illing 
 
 I believe* 
 
 I believe it is 
 
 I believe that 
 
 I believe the 
 
 I bring 
 
 I (con)sider 
 
 I leave 
 
 I like 
 
 I love 
 
 I make 
 
 I may 
 
 I may have 
 
 I may mention 
 
 I may receive 
 
 I mean 
 
 I mean to 
 
 I mean (to) ask 
 
 I mean (to) discuss 
 
 I mean (to) say 
 
 I mention 
 
 I might 
 
 I might have 
 
 I must 
 
 I mus(t) acknowledge 
 
 I mus(t) admit 
 
 I mus(t) also 
 I mus(t) always be 
 I mus(t) be 
 I mus(t) have 
 I mus(t) never 
 I mus(t) not 
 I mus(t) not admit 
 I mus(t) not attempt 
 I mus(t) remember 
 I mus(t) say 
 I mus(t) take 
 I mus(t) try (vocalize try) 
 I only 
 
 I only desire 
 I perceive 
 I perhaps 
 I personally know 
 I place 
 I pledge 
 I presume 
 I probably 
 I proceed 
 I promise 
 I promise (to) be 
 I promise (to) have 
 I promise (to) pay 
 I propose 
 I rather 
 I rather think 
 I receive 
 I recollect 
 **I regret 
 
 I remember ? 
 
 I remember that > 
 
 I repeat 
 I reply 
 
 8ee note to Paragraph 207. 
 
 */ regard should not be phrased. 
 
114 
 
 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 I respect 
 
 I retain 
 
 I rise 
 
 I remark 
 
 I rise to present 
 
 I said 
 
 I said so 
 
 I said many things 
 
 I said that 
 
 I said something 
 
 I suggest 
 
 I therefore 
 
 I trust 
 
 I trus(t) that 
 
 I trus(t) that you will 
 
 I want 
 
 I want (to) know 
 
 I want (to) say 
 
 I want (to) see (vocalize 
 
 see) 
 
 I want (to) take 
 I went 
 I will 
 I will ask 
 I will be 
 I will do 
 I will find 
 I will have 
 I will make 
 I will remark 
 I will say 
 I wonder. 
 
 214. The second stroke of the 7 sign, though usually 
 made upward, is occasionally made downward at the be- 
 ginning of a phrase in order to accomplish a convenient 
 
 junction, as in the phrases 7 would ...... . , I was , ...... \ . 
 
 215. This form of the I tick should not be attached to 
 a preceding word, lest it conflict with he. In the midst of 
 a phrase the difference in direction is often an important 
 means of distinction between these two words. At the 
 beginning of phrases difference of position is sufficient. 
 
 216. Before s and z, some authors and writers join the 
 
 complete form of J, as I say ^^J. ..... , I was 
 
 ...... ,J... 
 
 This is 
 
 generally done because of the supposed difficulty of writing 
 7 as an upward tick before these two letters. But the down- 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 115 
 
 ward tick, as given in Paragraph 214, seems preferable; and 
 even an upward tick before s and z may become compar- 
 atively easy with moderate practice. 
 
 217. The full form of / is occasionally inserted in the 
 
 midst of a phrase, as in when I admit, Vr^... where 
 
 the junction of a tick would be difficult or impracticable. 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 218. In the following exercise, / should be expressed 
 by the second half of the I sign, written downward, as ex- 
 plained in Paragraph 214: 
 
 I ask 
 
 I ask him 
 
 I ask many 
 
 I ask no more 
 
 I ask only this 
 
 I ask that you will 
 
 I ask this 
 
 I ask very many 
 
 I ask you 
 
 I say 
 
 I say it is so 
 
 I say so 
 
 I say you are 
 
 I say you cannot 
 
 I say you will be 
 
 I see (I. D.) 
 
 I see you are 
 
 I see you will be 
 
 I was 
 
 I was asked 
 
 I was going 
 
 I was informed 
 
 I was known 
 
 I was many times 
 I was necessarily 
 I was never 
 I was nevertheless 
 I was observing 
 I was passing 
 I was received 
 I was retained 
 I was right 
 I was saying 
 I was wrong 
 I would 
 would argue 
 would ask 
 would assume 
 would be 
 would decide 
 would entertain 
 would exercise 
 would give 
 would have 
 would hare seen 
 would make 
 
116 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 I would necessarily I would not have 
 
 I would not I would observe 
 
 I would not attempt I would obtain 
 
 I would not be I would never take 
 
 I would not decide I would receive 
 
 I would not desire I would say 
 
 I would not do I would take 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 219. 7, according to Mr. Graham, may be represented 
 by a perpendicular tick in the first position, to which a 
 
 hook or a tick may be added, as 7 have ; / should 
 
 The following exercise is intended for those who 
 
 adopt this method of writing 7 have and 7 should: 
 
 I have I have not noticed 
 
 I have a I have not BOW 
 
 I have another I have not observed. 
 
 I have been I have not said 
 
 I have decided I have not seen 
 
 I have desired I have not taken 
 
 I have done I have not understood 
 
 I have found I have noticed 
 
 I have given I have now 
 
 I have gone I have observed 
 
 I have had many I have taken 
 
 I have had some I have visited 
 
 I have knowledge I should 
 
 I have known I should be 
 
 I have never I should be glad 
 
 I have no doubt I should be ready 
 
 I have not I should be received 
 
 I have not done it I should be seen 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 117 
 
 I should be sorry I should not 
 
 I should be told I should not be 
 
 I should have I should not desire 
 
 I should have many I should not possess 
 I should have no doubt I should not say 
 
 I should never be I should notice 
 
 I should no doubt I should now 
 
 "l" AND "HE" DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 220. It is absolutely necessary that / and he be in every 
 case carefully distinguished. If the writer will make it 
 an invariable rule that initial I shall be written in the 
 first position, and initial he in the second, all possibility of 
 confusion or mistake at the beginning of phrases in refer- 
 ence to these two words vanishes. Nor is there any danger 
 of confounding he and I in the midst of phrases, when / 
 is written with the first half of the ordinary I sign, that 
 is in the direction of p, as he is never written in this di- 
 rection, except in the limited and guarded way stated in 
 
 Paragraph 188. Illustrations: when I am 
 
 where 
 
 221. One means of distinction is the adoption of an 
 inflexible rule that the he tick may be freely joined to a 
 preceding word, but the I tick, if made in the direction of 
 he, must never be so joined. This method of distinction 
 is strongly recommended. Another method is afforded by 
 _Mr. Graham's jaile that the I tick when attached to a pre- 
 ce<fing"~word be always made either perpendicular or hori- 
 
 zontal, never oblique. Illustrations: if I may 
 
118 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 when I do.... I. wherever I am 
 
 shall I think ^...U.~~~- (See Graham's Hand-book, Sec- 
 
 tion 103, R. a.) Those who have adopted this method 
 of expressing medial or final 7, say that in practice 
 there is no danger of conflict. In the language of Mr. 
 Graham, "As he is written by the same sign as joined the, 
 so / when joined to a preceding word may be written by 
 the same sign as joined a-an." (Graham's Dictionary, p. 
 212.) 
 
 EXEBCISE. 
 
 222. In the following phrases, / is to be expressed by 
 a horizontal or perpendicular tick; he, by an oblique tick: 
 
 shall he take what was he doing 
 
 shall I take what was I doing 
 
 so he does wherever I may 
 
 so he thinks whenever he may 
 
 so I do whenever he must 
 
 so I think whenever I must 
 
 INITIAL DISPLACEMENT. 
 
 223. Occasionally, under the principle of initial dis- 
 placement, already explained, the tick signs, of, or, on, all 
 and 7, at the beginning of a phrase, may be written a little 
 higher or lower than ordinarily, for the purpose of bring- 
 ing the second word of the phrase into its normal and dis- 
 
 I 
 
 tinctive position, as in the phrases all these all 
 
'TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 119 
 
 those 
 
 I- 
 
 on each~-~~ , on much 
 
 , on our 
 
 I had . 
 
 .1 The displacement of the first 
 
 word of the phrase shows that the second word not only is, 
 but is intended to be, in its normal position. In the ab- 
 sence of initial displacement, it might happen to be there 
 as a mere consequence of the order in which the words of 
 the phrase succeed one another. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 224. In the following phrases, the initial tick is in 
 every case to be so placed that the second word of the 
 phrase may occupy its normal position: 
 
 all other 
 
 all other accounts 
 
 kinds) 
 *all our 
 all ours 
 all ourselves 
 all over 
 
 all over the world 
 all these 
 all those 
 I doubt 
 I had 
 
 I had occasion 
 I had rather^ 
 I had some 
 I had (the) honor 
 I hope 
 
 I hope that 
 
 (or I hope (to) make 
 
 I hope you may 
 I hope you will 
 
 hope your 
 
 offer 
 
 often 
 ** saw (vocalize saw) 
 
 saw him 
 
 saw a 
 
 I saw as many as 
 I saw many 
 I saw some persons 
 I saw the 
 I saw you 
 
 I saw you could not be 
 I saw you might not have 
 
 *Many Graham writers would writ* all our by prefixing to all the r 
 hooU. 
 
 **For method of writing 7 before * or z, see Paragraphs 214-216. 
 
120 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 I see of those 
 
 I see a on each 
 
 I see many things on much 
 
 I see the on these 
 
 I see you are on those who 
 
 I see you are determined I wish 
 
 I speak I wish to 
 
 I thank I wish (to) ask 
 
 I took I wish (to) be 
 
 I value I wish (to) say 
 
 of these I wish to tell 
 
 225. In a few phrases, such as I had not and to whom, 
 the normal position of the tick is not simply modified, but 
 absolutely sacrificed; that is to say, the first word of the 
 phrase is taken entirely away from its normal position 
 without, however, any loss of legibility. 
 
 THE "HOW" TICK.* 
 
 226. Graham writers represent the word how by a tick 
 justtmder the line, which, when standing alone, is written 
 upward in the direction of ray, but in phrases may be writ- 
 ten either upward or downward; that is to say, in the direc- 
 tion of either ray or chay, according to convenience of junc- 
 tion. The how tick is always initial, except in the phrase 
 
 and how. Illustrations: how many ....^^^ _, how does he 
 
 
 *The methods of abbreviation exhibited in the paragraphs immedi- 
 ately following (226 to 243) are presented here in order that the full re- 
 sources of Mr. Graham's system may be understood. Some of them in- 
 volve delicate distinctions, which should not be attempted by any writer 
 who has not the necessary accuracy of hand. As to many of these expe- 
 dients, those who use them do not claim that they are necessary except 
 for the development of the very highest speed, which, of course, in- 
 volves laborious and long-continued practice. The amanuensis may 
 well afford to dispense with them. Let it never be forgotten that, if used 
 at all, they must be thoroughly familiarized. (Continued next page.) 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 121 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 227. In the following phrases, the how tick is made 
 downward: 
 
 and how how goes it 
 
 how a how is 
 
 how are (are upward) how is it 
 
 how are these things how is this 
 
 how are we how many 
 
 how can it how may 
 
 how ca(n) you how must 
 
 how could they how mus(t) it 
 
 how could you how surely 
 
 228. In the following phrases, how, except where oth- 
 erwise specified, is made upward: 
 
 how do they how is (how made upward 
 
 how does he or downward) 
 
 how does it how long 
 
 how he how far 
 
 how he is how fast 
 
 how he is now how much 
 
 229. In order that how may make a convenient junc- 
 tion when followed by upward 7, Mr. Graham sanctions _ 
 the representation of how in such cases by it tick in the 
 third position similar to the tick which in the second po- 
 sition represents to; as, how will /~.. 
 
 In this connection the student is advised to read and ponder the 
 "caution" embraced in Paragraph 60. As has been well remarked by Mr. 
 Clarence E. Walker, an accomplished Graham writer, in his recently- 
 issued book on "Speed and Legibility," each stenographer must find out 
 what abbreviating expedients he can handle, and adapt his shorthand 
 'to them . 
 
122 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 230. In the following phrases, write how with a 
 downward tick, below the line, in the direction of p: 
 
 how will how will this 
 
 how will it be how will we 
 
 how will they how will you 
 
 THE TICK FOB "THERE," ETC. 
 
 231. According to Mr. Grahajn^fftere, their, they are r 
 and occa&sionally other, when they cannot otherwise be 
 conveniently expressed in a phrase, may be denoted by a 
 heavy tick written in the direction of b or ;', as may be- 
 
 most convenient, thus: since their ._ would there 
 
 ^... u , should t here - <&- - Mr. Graham addsr 
 
 "This tick may take the n or f-v hook or the circle, for 
 the purposes for which they are used in similar cases; that 
 is, the n hook to add own and not; the f-v hook to add 
 have, of, -fore; the circle to add his, is, etc." 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 232. In the following phrases, there or their is to be 
 expressed by the heavy tick in the direction of b: 
 
 ought there used their (there) 
 
 says there what there 
 
 since there within their 
 
 throughout their would there 
 
 233. In the following phrases, there or their is to be 
 represented by the heavy tick in the direction of ;': 
 
 about their 
 about there 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 123 
 
 should there with their 
 
 were there we were there 
 
 HOOKS ON TICKS. 
 
 234. According to Mr. Graham, each of the several tick 
 word-signs may take an initial or a final hook (in some 
 cases both), as follows: 
 
 An I hook to add will or all, as who will... ,.,.^/L.. , of all 
 
 ..,.. ...... , and will or and all....K^.- 
 
 An r hook to add are or our, as but are or but our ..... fl..., 
 
 \ 
 
 <\ 
 of our ..^... - . 
 
 An f-v hook to add have or of, as to have ^.,..\^.. J , or of 
 
 I 
 
 , but have ...U. . 
 
 J 
 An n hook to add not or own, as or not __ _ _, t of our 
 
 _ , on our own ,............ 
 
 Though in some of these cases these hooks may have 
 two or three meanings, the context is relied on to supply 
 the necessary distinction. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 235. In each of the following phrases, I hook is to be 
 prefixed to a tick word-sign to add will or all: 
 j and will* j but will 
 
 1 and all* 1 but all 
 
 *Written on the line, according to the principle embodied in Para- 
 garph 198. 
 
124 
 
 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 of all 
 
 on all 
 
 [or all 
 
 (or will 
 
 should all 
 
 ward 
 to all 
 who will 
 
 (should down- 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 236. In each of the following phrases, r hook is to be 
 prefixed to a tick word-sign to add are, our or or: 
 
 j all are 
 "j all our 
 ( and are 
 \ and our 
 
 but our 
 
 of our 
 
 on or about (on down- 
 ward) 
 
 on or before (Graham 
 
 on or near 
 
 on our (on downward) 
 or are 
 or our 
 ought our 
 
 should our (should down- 
 ward) 
 to our 
 who are 
 
 sign for before 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 237. In the following phrases, the f-v hook is affixed 
 to tick word-signs to add have or of: 
 
 Jor have 
 [or of 
 
 should have (should down- 
 ward) 
 
 to have 
 
 all have 
 all of 
 and have 
 and of 
 but have 
 but of 
 
 *who have 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 238. In each of the following phrases, n hook is affixed 
 to a tick word-sign to add not or own: 
 
 and our own 
 but are not 
 
 but not 
 
 but our own 
 
 This is one of the few cases in which the Benn Pitman system at- 
 taches a hook to a tick word-sign. 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 125 
 
 of our own or will not 
 
 on our own ought not 
 
 or not who will not 
 
 239. To several of the tick word-signs, what and 
 
 would may, according to Mr. Graham, be added thus: and 
 
 and would. ....;..- f what 
 
 on what ,...,, J ^~ ) to what ~^*,~~ . 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 240. In the following phrases, what or would is affixed 
 to the tick word-signs all, and, of, on, to: 
 
 all would of what 
 
 all would say of what avail 
 
 and what of what benefit 
 
 and what did you of what necessity 
 
 and what say you on what account (on up- 
 
 and what was he ward) 
 
 and would on what assumption 
 
 and would ask to what matter 
 
 and would do to what motion 
 
 and would say to what portion 
 
 APPENDAGES TO HOOKS AND TICKS. 
 
 241. To a tick with an initial or a final hook there may 
 be appended, according to Mr. Graham, an s circle, a tick, 
 the personal pronoun you, the ing dot; and also the dis- 
 joined ticks a and the, written in the place of the ing dot 
 to represent ing a and ing the. Illustrations: all of us, 
 
 \a 
 -., or all the .,......, who are you 2 . Who 
 
126 
 
 'TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 ore having a 
 
 are havin 9 
 
 are 
 
 laving the 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 242. The following phrases may be written by Gra- 
 ham writers in the manner represented: 
 
 all are having 
 
 and have the 
 
 all are having a 
 
 and of a 
 
 all are having the... _.,... and of the * - 
 
 all of us ^ 
 
 all of his" 
 
 but are having ....!X-. 
 
 and are having ..*... but are having a V 
 
 and are having a ...^ but are having the v ..fL 
 
 and have a 
 
 on all his 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 127 
 
 on having a 
 
 or having the 
 
 on having the ., 
 
 to have a Vr 
 
 or all his - 
 
 to have the 
 
 or all the 
 
 two of us 
 
 or are you 
 
 who are having 
 
 or having 
 
 who are having the .. 
 
 or having a ..... who are you ... 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 243. In the following exercise, ticks are attached to 
 ticks, in accordance with both the Pitman and Graham sys- 
 terns: 
 
 all a 
 all the 
 and a 
 and the 
 but a 
 
 but the 
 
 he and (he downward) 
 
 he who (he upward) 
 
 Jof a 
 
 (of an 
 
128 "TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 of the* should a 
 
 on a (should the 
 
 on the ( should he 
 
 on to Jto a 
 
 (ought a (to an 
 
 (ought an to the 
 
 fought the who should 
 (ought he who should be 
 
 EXEBCISK. 
 
 244. The following junctions of ticks with ticks are- 
 peculiar to the Graham system: 
 
 and I u ought I 
 
 how he (or how the) . ought there 
 
 I should _ ought not 
 
 > 
 
 of whom .. should I 
 
 on whom should there- tf- .. 
 
 *Expressed also by "proximity," and sometimes implied by joining; 
 the words between which of the occurs. 
 
"TICK" WORD-SIGNS. 129 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 245. In the following phrases, the a tick, having no 
 regular position, is accommodated to the following tick, 
 \vnich has an assigned position: 
 
 and but and who 
 
 and how and wheever 
 
CHAPTER X. 
 
 THE CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 246. The circle word-signs, is, Ms, as and has, are free- 
 ly used in phrases, initially, medially and finally. Each 
 of these words, when beginning a phrase, should be writ- 
 ten in its normal position, as required by the general rule 
 already given; that is to say, when beginning phrases, as 
 well as when standing separate, is and Ms should be writ- 
 ten above the line; as and has, on the line. But in the 
 midst or at the end of a phrase, where distinction by posi- 
 tion is impracticable and generally unnecessary, the circle 
 in any position may ordinarily represent any one of these 
 words.* 
 
 247. EXERCISE ON PHRASES BEGINNING WITH "IS." 
 
 is done is not 
 
 is generally is not necessary 
 
 j is he is not now 
 
 | is the is now 
 
 is he sure is probable (or probably) 
 
 *Instead of giving to is, his. as and fias at the beginning of a phrase 
 
 thp.ir normal nnaitinn. bothfrrahain and Benn Pitman allow the initial 
 
 circle, representing tWseworaSrw^e taken away from its regular posi- 
 tion and accommodated to that of the second word of the phrase, though 
 in many cases the second word would be perfectly legible without dis- 
 tinctive position. In the opinion of the author, these four words, 
 when used initially, should not be thrown out of position unless some 
 valuable purpose is served thereby. The first word of a phrase is often 
 the key to the whole, and to give it its normal position will in many 
 cases insure the ready reading of the whole clause, while the needless 
 displacement of the first word may cause a hesitating decipherment, if 
 not absolute misreading. It is recommended, therefore, that the stu- 
 dent, in writing the following exercises, give to circle word-signs begin- 
 ning a phrase their normal position, unless the legibility of the succeed 
 ing word requires a resort to ''initial displacement," according to rules 
 already explained. 
 
CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 131 
 
 is that 
 
 is that which may 
 
 is this 
 
 is this done 
 
 is this the 
 is this the way 
 is this yours 
 is your 
 
 248. EXERCISE ON PHRASES BEGINNING WITH "HIS." 
 
 his honor 
 
 His Honor Judge Smith 
 
 His Honor (the) Judge 
 
 his judgment 
 
 his knowledge 
 
 249. EXERCISE ON PHRASES 
 
 as (a) matter 
 
 as (a) matter (of) course 
 
 as (a) matter (of) fact 
 
 as (a) matter (of) law 
 
 as early as (I. D.) 
 
 as for a 
 
 as good 
 
 as good as 
 
 as good as possible 
 
 as great 
 
 as great as 
 
 as great as possible 
 
 as he 
 
 as the 
 
 as if (I. D.) 
 
 as large 
 
 as large as 
 
 as little 
 
 as little as 
 
 as long (I. D.) 
 
 as long as (I. D.) 
 
 as long ago (I. D.) 
 
 as long as possible (I. D.) 
 
 as many as 
 
 as many as possible 
 
 his own (I. D.) 
 his own name (I. D.) 
 his own opinion (I. D.) 
 his own position (I. D.) 
 his own rolition (I. D.) 
 
 BEGINNING WITH "AS." 
 
 as are (are 
 
 as many 
 
 ward) 
 as matters ^are now (are 
 
 made upward) 
 as most 
 as much as 
 as much as possible 
 as must 
 as mus(t) be 
 as near (I. D.) 
 as near as (I. D.) 
 as near as possible (I. D.) 
 as now 
 as shall 
 as shall be 
 as that 
 as they 
 as this 
 as though 
 as usual 
 as was 
 as (w)ell 
 as (w)ell as 
 as (w)ell as possible 
 as will be 
 
 up- 
 
132 CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 250. EXERCISE ON PHRASES BEGINNING WITH "HAS." 
 
 has again and again has known 
 
 has another has long been (I. D.) 
 
 has been has made 
 
 has done has many 
 
 has done it has never 
 
 has found has not 
 
 has had has not been 
 
 has had a has now 
 
 I has he has that 
 
 'i has the has this 
 
 has just has (to) be 
 
 has jus(t) as has your 
 
 251. Care should be taken that the circle representing 
 is, his, as and has be not joined initially where there is 
 danger that it may be read as part of the outline of the 
 succeeding word. Thus, is immediately, if phrased, may 
 look like seemed; is particularly may look like spirit, etc. 
 There are so many word-outlines beginning with the cir- 
 cle that the joining of a circle word-sign to the following 
 word should not be indulged in indiscriminately, and may 
 well be confined, at least by the young writer, to certain 
 common phrases, such as is not, is this, etc., where there is 
 no danger of misreading. 
 
 S CIRCLE FOB "US." 
 
 252. 17* i-a phrasing is generally (but never at the be- 
 ginning of a phrase) represented by a circle. Illustrations: 
 
 for ns ....\A.^ ~by us .............. , of us ........ . * * ........ Vx- 
 
 EXEBCISE. 
 
 253. In the following exercise, us is in every case te be 
 represented by the circle: 
 
CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 133 
 
 about us 
 
 after us 
 
 among us 
 
 at us 
 
 before us 
 
 behind us 
 
 beneath us 
 
 bring us 
 
 by us 
 
 deliver us 
 
 for us 
 
 from us 
 
 give us 
 
 have us 
 
 in us 
 
 let us 
 
 let us ask 
 
 let us be 
 
 let us go 
 
 let us have the 
 
 let us make 
 
 let us say 
 
 let us see (vocalize see) 
 
 make us 
 
 near us 
 
 of us 
 
 or us 
 
 over us 
 
 put us 
 
 receive us 
 
 received us 
 
 remember us 
 
 sadden us 
 
 take us 
 
 tell us 
 
 thank us 
 
 through us 
 
 to us 
 
 under us 
 
 value us 
 
 CIRCLES JOINED TO TICKS OR "BRIEF W OR T" WORD-SICNS. 
 
 254. A circle may be joined, if convenient, to a tick 
 word-sign or a "brief w or y" word-sign. Illustrations: is to 
 
 as to 
 
 , is a ....... , as a -f 
 
 , is the. 
 
 as the JQ , oil is (or all his) ... ... , to his 
 
CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 what is, ,, were his . e.. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 i all is is the 
 
 I all his is to 
 
 all is now of his 
 
 ( as a* of his own 
 
 I has a on his (on upward or 
 
 i as the downward) 
 
 I has the to his 
 
 as to to his own 
 
 as would were his 
 
 as would be f what is 
 
 as you * what his 
 
 as you are with his 
 
 **is a would his 
 
 COALESCING OR MERGING OF CIRCLES. 
 
 255. When a word consisting of or ending with a cir- 
 cle is joined to a following word consisting of or beginning 
 with a circle, the two circles merge or coalesce, making a 
 double-sized circle. 
 
 Illustrations: 
 
 1. Two circle word-signs merged: is Ms or is as 
 
 o 
 
 , ; as is, as his or as has, ..W.... 
 
 2. A circle word-sign, followed by a word beginning 
 with a circle, the two circles being merged: as soon as 
 
 *The a tick is perpendicular, in order that the phrase may not be 
 mistaken for as not or has not. 
 
 **The a tick is perpendicular, in order that the phrase may not be 
 mistaken for '* not. 
 
CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. 135 
 
 p Q-x 
 
 is said- 1 is seen.... , as such 
 
 ,....../Q ...., is such.../. ,., it is simply . .TY. ,itissuf- 
 
 fi cient ^J 7 , it is such 
 
 3. A word ending with a circle, joined to a word be- 
 ginning with a circle, the two circles merged: this subject 
 
 , in this city 
 
 4. A word ending with a circle, followed by a circle 
 word-sign, the two circles merged: this is (or this has) 
 
 ...YD...-, loves tt.jL..\Q M ,, takes his time , 1 O 
 
 t N 
 
 256. Sf loop at the end ef a word is often changed to a 
 circle, in order that this circle may merge with one im- 
 mediately following. Illustrations: jus(t) as (w)ell 
 
 , as fas(t) as ....p. 
 
 Vb 
 
 257. The double circle standing alone or at the begin- 
 ning of a phrase, is written either above or on the line, 
 in accordance with the position of the first of the two 
 words which the double circle represents. 
 
 258. The double circle, when unconnected with other 
 strokes, is made in the contrary direction to the motion of 
 the hands of a clock, and is best begun as if starting to 
 make the short-hand letter m backward. Joined to other 
 characters, it is written in one direction or the other, ac- 
 
136 CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 ..cording to eonvenience. Illustrations: as has been 
 
 ....O.....' 
 
 as some 
 259. The double circle may be followed by an a or the 
 
 /O 
 .tick. Illustrations: is as the. . . ........... ...... , is as a, 
 
 as is ffce./Q... , as is a ,..Q...., The junction of 
 
 the tick with the double circle is difficult for an untrained 
 hand, and should be specially practised by the learner. 
 
 260. In some cases it is convenient, in other cases 
 highly inconvenient, to form a double circle at the begin- 
 ning of a phrase. But there can be no objection to a 
 double circle so comparatively easy as that at the begin- 
 ning of phrases like as soon as, is seen, -etc. The student, 
 following what should be a general rule always to avoid, 
 if possible, non-facile forms will, wherever it seems 
 more convenient, write separately the circle word-sign, 
 instead of connecting it with the following word by means 
 of an initial double circle. 
 
 261. EXERCISE ON" INITIAL "IS," "HIS," "AS," OB "HAS,'' 
 
 MAKING PART OF A DOUBLE CIRCLE. 
 
 as has as is now 
 
 as has been as soon as 
 
 as has been done as soon as it may 
 
 as has bee(n) said as soon as they 
 
 as has never as soon as possible 
 
 J as is as such 
 
 j as his has as 
 
 as is known has as many 
 
CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 137 
 
 has his 
 
 is as they 
 
 has said 
 
 is as true (I. D.) 
 
 has several 
 
 is as was 
 
 has some 
 
 is as (w)ell known 
 
 has somehow 
 
 is described 
 
 has such 
 
 is his 
 
 has suggested 
 
 is safe 
 
 has supposed 
 
 is said 
 
 his description 
 
 is seen -> 
 
 his sober 
 
 is several 
 
 his subject 
 
 is similar 
 
 his supposition 
 
 is somehow 
 
 his supremacy 
 
 is somewhere 
 
 his sympathy 
 
 is something 
 
 is as 
 
 is subject 
 
 is as if (I. D.) 
 
 is substantially 
 
 is as general 
 
 is such 
 
 is as important 
 
 is sufficient 
 
 is as this 
 
 is supposed 
 
 262. EXERCISE ON PHRASES CONTAINING TWO MEDIAL 
 CIRCLES MERGED. 
 
 by his several 
 
 does as he 
 
 does as the 
 
 does as much 
 
 if his subject 
 
 if his success 
 
 if his suggestion 
 
 for Chris(t's) sake 
 
 for his sake 
 
 gives his time (tm-) 
 
 gives sufficient 
 
 in his senses 
 
 in his subject 
 
 in this city 
 
 in this sense 
 
 it is always said 
 
 it is as the 
 
 it is as he 
 
 it is his desire 
 
 it is said 
 
 it is something 
 
 it is seen 
 
 it is soon done 
 
 it is such 
 
 it is sufficient 
 
 it is as (w)ell 
 
 ward) 
 
 it mus(t) seen? 
 jus(t) as (w)ell 
 
 ward) 
 
 ( I down- 
 
 ( I down- 
 
138 CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 jus(t) as (w) ell as another there is something 
 
 las(t) summer there is such 
 
 on this side this century 
 
 on this subject this has been 
 on this supposition . this is done 
 
 something is said this is no doubt 
 
 such is his this is the 
 
 there is some this is your 
 
 there is some reason yours sincerely 
 
 CIRCLE WORD-SIGN FOLLOWING A FINAL CIRCLE. 
 
 263. To a word with a final circle, a circle word-sign 
 (especially us or his) may be added by converting the 
 final circle into a double-sized circle. Illustrations: 
 
 Mess us or bless his, Mi .>Q,. w . .., gives us or gives his 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 264. In the following exercise add us or his by chang- 
 ing a single circle to a double circle: 
 
 address, address us, address his. 
 aids, aids us, aids his. 
 amaze, amaze us, amaze his 
 arouse, arouse us, arouse his 
 authorize, authorize us, authorize his 
 becomes, becomes us, becomes his 
 bless, bless us, bless his 
 brings, brings us, brings his 
 calls, calls us, calls his 
 cause, cause us, cause his 
 choose, choose us, choose his 
 crowns, crowns us, crowns his 
 combines, combines us, combines his 
 
CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. 139 
 
 does, does us, does his 
 
 embrace, embrace us, embrace his 
 
 gives, gives us, gives his 
 
 improves, improves us, improves his 
 
 it is, it is his 
 
 knows, knows us, knows his 
 
 makes, makes us, makes his 
 
 observes, observes us, observes his 
 
 place, place us, place his 
 
 praise, praise us, praise his 
 
 punishes, punishes us, punishes his 
 
 receives, receives us, receives his 
 
 refuse, refuse us, refuse his 
 
 saddens, saddens us, saddens his 
 
 surprise, surprise us, surprise his 
 
 sustains, sustains us, sustains his 
 
 takes, takes us, takes his 
 
 tells, tells us, tells his 
 
 thanks, thanks us, thanks his 
 
 A CIRCLE WORD-SIGN AFTER A DOUBLE CIRCLE. 
 
 265. To a word ending with a double circle, a circle 
 word-sign (most commonly us or Ms) may be added by car- 
 rying the additional circle to the opposite side of the 
 
 stroke. Illustrations: raises us or raises his 
 
 exposes us or exposes his 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 266. In accordance with the rule just stated, write the 
 following: 
 
 < addresses us j arouses us 
 
 I addresses his ) arouses his 
 
140 CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 ( assesses us ( induces us 
 
 ( assesses his | induces his 
 
 j blesses us j places us 
 
 I blesses his J places his 
 
 ( chooses us j reduces us 
 
 ( chooses his j reduces his 
 
 j dismisses us j refuses us 
 
 I dismisses his | refuses his 
 
 J excuses us J rejoices us 
 
 I excuses his { rejoices his 
 
 j exposes us j supposes us 
 
 I exposes his ( supposes his 
 
 j impresses us j surprises us 
 
 I impresses his | surprises his 
 
 A CIRCLE WORD-SIGN AFTER A LOOP. 
 
 267. To a word ending with a loop, a circle word-sign 
 (most commonly us or his) may be added by carrying the 
 circle to the opposite side of the stroke. Illustrations: 
 
 against us or against his ....... , invest us or invest his 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 268. In accordance with the rule just stated, write the 
 fallowing: 
 
 j addressed us j assist us 
 
 ) addressed his } assist his 
 
 (against us j authorized us 
 
 (against his j authorized his 
 
 j amazed us j blessed us 
 
 I amazed his j blessed his 
 
 j aroused us j cost us 
 
 ) aroused his / cost his 
 
CIRCLE WORD SIGNS. 
 
 141 
 
 j disgust us 
 | disgust his 
 ( embraced us 
 | embraced his 
 I exposed us 
 j exposed his 
 j expressed us 
 j expressed his 
 foster us 
 foster his 
 invest us 
 invest his 
 master us 
 master his 
 noticed us 
 noticed his 
 
 purchased us 
 purchased his 
 raised us 
 raised his 
 reduced us 
 reduced his 
 refused us 
 refused his 
 rejoiced us 
 rejoiced his 
 passed us 
 passed his 
 j trust us 
 j trust his 
 j supposed us 
 1 supposed his 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF A CIRCLE. 
 
 269. A single circle is often written instead of a 
 double circle, to avoid the inconvenience of writing the 
 latter upon a half-length character. Illustrations: all 
 
 that is said 
 
 it is sometimes 
 
 Charles 
 
 Second 
 
 270. For facility of writing, and also because there i? 
 no triple-size circle, a double circle is frequently used 
 vhere there are in fact three sounds of s. Illustrations: 
 
 this is said 
 
 just as roon as 
 
142 CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 271. This principle of abbreviation has been thus 
 tersely expressed by A. J. Graham: "When several * 
 sounds come^together, one or more may be omitted to se- 
 cure the advantage of a phrase." 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 272. In each of the following phrases, one sound of s 
 is omitted in the writing, a single circle being written 
 for two sounds of s, or a double circle for three: 
 
 all that is (s)aid let us (con)(s)ider 
 
 all this is (s)aid mos(t) (c)ertainly 
 
 it is (c)ertain this (circum) (s)tance 
 
 it is (s)ometimes this is (s) aid 
 
 jus(t) as (s)oon as there is (c)ertainly 
 
 las(t) (s)pring these (circum) (s)tances 
 
 VOCALIZATION OF THE CIRCLE. 
 
 273. When necessary to distinguish one circle word- 
 sign from another, vocalization may be resorted to. For 
 instance, it may sometimes be wise to distinguish in this 
 
 ..Id'. from it is ......... 
 
 way it has ....ld'. from it is - But a resort to 
 
 this expedient is rarely necessary. 
 
 FICTITIOUS PRIMITIVE FOR "IS," "AS," OR "HAS." 
 
 274. 2s, as or has is sometimes represented by the "fic- 
 titious primitive" ) t in order that it may be added 
 by halving, or there by double-lengthing. Illustrations: 
 
 is lt -- ,...... as it .....)...., is there 
 
 1 
 
 (For fuller explanations, with exercises, see chapters OH 
 the half-lengthing and double-lengthing principles.) 
 
CHAPTER XI. 
 
 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 ii7o. Subject to general phrasing laws as to conveni- 
 ence of junction, sense relation, etc., the "brief w and y" 
 word-signs (we, with, were, what, would, you, ye, yet, 'be- 
 yond) may all be joined initially in phrases; and all, except 
 beyond and yet, may also be joined to a preceding word. Un- 
 distinguished by position, beyond might be mistaken for you, 
 
 and yet for you inverted. Illustrations: we have ^^^.....^ 
 
 have we .......Ss^ ... , with this _,.L=~ wherewith 
 
 ,.,..c^~^ , they were ^_.\ r ^., were they.... **- , what 
 
 i. may ..Joh MMM i..i would be....^.^ , there would ,,..^.4,^,.^ 
 
 you may ^.A^XS*., may you .. ..^-^n.^^you are _<v/....,., , we 
 you .^^j^.^..,. t beyond my reach , yet it is .-* 
 
144 
 
 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS 
 
 276. EXERCISE ON PHRASES BEGINNING WITH "WE."" 
 
 we admit 
 
 we attempt 
 
 we believe 
 
 we blame 
 
 we call 
 
 we claim 
 
 we decide 
 
 we declare 
 
 we deem (I. D.) 
 
 we demand 
 
 we deny 
 
 we depend 
 
 we design 
 
 we did 
 
 we did many things 
 
 we do 
 
 we do say 
 
 we fear 
 
 we find 
 
 we have 
 
 we have a 
 
 we have the 
 
 we have done 
 
 we have known 
 
 we have made 
 
 we kave never 
 
 we have now 
 
 we have observed 
 
 we have only 
 
 we have said 
 
 we have seen 
 
 we have that 
 
 we have this 
 
 we have (to) be 
 
 we have understood, 
 
 we have you 
 
 we only 
 
 we shall 
 
 we shall again 
 
 we shall answer 
 
 we shall be 
 
 we shall do 
 
 we shall get 
 
 we shall have 
 
 we shall never 
 
 we shall not 
 
 we shall now 
 
 we shall observe 
 
 we take 
 
 we teach (I. D.) 
 
 we thank (I. D.) 
 
 we then 
 
 we think 
 
 we thought 
 
 we took (I. D.) 
 
 we touch 
 
 we went 
 
 we were 
 
 we were doing 
 
 w were taking 
 
 we were thinking 
 
 we wish (I. D.) 
 
 we wish (te) be 
 
 we wonder 
 
 277. EXERCISE ON PHBASES BEGINNING WITH "WITH."" 
 
 with a 
 
 with advantage 
 
 with each (I. D.) 
 with its 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 145 
 
 with itself with this 
 
 with justice with this case 
 
 with much (I. D.) with this subject 
 
 with one with this understanding 
 
 with one another with those (I. D.) 
 
 with such with those which 
 
 with that with those who 
 
 with the with which 
 
 with thanks (I. D.) with your 
 
 with them with your approval 
 
 with themselves with your (con) sent 
 
 with these (I. D.) with your permission 
 
 with these cases (I. D.) with your promise 
 
 with these subjects (I. D.) with your sanction 
 
 278. EXERCISE ON PHEASES BEGINNING WITH "WEBE." 
 
 were a were only 
 
 were chosen were seen 
 
 were discovered were taken 
 
 were done were the 
 
 were generally were then 
 
 were glad were they 
 
 were his were thinking 
 
 were just i were this 
 were jus(t) as necessary j were those 
 
 were once were wanted 
 
 279. EXERCISE ON PHRASES ENDING WITH "WEBE." 
 
 all they were some were 
 
 and were think they were 
 
 as they were till they were 
 
 if they were we were 
 
 many were when they were 
 
 since they were when we were 
 
 so many were where they were 
 
 BO they were where we were 
 
146 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 280. As will be explained in a subsequent chapter, were 
 
 is also expressed by.,.,6< ....... as a "fictitious primitire" in 
 
 such phrases as were it r ....i^, n .^ , were it not^.i^zL.^; a nd 
 by an r hook in such phrases as which weret~~:*jL and 
 
 such were ^9 ( See Paragraphs 371-373, 463-464.) 
 
 281. EXERCISE ON PHRASES BEGINNING WITH "WHA.T." 
 
 what a ) horizontal what did you 
 
 what an f tick what do they 
 
 what answer what do you mean 
 
 what are the (are down- what does the 
 
 ward) what does it matter 
 
 what are you (are down- / what did he 
 
 ward) ] what did the 
 
 what can be (the) reason i what he 
 
 what can be their reason j what the 
 what can it be what has been 
 
 what ca(n) there be what he did 
 
 what church what he does 
 
 what could a what he thought 
 
 what could be what is 
 
 what could it what is (to) be 
 
 what could they what it can 
 
 what could we do what it is 
 
 what could we think what it may 
 
 what could your what mus(t) be 
 
 what did they what it would be 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 147 
 
 what account 
 
 what kind 
 
 what matters it 
 
 what neither 
 
 what occasion 
 
 what objection 
 
 what order 
 
 what reason 
 
 what reason have they 
 
 what reply 
 what right 
 what says he 
 what says my friend 
 what say they 
 what was 
 what would be 
 what would it be 
 what would the 
 
 282. EXERCISE ON PHRASES BEGINNING WITH "WOULD." 
 
 would a (horizontal tick) 
 
 would exercise 
 
 would accept 
 
 would go 
 
 would another 
 
 would have found 
 
 would ask 
 
 would have made 
 
 would be 
 
 would have said 
 
 would be able 
 
 would have seen 
 
 would become 
 
 would have the 
 
 would be done 
 
 would have (to) 
 
 would be glad 
 
 1 would he 
 
 would be made 
 
 "i would the 
 
 would be one 
 
 would it 
 
 would be only 
 
 would it be 
 
 would be received 
 
 would its 
 
 would be remembered 
 
 would make 
 
 would be said 
 
 would make them 
 
 would be saved 
 
 would manage 
 
 would be seen 
 
 would mention 
 
 would be sure 
 
 would never 
 
 would be that 
 
 would not be 
 
 would be there 
 
 would not do 
 
 would be told 
 
 would not only 
 
 would be written 
 
 would not say 
 
 would be wrong 
 
 would not take 
 
 would be your 
 
 would not think 
 
 would come 
 
 would not the 
 
 would do 
 
 would not they 
 
 be 
 
148 
 
 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 would not this 
 would not undertake 
 would rather 
 would receive 
 would require 
 
 would say 
 
 would see (vocalize see) 
 
 would take 
 
 would undertake 
 
 would write 
 
 283. EXEKCISE ON "WOULD" JOINED TO A PRECEDING WORD. 
 
 but would 
 
 but would be 
 
 but would not 
 
 but would rather 
 
 but would say 
 
 each would 
 
 each would be 
 
 he would (he downward) 
 
 he would do 
 
 he would go 
 
 he would know 
 
 he would never 
 
 he would nevertheless 
 
 he would no doubt 
 
 he would not 
 
 he would not do 
 
 he would not go 
 
 he would not know 
 
 he would not say 
 
 he would not think 
 
 he would rather 
 
 he would rather not 
 
 he would say 
 
 much would 
 
 much would be 
 
 much would no doubt 
 
 she would be 
 
 she would do 
 
 she would go 
 
 she would have 
 
 she would never 
 
 she would not 
 
 she would rather 
 
 she would say 
 
 so would 
 
 so would many 
 
 who would 
 
 who would be glad 
 
 who would be ready 
 
 who would be reasonable 
 
 who would do 
 
 who would go 
 
 who would know 
 
 who would never 
 
 who would not 
 
 who would not think 
 
 who would rather 
 
 who- would say 
 
 284. As will be explained in a subsequent chapter, 
 would is also expressed after certain strokes by making 
 th3m half-length in the third position. (See Paragraphs 
 467-470.) 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 149 
 
 285. EXERCISE ON PHRASES 
 
 you always 
 
 you are (are upward) 
 
 you are able 
 
 you are aware 
 
 you are becoming 
 
 you are called upon 
 
 you are doing 
 
 you are going 
 
 you are interested 
 
 you are known 
 
 you are necessarily 
 
 you are never 
 
 you are now 
 
 you are ready 
 
 you are received 
 
 you are rendered 
 
 you are requested 
 
 you are right 
 
 you are seen 
 
 you are supposed 
 
 you are thinking 
 
 you are wrong. 
 
 you can (See Par. 535.) 
 
 you can be 
 
 you can do 
 
 you can have 
 
 you ca(n) judge 
 
 you can never 
 
 you can observe 
 
 you ca(n) only be 
 
 you can say 
 
 you can take 
 
 you can understand 
 
 you can undertake 
 
 you cannot 
 
 (See Par. 187, first note.) 
 
 BEGINNING WITH "YOU." 
 
 you cannot be 
 
 you cannot do 
 
 you cannot have 
 
 you cannot take 
 
 you cannot understand 
 
 you could 
 
 you could be 
 
 you could do 
 
 you could not be 
 
 you have 
 
 you have done 
 
 you have only 
 
 you have received 
 
 you have seen 
 
 you have your 
 
 you make 
 
 you may 
 
 you may always be 
 
 you may as (w)ell be 
 
 you may go 
 
 you may receive 
 
 you may remember 
 
 you may recall 
 
 you may recollect 
 
 you mention 
 
 you might 
 
 you might not 
 
 you must 
 
 you mus(t) accept 
 
 you mus(t) also 
 
 you mus(t) ask 
 
 you mus(t) be 
 
 you mus(t) be aware 
 
 you mus(t) become 
 
 you mus(t) be mistaken 
 
 you mus(t) be sure 
 
150 
 
 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 you mus(t) come you will 
 
 you mus(t) -do you will 
 
 you mus(t) go you will 
 
 you mus(t) have you will 
 
 you mus(t) know you will 
 
 you mus(t) make you will 
 
 you mus(t) not you will 
 
 you mus(t) recollect you will 
 
 you mus(t) remember you will 
 
 you mus(t) say you will 
 
 you mus(t) seem you will 
 
 you mus(t) understand you will 
 
 you mus(t) undertake you will 
 
 you mus(t) write you will 
 
 you perceive you will 
 
 you require you will 
 
 you should be you will 
 
 you should do you will 
 
 you should find you will 
 
 you should have done you will 
 
 you should have known you will 
 
 you should have taken you will 
 
 you should know you will 
 
 you should never you will 
 
 you should not be you will 
 
 you should not do you will 
 
 you should observe you will 
 
 you should take you will 
 
 you should understand you will 
 
 you should undertake you will 
 
 you will you will 
 
 you will also you will 
 
 become 
 
 be made 
 
 be saved 
 
 be seen 
 
 be sure 
 
 be supposed 
 
 be wanted 
 
 do 
 
 do something 
 
 find 
 
 give 
 
 have 
 
 have done 
 
 have placed 
 
 have seen 
 
 have shown 
 
 have taken 
 
 know 
 
 leave 
 
 never 
 
 observe 
 
 perhaps 
 
 perceive 
 
 probably 
 
 receive 
 
 remember 
 
 say 
 
 see (vocalize see) 
 
 sometime 
 
 think it 
 
 understand 
 
 write 
 
 286. EXERCISE ON "YOU" JOINED TO A PRECEDING WORD. 
 
 about you after you receive 
 
 after you after you will be 
 
 after you are (are upward) although you 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 151 
 
 although you are 
 
 although you may 
 
 although you will 
 
 beneath you 
 
 but you 
 
 but you are 
 
 but you may think 
 
 but you will be 
 
 ca(n) you 
 
 can you make 
 
 can you receive 
 
 did you 
 
 did you go 
 
 did you know 
 
 did you never 
 
 did you receive 
 
 do you 
 
 do you know 
 
 do you recall 
 
 do you remember 
 
 for you 
 
 for you are 
 
 for you may 
 
 for you will be 
 
 from you 
 
 give you 
 
 give you my 
 
 give you my reasons 
 
 had you 
 
 had you many 
 
 had you reasons 
 
 if you 
 
 if you may 
 
 if you must 
 
 if you will 
 
 I thank you (I. D.) 
 
 I think you mus(t) be 
 
 I think you will never 
 
 made you 
 
 many think you 
 
 mus(t) you 
 
 mus(t) you go 
 
 mus(t) you make 
 
 mus(t) you receive 
 
 of you 
 
 or you 
 
 or you may 
 
 or you must 
 
 or you will 
 
 on you (on downward) 
 
 said you 
 
 said you should 
 
 said you should be 
 
 see you 
 
 so mus(t) you 
 
 so you 
 
 so you go 
 
 so you may 
 
 so you must 
 
 so you should be 
 
 so you will be 
 
 take you 
 
 tell you 
 
 thank you 
 
 there you are 
 
 there you mus(t) be 
 
 there you will be 
 
 till you 
 
 till you are ready 
 
 till you receive 
 
 till you reply 
 
 to you 
 
 told you 
 
 we thank you (I. D.) 
 
ins "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 whether you whether you must 
 
 whether you are whether you will be 
 
 287. EXERCISE ON PHRASES BEGINNING WITH "YE," "YET" 
 
 AND "BEYOND." 
 
 ye do yet it is not 
 
 ye had (I. D.) yet it is nothing 
 
 ye never yet it is no doubt 
 
 ye think yet this 
 
 ye did not yet this is 
 ye do not (I. D.) yet be made 
 
 ye had not (I. D.) yet be seen 
 
 ye have j beyond me 
 
 yet another \ beyond my 
 
 jyet it has beyond the 
 
 | yet it is beyond you 
 
 JUNCTION OF BRIEF "w" AND "Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 288. In a few cases where the junction is convenient, 
 a "brief w or y" word-sign may be joined to another such 
 
 sign. Illustrations: we ivere 
 
 3 
 what would .................. In these cases, though the second 
 
 word, as in most other phrases, loses its normal position, 
 no ambiguity results. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 289. In the following phrases, two "brief w or y" word- 
 signs are joined: 
 
 we were we were generally 
 
 we were chosen we were just 
 
 we were doing we were taken 
 
 we were done we were taking 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 153 
 
 we were then what would be thought 
 
 we were thinking what would become 
 
 were we what would give them 
 
 were we chosen what would give us 
 
 were we doing what would he 
 
 were we just what would the 
 
 were we thinking what would he do 
 
 what would what would he have 
 
 what would be what would he think 
 what would be necessary what would my 
 what would be reasonable what would our reasons 
 
 what would be right what would so many 
 
 what would be said what would so much (mch) 
 
 S CIRCLE ON BRIEF "w" AND "Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 290. To a "brief w or y" word-sign, a circle may be added 
 for is, Ms, as, has or us, giving us such phrases as with his 
 
 <2> 3 -Zf 
 
 or with us* .......... < > what is... ^ ............ ... , what is the .. ....... 
 
 a 
 
 what has been ...... -S , beyond his or beyond 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 ( beyond his what is the 
 
 1 beyond us what is the answer 
 
 were as what is the date 
 
 were as now what is the difference 
 
 were his what is the effect 
 
 were his own ,. what is the fact 
 
 what has what is (the) matter 
 
 what has been what is the necessary 
 
 what has been done what is the necessity 
 
 what has been necessary what is the object 
 
 what is what is the theory 
 
154 
 
 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 what is (to) be done 
 
 what is (to) be made 
 
 what his 
 
 with as 
 
 with as much (first two 
 
 words displaced.) 
 with as much money (I.D.) 
 with as much pleasure (I. 
 
 D.) 
 
 with as much profit (I. D.) 
 with as much reason (I. D.) 
 
 with as much respect (I. 
 D.) 
 
 with as much responsibili- 
 ty (I. D.) 
 
 with his advantage 
 
 with his claim 
 
 with his client 
 
 with his knowledge 
 
 with his testimony 
 
 with his theory 
 
 with us 
 
 INITIAL "W" HOOK FOR "WE" AND "WITH." 
 
 291. The initial w hook, which the rules of word-writ- 
 ing authorize upon five alphabetic strokes (el, lay, n, m 
 and ray), may in phrasing be prefixed to any of those 
 strokes to represent we or with. Illustrations: we listen 
 
 > we always 
 
 never,. 
 
 we may 
 
 we enjoy . 
 
 .. , we receive ....... .-,, with my 
 
 or with me with many ,., we must 
 
 we will 
 
 . We and with, when represented initially 
 
 by the w hook, are best written in the first position, the 
 position of the word-signs to which in form they so closely 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 155 
 
 approximate; but under the law of "initial displacement/' 
 their position is sometimes accommodated to that of the 
 second word of the phrase. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 292. In the following phrases, we is to be represented 
 by the w hook, and if it begins a phrase, should occupy the 
 first position: 
 
 we also 
 
 we always 
 
 we answer 
 
 we are (are upward) 
 
 we are able 
 
 we are acquainted 
 
 we are better 
 
 we are called 
 
 we are certain 
 
 we are clear ' 
 
 we are determined 
 
 we are doing 
 
 we are entering 
 
 we are entitled 
 
 we are found 
 
 we are glad 
 
 we are giving 
 
 we are indebted 
 
 we are never 
 
 we are in the way 
 
 we are informed 
 
 we are known 
 
 we are necessarily 
 
 we are never 
 
 we are now 
 
 we are receiving 
 
 we are right 
 
 we are said (to) be 
 
 we are then 
 
 we are understood 
 we are very glad 
 we are very sure 
 we are wrong 
 all we are 
 because we are 
 because we are able 
 I know that we are 
 if we are 
 if we are able 
 if we are now 
 that we are 
 where we are 
 when we are 
 when we are bound 
 while we are 
 we embrace 
 we employ 
 we enjoy 
 we inquire 
 we intend 
 we like 
 we may 
 
 we may as (w)ell 
 we may also 
 we may always 
 we may have 
 we may go 
 we may never 
 
156 
 
 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 we may perhaps 
 
 we may probably 
 
 we may think 
 
 if we may 
 
 when we may 
 
 whenever we may 
 
 we might have done 
 
 we might have taken 
 
 we might make 
 
 we might not 
 
 we might not be 
 
 we might not do 
 
 we might not decide 
 
 we might not determine 
 
 we might not have 
 
 we might not say 
 
 we might not think 
 
 we might not take 
 
 we must 
 
 we mus(t) observe 
 
 we mus(t) receive 
 
 we mus(t) say 
 
 we mus(t) take 
 
 we mus(t) therefore 
 
 we mus(t) understand 
 
 we mus(t) write 
 
 we mus(t) always 
 
 we mus(t) be 
 
 we mus(t) do 
 
 we mus(t) go 
 
 we mus(t) have 
 
 we mus(t) have done 
 
 we mus(t) have known 
 
 we mus(t) have taken 
 
 we mus(t) make 
 
 we mus(t) mention 
 
 we mus(t) never 
 
 we mus(t) not 
 
 we mus(t) not be 
 
 we mus(t) not have 
 
 we mus(t) now 
 
 if we must 
 
 when we must 
 
 whenever we must 
 
 where we must 
 
 wherever we must 
 
 we necessarily 
 
 we neglect 
 
 we never 
 
 we never think 
 
 we now 
 
 we rather (I. D.)* 
 
 we receive 
 
 we reply 
 
 we require 
 
 we repeat 
 
 we report 
 
 we request 
 
 we resolve 
 
 we respect 
 
 we write you 
 
 we will 
 
 we will ask 
 
 we will be 
 
 we will become 
 
 we will call 
 
 we will do 
 
 we will find 
 
 we will have 
 
 we will have none 
 
 * We accommodates itself to the position of rather, in order that the 
 phrase may not go too far above the line. 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 157 
 
 we will have observed 
 
 we will have taken 
 
 we will judge 
 
 we will know that 
 
 we will make 
 
 we will mention 
 
 we will never 
 
 we will now 
 
 we will only 
 
 we will proceed 
 
 we will try 
 
 we will take 
 
 when we will 
 
 where we will 
 
 where we will have 
 
 where we may 
 
 wherever we may 
 
 we mean 
 
 we mean to 
 
 we mean (to) be 
 
 we mean (to) do 
 
 we mean (to) go 
 
 we mean (to) have 
 
 we mean (to) saj 
 
 we mention 
 
 we might 
 
 we might as (w)ell 
 
 we might as (w)ell be 
 
 we might as (w)ell have 
 
 we might go 
 
 EXERCISE ON "WE KNOW." 
 
 293. By writing the phrase we know, for the sake of 
 distinction, below the line, we avoid the necessity which 
 otherwise might often arise, of distinguishing it by vocaliza- 
 tion from when in the first position or one in the second 
 position. 
 
 we know (third position) 
 
 we know that you can 
 
 we know best 
 
 we know that you must 
 
 we know enough 
 
 we know that you will 
 
 we know he must 
 
 we know the 
 
 we know his name 
 
 we know the most 
 
 we know it is 
 
 we know them 
 
 we know not 
 
 we know this 
 
 we know nothing 
 
 we know we have 
 
 we know one thing 
 
 we know we may 
 
 we know so many 
 
 we know we must 
 
 we know that 
 
 we know we might not 
 
 we know that he is 
 
 we know we were 
 
 we know that you are 
 
 we know where we are 
 
158 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 "WITH" EXPRESSED BY THE "w" HOOK. 
 
 294. In the following exercise, with is to be represented 
 by the to hook, and, unless otherwise indicated, should oc- 
 cupy the first position, in accordance with the general rule 
 governing the position of words at the beginning of a 
 phrase : 
 
 with another with regard (to) which 
 
 with another person with regret (I. D.) 
 
 with him (I. D.) with respect 
 
 with many with respect (to) his 
 
 rwith me with respect (to) him 
 
 | with my with respect (to) many 
 
 with my friends with respect (te) one 
 
 with my information with respect (to) the 
 
 with my knowledge with respect (to) this 
 
 with my leave with respect (to) which 
 
 with my love (vocalize with respect (to) your 
 
 Jove)* **with whom (I. D.) 
 
 with my money with whom he has been (he 
 
 with my own upward) 
 
 with my regards with whom we are 
 
 with regard (I. D.) with whom you are 
 
 with regard (to) my with whom you can 
 
 with regard (to) that with whom you could be 
 
 with regard (to) them with whom you will be 
 
 with regard (to) this with whom you will have 
 
 "WITH.OUB." 
 
 295. In order to obtain a facile phrase-form, our, in 
 the very common and useful phrase with our, is written 
 with the upward r in the third position. Illustrations: 
 
 with our ..S-* ; with our sanction , 
 
 See Paragraph 96- 
 
 *In the Graham system, this phrase is written by joining the ordinary 
 signs fdnPWnHB'WWTTjut in this list, whom is supposed to be writ- 
 ten according to Bonn Pitman, with m in the third position. 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 159 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 with our with our discharge 
 
 with our affection with our friends 
 
 with our attention with our information 
 
 with our bes(t) informa- with our name 
 
 tion with our objections 
 
 with our bes(t) regards with our position 
 
 with our (circum) stances with our reasons 
 
 with our (con)dition with our respect 
 
 with our (con) sent with our sanction 
 
 with our duty with our senses 
 
 with our decision with our visit 
 
 "YOU," "WERE" AND "WOULD" FOLLOWING A CIRCLE. 
 
 296. By turning the circle backward on upright or in- 
 clined strokes, or downward on horizontal strokes, the 
 joining of you, were or would is often made easy where 
 otherwise it would be impracticable. Illustrations: does 
 
 it please you^.,,..\>. ..... , 7 trust you will.. ...&...., , 7 suppose 
 
 you are .jjv. su h as would ...... <$.^., pay as you go 
 
 ...... <$. 
 
 , makes you ..x^w^ . In these cases the backward 
 
 or downward turning of the circle does not include an n 
 hook, as the circle so turned usually does at the end of a 
 word. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 297. In the following phrases the circle preceding you, 
 were or would is to be turned in the manner which best ac- 
 complishes a convenient junction: 
 
 asks you because you are 
 
160 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 because you may I trus(t) you will 
 
 because you mus(t) be it makes you 
 
 because you will pay as you go 
 
 begs you such as would 
 
 bless you such as would be 
 
 does it please you such as would make 
 
 gives you such as you 
 
 I suppose you are such as you will have 
 
 I suppose you will suppose you should be 
 
 I trus(t) you are we may trus(t) you 
 
 INVERSION OF "YOU," "WERE," ETC. 
 
 298. We, were, would and you, when their regular forms 
 would join inconveniently or not at all, may, for the sake 
 of a phrase, be inverted; that is to say, the open or hollow 
 side of the curve may be turned in the opposite direction 
 
 from ordinary. Illustrations: shall we not .,/. , since 
 
 you take... J , there were many ...J^^---^.- , if they 
 
 would tafce-^^^7--- .Because of the aid furnished by the 
 
 I i 
 context, this expedient does not interfere with legibility, 
 
 and by means of it we secure many useful phrases which 
 would otherwise be impracticable. This inversion is au- 
 thorized by Graham, but not by Benn Pitman. 
 
 ^ (.As io position of inverted you and your, when begin- 
 ning a phrase, see Paragraph 303.) 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 299. In each of the following phrases, you, were, would 
 3r we is written with the inverted or reversed form: 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 161 
 
 among you 
 
 between you 
 
 ca(n) you never 
 
 I observe you 
 
 I send you (7 upward) 
 
 nor you 
 
 shall we ask 
 
 shall we be 
 
 shall we have 
 
 shall we not 
 
 shall we say 
 
 since you 
 
 since you can 
 
 since you do 
 
 since you take 
 
 should you (should 
 
 ward) 
 
 should you decide 
 should you go 
 should you take 
 than you 
 than you expect 
 than you have 
 than you know 
 there were many 
 unless you do 
 unless you take 
 unless you think 
 *we can 
 we ca(n) do 
 we ca(n) have 
 we ca(n) make 
 
 we ca(n) observe 
 we ca(n) only 
 we ca(n) take 
 we ca(n)not 
 we ca ( n ) not be 
 we ca(n)not have 
 we ca (n) not say 
 we ca(n)not take 
 we could 
 we could be 
 we could have 
 we could not 
 we could not be 
 we could not have 
 we hope (I. D.) 
 up- when you 
 
 when you can 
 when you desire 
 when you discuss 
 when you do 
 when you go 
 when you have 
 when you take 
 when you think 
 which we can 
 which we ca(n)not 
 which we make 
 yet you do 
 yet you know 
 yet you never 
 yet you say 
 you did (I. D.) 
 
 *The author, who has for some time practised the joining of the in- 
 verted we to can and could, has not experienced in the slightest degree 
 the conflict theoretically apprehended by some writers, between we and 
 what. Those who prefer Mr. Graham's method of expressing we in these 
 cases, where theTB^ttlBMWnSHPIfrtW^Wfl, will find it explained in Par- 
 agraph 121. The verbal combinations we can and ive could are so com- 
 mon that some method of effecting a junction seems to belimperatively 
 accessary. 
 
162 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 you deny (I. D.)* you think (I. D.) 
 
 you do (I. D.) you had not (I. D.) 
 
 you do not (I. D.) you know 
 
 you never think (I. D.) you know that 
 
 you thank (I. D.) you know them 
 
 300. The inversion of were is of course avoided when 
 were is represented by the r hook as in the phrases which 
 were, such were, etc. (See Paragraphs 371-373.) The in- 
 version of would is avoided when would is expressed by half- 
 lengthing, as in they would, it would, etc. (See Paragraphs 
 467-470.) 
 
 "YOU'' USED FOR "YOUR." 
 
 301. Your, when its ordinary sign does not make a con- 
 venient junction, may be represented by the sign for you, 
 either regular or inverted, preference being given to the 
 regular form, if convenient. This principle is recognized 
 by Munson, not by Graham or Pitman. But the represent- 
 ation of both you and your by the single sign here given was 
 for many years practised in the United States Senate by 
 that distinguished reporter, the late Dennis F. Murphy. 
 
 Illustrations: I think your reasowr--w^ , among your 
 
 neighbors - r ^~^_^>^_^\.- 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 302. In the following exercise, your is to be represented 
 by the sign for you, regular or inverted, according to con- 
 venience: 
 
 among your neighbors ask your mother 
 
 answer your inquiry define your duties 
 
 ask your father during your residence 
 
 *As ye ia never used except in the solemn style of address, there is 
 no danger in colloquial matter of confounding ye and you. 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 163 
 
 I think your reasons make your exit 
 
 in your name pay your respects 
 
 in your position read your letter 
 
 in your testimony resign your position 
 
 it may be your case take your time (tm) 
 
 make your answer take your receipt 
 
 POSITION OF "YOU" AND "YOUR." 
 
 303. At the beginning of phrases, you and your, in their 
 inverted form, may safely sacrifice their normal position 
 and are generally written as high or low as may be neces- 
 sary in order to bring the second word of the phrase into 
 its normal place. The regular form of you, when written 
 initially, takes its normal position. 
 
 EXPRESSION OF "YOU WOULD," "WERE YOU," ETC. 
 
 304. Every shorthand writer of experience has had 
 forced upon him in his daily practice the conviction that 
 such common colloquial expressions as would you, what 
 you, you were, ivith you, ought not to be unphrasable. 
 When called upon to write the very frequent word-groups 
 of this class (which are spoken rapidly, because they are 
 natural word-groups), he has felt, (if his "system" has pro- 
 vided for them no convenient method of phrasing), that to 
 write them as separated words was an almost intolerable 
 detention. The Graham "systeinJM^n_order to meet this 
 want (unprovifrecl ior7"It is believed, Tjy other systems) has 
 provided that certain word-signs belonging to the "brief w 
 and y" series may be enlarged in a peculiar way to indi- 
 cate the addition of other word-signs of the same series, 
 the joining of which by customary phrasing methods would 
 be in some cases extremely inconvenient, and in others ab- 
 solutely impracticable. Thus, according to the Graham 
 
 system, we may write with you : .............. instead of .... ........... o.. 
 
you were 
 
 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 0.,... instead of ........ ^ ..... c ..... , what you 
 
 instead of o . In view of the fact that for many 
 
 years this method of phrase abbreviation has been practised 
 by a large body of Graham writers, with (as they testify) 
 very satisfactory results, and inasmuch as no other satisfac- 
 tory expedient for meeting this urgent stenographic need 
 has been introduced, or, so far as the author knows, even 
 suggested, there seems to be no reason why writers of non- 
 LrrahiimiKtic systems should not accept this device, at least 
 upon trial, as a promising innovation. Hence the cases 
 in which it appears to be highly useful are here explained. 
 
 305. We may be enlarged to indicate the addition of 
 would; and would may be enlarged to indicate the addition 
 
 <Z 
 of we. Illustrations: we would , would we . 3.... ., 
 
 Though the ordinary sign for we is by careful writers par- 
 tially thickened, the curve of the enlarged we is not usually 
 thickened, because reporters find that the thickening is 
 rarely or never necessary for the sake of verbal distinction. 
 All the word-signs of this series are, when enlarged, not 
 only widened but lengthened, thus taking somewhat the 
 form of a horse-shoe. As Mr. Graham has remarked, "the 
 horse-shoe is the ideal form or pattern of the enlarged brief 
 way or yay." 
 
 EXERCISE ON "WE WOULD*' AND "WOULD WE." 
 
 306. In the following phrases, we would is to be writ- 
 ten with enlarged we, in "horseshoe" form, and without 
 any thickening of th curve: 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 165 
 
 I know we would we would have 
 
 if we would we would judge 
 
 we would we would justify 
 
 we would attempt we would justly 
 
 we would call we woulft take 
 
 we would choose we would think 
 
 we would deny we would want 
 
 we would discharge we would wonder 
 
 we would dismiss when we would 
 we would do something whenever we would 
 
 we would find where we would 
 
 307. In the following phrases, would ice is to be writ- 
 ten with the enlarged would: 
 
 would we would we never 
 
 would we ask would we now 
 
 would we answer would we pay 
 
 would we awake would we say 
 
 would we be would we take 
 
 would we go would we waste 
 
 EXERCISE ON "WHAT WE" AND "WHAT WERE." 
 
 308. What may be enlarged to add we or were. Illus- 
 
 I , what we ask ) ........ 
 
 trations: what we do 1 , tvhat we ask 
 
 accordance with these examples, write the following 
 
 phrases : 
 
 what we what we take 
 what we are (are down- what were 
 
 ward) what were necessary 
 
 what we ask what were never 
 
 what we can what were not 
 
 what we do what were obtained 
 
 what we make what were remaining 
 
 what we may what were supposed 
 
 what we say what were taken 
 
166 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 EXERCISE ON "YOU WERE" AND "YOU WOULD." 
 
 309. You may be enlarged to add were or would, as in 
 
 the phrases you were ready ...Q/..L, you would go ....... Q _ . 
 
 In accordance with these examples, write the following 
 phrases: 
 
 you were you would get 
 
 you were always you would go 
 
 you were among them you would keep 
 
 you were going you would make 
 
 you were mistaken you would rather 
 
 you were rather you would receive 
 
 you were received you would render 
 
 you were receiving you would respect 
 
 you would acknowledge you would therefore 
 
 you would carry you would write 
 
 you would come you would wrong 
 
 310. In order to facilitate phrasing by avoiding awk- 
 ward junctions, you were and you would may, when conve- 
 nient, be expressed by the enlarged you inverted, as in the 
 
 phrases when you ivere ....... ........... and you ivould be A<V..._. . 
 
 In the following pnrases you were and you would are to be 
 thus expressed: 
 
 you were admitted you would admit 
 
 you were going you would attempt 
 
 you were forced you would deny 
 
 you were indisposed you would discuss 
 
 you were interested you would endeavor 
 
 you were known you would never 
 
 you were never you would not 
 
 you were not you would observe 
 
 you were observed you would possess 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 167 
 
 311. The enlarged forms of with, were, what and- would 
 may be written in an oblique direction (corresponding with 
 the inclination of the consonant chay or ray) to indicate 
 
 the addition of you. Illustrations: icith you ........... , were 
 
 -9 
 you .C- , ichat you , would you, "2. ... 
 
 In accordance with these examples, write the following 
 exercises: 
 
 with you what you ask 
 
 agree with you what you give 
 
 go with you what you make 
 
 reason with you what you may 
 
 speak with you what you obtain 
 
 take with you what you say 
 
 talk with you would you 
 
 were you would you ask 
 
 were you. engaged would you be 
 
 were you interested would you go 
 
 were you never would you rather 
 
 were you not would you receive 
 
 were you thinking would you retain 
 
 what you would you write 
 
 312. As you, for convenience of phrasing, may be used 
 for your, so with you may be used for icith your; were 
 you for were your; what you for ivhat your; would you 
 for icould your. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 with your information were your necessities 
 
 with your necessities were your objections 
 
 with your objections .were your visits 
 
 with your testimony what your life 
 
 were your demands what your many 
 
168 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 what your mistakes would your money 
 
 would your mos(t) impor- would your reckons 
 tant would your receipts 
 
 313. Where two word-signs of the "brief icay and yay" 
 series can be conveniently phrased in the ordinary method, 
 the enlarged forms need not be resorted to. Thus we may write 
 
 ice were were ice ...., , what icould 
 
 would we .....3.... * This arrangement makes several of the 
 
 enlarged characters more readily legible by reducing the 
 number of phrases which they represent. In accordance 
 with these examples, write the following exercise: 
 we were chosen what would be 
 
 we were decided what would never 
 
 we were doing what would not 
 
 we were then what would not be 
 
 we were thinking what would .not do 
 
 were we chosen would we ask 
 
 were we decided would we be 
 
 were we doing would we go 
 
 were we then would we make 
 
 were we thinking would we say 
 
 314. The student who wishes to have at his command 
 the methods herein explained of indicating, instead of writ- 
 ing, some of the most common word-signs of the "brief way 
 and yay" series, should not pass from the lessons thereon 
 until he can write without hesitation the following 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 agree with you what you say 
 
 reason with you when you were 
 
 *(See Paragraphs 288-9.) 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 169 
 
 we would judge when you would be 
 
 we would think would you go 
 
 were you never would you expect 
 
 were you not you were always 
 
 what we expect you were disposed 
 
 what were essential you were receiving 
 
 what were remaining you would receive 
 
 what you make you would take 
 
 QUASI "E" HOOK FOR "YOU." 
 
 314 V&. As a contra-normal expedient, you, according to 
 the Graham system, may be joined in certain phrases in 
 such a way that it resembles the r hook. Illustrations: 
 
 you say ., ,{\... , you shall f ..., you do, or you had A 
 
 -V 
 
 you ask ^ , do you say k . At the beginning 
 
 of a phrase, you, thus written, is distinguished from the r 
 hook by the fact that the phrase begins on the line; whereas 
 an r hook at the beginning of a consonant stroke (as in 
 the word sign during) would be half a stroke above the line. 
 Where no distinction by position exists, the context is sup- 
 posed to be a sufficient distinction, because, when in- 
 troduced as part of a sentence, the phrase, if read other- 
 wise than intended, would not "make sense." Such phrases 
 as do you say, if you be, you ask, etc., are very frequent 
 in testimony, and this irregular method of writing them, it 
 is claimed, is excused by the gain in speed, and by the fact 
 that the apparent ambiguity does not entail in practice any 
 real difficulty in reading. While the author of this book 
 believes that in a number of these phrases, especially such 
 phrases as you do and you had, a perfectly easy and un- 
 ambiguous representation of you may be obtained by invert- 
 ing the word-sign in the manner already explained (see 
 
170 "BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 Paragraphs 298-9), he submits for the benefit of Graham 
 writers, the following exercise, in which the r hook, as it 
 would strictly be considered, is, by "reporting license," 
 treated as the sign you. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 did you ask so you shall be 
 
 did you ask that you ask 
 
 did you ask tnem you ask this 
 
 did you ask your you do 
 
 did you do you do something 
 
 did you say you do many 
 
 did you say something you had 
 
 did you say there was you had many 
 
 (there expressed by you had occasion 
 
 doubling) you had received 
 
 did you say they are ready you say 
 
 (they are expressed by you say nothing 
 
 doubling) you say so 
 
 did you see (vocalize see) you say so little 
 
 did you see many you say something 
 
 did you see as many you see (vocalize see) 
 
 did you see some reason you see many 
 
 did you see something you see something 
 
 do you say you shall 
 
 do you say some other you shall be 
 
 do you see (vocalize see) you shall have 
 
 if you ask you shall not 
 
 if you be you shall receive 
 
 if you do what did you say 
 
 if you shall be what did you see (vocalize 
 may you ask see) 
 
 may you do what do you ask 
 
 mus(t) you ask what do you do 
 
 mus(t) you do what do you say 
 
 mus(t) you say what do you see (vocalize 
 so you do see) 
 
"BRIEF W AND Y" WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 171 
 
 when did you say 
 
 when did you see (vocalize 
 
 see) 
 
 where did you say 
 where did you see (vocalize 
 
 see) 
 where do you say 
 
 which you do 
 
 which you say 
 
 which you see (vocalize see) 
 
 will you be 
 
 will you do 
 
 why you ask 
 
 why you do 
 
 where do you see (vocalize why you had 
 
 see) 
 
 why you shall be 
 
CHAPTER XII. 
 
 PROXIMITY. 
 
 315. The bringing of words or parts of words close to- 
 gether, but without joining, for the purpose of indicating 
 omitted words or parts of words, is called "proximity;" and 
 the words or parts of words thus brought together may be 
 said to be "approximated." 
 
 316. "Proximity" being a stenographic expedient a 
 method of expressing omitted words or parts of words by 
 some variation from the ordinary method of writing the 
 omitted words or parts of words are said to be "indicated," 
 while, if they are to be supplied merely by sense or context, 
 they are said to be "implied." 
 
 "OF THE." 
 
 317. One common use of proximity is to indicate the 
 very frequent connecting clause of the. Generally these 
 two words need not be written, their omission being indi- 
 cated by placing in closer proximity than usual the words 
 between which the clause of the occurs. Illustrations: 
 
 branch of the subject -W^- > reason of the delay 
 
 WHEN "OF THE" CANNOT BE INDICATED. 
 
 318. (a.) If the clause of the follows a period or any 
 other distinct pause, it cannot be indicated by proximity, 
 "because of the fundamental rule that words separated by a 
 distinct pause cannot be brought together in a phrase. 
 
 See note at end of chapter. 
 
PROXIMITY. 173 
 
 319. (b.) If the word preceding the expression of the 
 is written at the end of a line, so that the word following 
 of the begins the next line, proximity is, of course, impracti- 
 cable, and of the must be written, not indicated. 
 
 320. (c.) Of the cannot safely be indicated by proxim- 
 ity when either of the words between which the phrase oc- 
 curs is written with a vowel logogram, as such a sign placed 
 close to a consonant stroke is apt to be mistaken for some 
 ordinary vowel modifying the consonant stroke. For in- 
 stance, the expressions disease of the eye, all of the advan- 
 tages, two' of the jury, who of the few would not be intelli- 
 gible if proximity were resorted to for expressing of the. 
 
 321. (d) Proximity cannot be resorted to if the words 
 between which of the occurs are widely separated by dif- 
 ference of position. For this reason, such a phrase as 
 
 _0 
 
 hand of the gods .... , would not be a good phrase. 
 
 \^ 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 322. In the following phrases, of the is to be indicated 
 by proximity: 
 
 account of the sales difficulty of the task 
 
 advantage of the plan door of the house 
 
 attack of the foe elevation of the masses 
 
 business of the firm end of the story 
 
 cause of the delay exercise of the lungs 
 
 cause of the people expenses of the trip 
 
 choice of the assembly expiration of the office 
 
 close of the day fading of the flower 
 
 condition of the country fear of the injury 
 
 constitution of the county friends of the government 
 
 ooat of the machine gentlemen of the profession 
 
 day of the week importance of the informa- 
 decision of the question tion 
 
 defence of the coast influence of the teacher 
 
 defence of the prisoner kingdom of the Lord 
 
174 
 
 PROXIMITY. 
 
 leaves of the trees 
 life of the members 
 love of the truth 
 love of the world 
 mate of the vessel 
 motions of the arms 
 movements of the planets 
 name of the person 
 nature of the subject 
 object of the invention 
 officer of the army 
 order of the chief 
 origin of the humble 
 pages of the book 
 point of the joke 
 policy of the department 
 presence of the ladies 
 
 principal of the academy 
 professors of the college 
 reason of the thing 
 result of the visit 
 revenue of the government 
 revision of the laws 
 song of the lover 
 strength of the engine 
 study of the languages 
 subject of the letter 
 title of the book 
 tone of the voice 
 verdict of the jury 
 window of the office 
 words of the sentence 
 work of the people 
 worthy of the nation 
 
 EXFRCISE. 
 
 323. In the following cases, of the is to be expressed by 
 the two ticks joined, in order to avoid writing a vowel word- 
 sign in ambiguous proximity to a word outline: 
 
 *all of the advantages 
 all of the generals 
 all of the judges 
 all of the laws 
 all of the life 
 all of the reasons 
 all of the thinking 
 awe of the law 
 better of the two 
 
 condition of the eye 
 disease of the eye 
 eye of the patriot 
 larger of the two 
 two of the jurors 
 two of the letters 
 we of the legion 
 what of the rest 
 who of the few 
 
 FROM-TO. 
 
 324. In such expressions as from time to time, from 
 place to place, etc., the words from and to may be omitted 
 
 *Many Graham writers express all o/by adding to all the/-v hook, to 
 which, in the case acre given, the tick would be added for he. 
 
PROXIMITY. 175 
 
 and their omission indicated by writing close together (or 
 in proximity) the forms of the repeated word. Illustra- 
 tions: from time to time , from place to place 
 
 The peculiar form of the language the duplica- 
 tion of the leading word of the phrase removes all danger 
 that proximity, as used in this case, may be understood as 
 indicating of the. Such expressions as time of the time, 
 place of the place, would not "make sense." 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 325. According to the instructions just given, write the 
 following: 
 
 from church to church from mountain to mountain 
 
 from city to city from mouth to mouth 
 
 from day to day from nation to nation 
 
 from door to door from night to night 
 
 from end to end from ocean to ocean 
 
 from hour to hour from point to point 
 
 from house to house from side to side 
 
 from man to man from tower to tower 
 
 from moment to moment from town to town 
 
 from month to month from valley to valley 
 
 326. When phrases of this class become very familiar, 
 the two forms of the repeated word may be written without 
 lifting the pen, from and to being still omitted. Illustra- 
 tions: from generation to generation y , from place 
 
 to place \*. In such cases "ellipsis" takes the ylace 
 
 of "proximity;" "indication" becomes "implication." 
 
176 PROXIMITY. 
 
 "OF" EXPRESSED BY PROXIMITY. 
 
 327. In some special cases proximity indicates merely 
 the omission of of, as in the phrase kingdom of God. In the 
 Graham system of is very frequently thus indicated. 
 
 OB "COM" EXPRESSED BY PROXIMITY. 
 
 328. When a word beginning with con or com occurs 
 in the midst of a phrase, the dot ordinarily used to express 
 these prefixes may be omitted and its absence supplied by 
 writing the remainder of the word close to and, if conve- 
 nient, underneath the last stroke of the preceding word. 
 
 Illustrations: you must confess .../vrpa , in conjunction. 
 
 . The position underneath, rather than alongside 
 
 of, the preceding stroke, will avoid the possibility of con- 
 flict between con-m and of the, both being expressed by prox- 
 imity. Thus, many confessions .C^v^y. and common 
 
 consent are better than ../r~. x^.^SJJ... and .. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 329. In the following phrases, con or com is to be ex- 
 pressed by proximity: 
 
 another (con)jecture by (com)pulsion 
 
 another (con)tention daily (com) fort 
 
 another (con)tinent daily (con) duct 
 
 by (com)parison dark (com)plexion 
 
PROXIMITY. 
 
 177 
 
 I am (com)pelled 
 
 I am (com) plaining 
 
 I am (con)fident 
 
 I am (con) scions 
 
 I am (coil) tent 
 
 I may (com) plain 
 
 I may (con)fess 
 
 important (con) cession 
 
 important (con) vocation 
 
 in (com) petition 
 
 in (con) elusion 
 
 in (con) junction 
 
 in ( connection 
 
 in "(con) tempt 
 
 in ( contemplation 
 
 in the (com) position 
 
 in the (con)ference 
 
 just (com) plaint 
 
 just (con)demnation 
 many ( com ) plaints 
 many (com) plications 
 my (com) position 
 my ( conception 
 my ( con ) dcmnation 
 my (con)jecture 
 my (con) science 
 my (con)tention 
 my (con) test 
 my (con)trol 
 no (com) petition 
 no ( conception 
 no (con)cern 
 no (con)trol 
 some (com) promise 
 some (con)ception 
 some compassion 
 
 "CON" OB "COM" IMPLIED. 
 
 330. If the word beginning with con or com is, when 
 standing alone, written habitually without the initial dot, 
 the con or com need not be indicated in a phrase; the ordi- 
 nary outline may be freely joined to the preceding word. 
 Strictly speaking, this is a case, not of 'proximity," but 
 of "implication."* 
 
 "A CON," "AND COM," ETC. 
 
 331. The initial a tick, disjoined, may be written (either 
 perpendicularly or horizontally, according to convenience), 
 in the place ordinarily occupied by the con dot, to express 
 a con, a com, and con or and com. Illustrations: a con- 
 
 temptible U* , a contention l^^ ....... o connection 
 
 *See Paragraph 126. 
 
178 PROXIMITY. 
 
 t .,| 3...,. and connected ., As already explained, 
 
 the word following the initial a tick is always written in 
 its normal place, and the position of the tick is accommo- 
 
 dated thereto. Thus we write and confine 
 
 -I ....... 
 
 332. Of the two allowable directions of the a tick, that 
 one should be chosen, as shown in the preceding examples., 
 which varies most from the direction of the stroke to 
 which it is prefixed. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 333. In the following phrases, a con, a com, and con or 
 and com should be expressed by a horizontal tick, dis- 
 joined: 
 
 a (com)batant a (com) plaint 
 
 a (com)edy a (com)plex 
 
 a (com)fortable a ( complexity 
 
 a (comm)ittee a (com) plication 
 
 a (comm)itment a (com)plicity 
 
 a (comm)odity a (com)ponent 
 
 a (comm)utation a (com)posite 
 
 a (com) pact a (com) position 
 
 a (com)panion a (ccm) pound 
 
 a (com)parison a (comprehension 
 
 a (com) patriot a (com)prehensive 
 
 a (com)pendium a (com)pression 
 
 a (com) petition a (com) promise 
 
 a ( competitor a (con)ceit 
 
 a ( com ) pilation a ( conception 
 
PROXIMITY. 
 
 179 
 
 a (con)demnation 
 a (con)demned 
 a (con)densation 
 a (con)densed 
 a ( condescension 
 a (con)ductor 
 a ( connection 
 a (con) federate 
 a (con)fessed 
 a (con)fession 
 a (con)fldent 
 a (con)fidential 
 a (con) fined 
 a ( confiscation 
 a (con)flict 
 a ( conjecture 
 a (con) jugation 
 a (con) junction 
 a (con) science 
 a (con) scions 
 a ( consciousness 
 a ( conspiracy 
 a (con)stancy 
 a (con)straint 
 a (con) tact 
 a (con)tagion 
 a (con)tagious 
 a ( con)templation 
 a (con) temporary 
 a (con)tention 
 a (con) solation 
 a (con) test 
 a (con)tinued 
 a (con)tinent 
 * a (con) tract 
 a (con) traction 
 a (con) tractor 
 
 a (con)trast 
 a (con)trary 
 a ( con)trivance 
 a ( convergence 
 a (con) version 
 a (con) vert 
 a (con) vex 
 a (con)vexity 
 a ( conveyance 
 a (con)vict 
 a (con) vocation 
 and (com) passion 
 and (com) pel 
 and (com)pensate 
 and (com)plete 
 and (com) pile 
 and (com) plain 
 and (com)plex 
 and (com) plicate 
 and (com) plicity 
 and (com)posedly 
 and (com) promise 
 and (con) cede 
 and (con)cise 
 and (con)demn 
 and (con) dense 
 and (con) descend 
 and (con) duct 
 and (con)fess 
 and ( con ) f essed 
 and ( confidence 
 and (con) fine 
 and ( confiscate 
 and ( conflict 
 and ( conjecture 
 and (con) join 
 and ( con)scious 
 
180 PROXIMITY. 
 
 and (con) spire and (con) tract 
 
 and (con) strain and (con)trary 
 
 and (con)straint and (con)trast 
 
 and (con)tagious and (con) verge 
 
 and (con) tain and (con) verse 
 
 and (con)taminate and (con)vey 
 
 and (con) template and (con)vict 
 
 and (con) tend and (con)vince 
 
 and (con) test and (con)voke . 
 
 334. In the following phrases a con, a com, and con or 
 and com should be expressed by a perpendicular tick dis- 
 joined: 
 
 a (comm)and a (con)gregation 
 
 a (comm)ander a ( connection 
 
 a (comm)encement a (con) quest 
 
 a (comm)endation a (con)secration 
 
 a (comm)ensurate a (con)sensus 
 
 a (comm)ent a (con) sonant 
 
 a (comm)entary a (con) summation 
 
 a (con) cave and (comm)and 
 
 a ( concentration and (comm)ence 
 
 a (con) clave and (comm)ent 
 
 a (con) elusion and (con) cave 
 
 a (con) elusive and ( con ) centrate 
 
 a ( concordance and (con) cur 
 
 a (con) course and (con)gratulate 
 
 a (con) crete and (con)gregate 
 
 a ( concurrence and (conn)nect 
 
 a (con)cussion and (con)quer 
 
 a ( congratulation and (con)secrate 
 
 "i CON," "HE CON," ETC. 
 
 335. By a logical extension of the principle followed in 
 the expression of a con, and con, etc., we may write I, he, is, 
 his, as, has in the place of the "con dot" to express I con or 
 I com, he con or he com, is con or is com, his con or his com, 
 
PROXIMITY. 181 
 
 as con or as com, has con or has com. Illustrations: I con' 
 
 
 tend , he commences....- .AjX- , is continued ....... i^,.... 
 
 as connected or Tias connected QT 
 
 .* In these cases 
 
 the prefixed sign retains its ordinary position. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 336. In accordance with the instruction just given, 
 write the following: 
 
 fas (com)pelled 
 (has (com)pelled 
 I as (com) posed 
 I has (com) posed 
 ( as (con)curred 
 ) has (con)curred 
 ras (con)demned 
 "^has (con)demned 
 , as (con) ducted 
 -\ has (con) ducted 
 /-as (con)fessed 
 I has (con)fessed 
 /as (con)veyed 
 "j has (con)veyed 
 /as (con)victed 
 "i has (con)victed 
 /as (con)tained 
 .has (con)tained 
 (as (comm)anded 
 "] has ( comm ) anded 
 jas (comm)enced 
 I has (comm)enced 
 
 ( as (con) eluded 
 ( has (con) eluded 
 he (com) pels 
 he (com) poses 
 he (com)prehends 
 he (com) prises 
 he (con) cedes 
 he (con) curs 
 he (con)demns 
 he (con) ducts 
 he (con)fesses 
 he (con) tests 
 he (con)yeys 
 he (con)victs 
 his (com)pany 
 his (com)pilation 
 his (com)plexion 
 his (com) plication 
 his ( complicity 
 his (com) prehension 
 his (com) promise 
 his (con)demnation 
 
 *The use of the circle in this way does not entail any danger of con 
 flict with the prefix self-con. 
 
182 
 
 PROXIMITY. 
 
 his (con) duct 
 
 his (con)fession 
 
 his (con) tempt 
 
 his (con) test 
 
 his (con)trol 
 
 his (con)viction 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I (con) cur 
 
 (con)demn 
 (con) duct 
 (con)fess 
 
 I (con)jecture 
 
 I (con) test 
 I (con)vey 
 I (con)vict 
 is (com)pelled 
 is (com) plicated 
 is (com) posed 
 is (com)prehended 
 is (com) prised 
 is (con)cealed 
 is (con)demned 
 is (con) ducted 
 is (con)fessed 
 is (con) tested 
 is (con)veyed 
 is (con)victed 
 
 PREFIXES IN* THE MIDST OF PHRASES. 
 
 337. Any word which, as ordinarily written, has a dis- 
 joined prefix (such as incompetent, recognize, etc.), 
 takes in a phrase its ordinary form, the prefix 
 being joined, if convenient, to the preceding word, if 
 
 there be one. Illustrations: we are incompetent, 
 
 you may recognize ,. r >rrT.v / ^r 5> .... The prefix may be modified 
 
 by an initial hook or circle to express in whole or 
 in part a preceding word. Illustrations: we magnify 
 
 ...IX... 
 
 we may accompany- 
 
 , it is incon- 
 
 *Phrases introducing accom cannot be written by Graham wtiters in 
 the way here indicated, as they express this prefix bj( a heavyytlot, not 
 by the k stroke, as Pitman writers do. 
 
PROXIMITY. 
 
 183 
 
 ceivable 
 
 we recognize .................... , in recognition 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 338. In the following phrases the prefixes are indicated 
 by italics: 
 
 did you recognize 
 
 did you recommend 
 
 do you accomplish 
 
 do you contradict 
 
 do you recognize 
 
 do you recommend 
 
 if incompatible 
 
 if we recommend 
 
 in contradistinction 
 
 in controversy 
 
 in his incomprehensible 
 
 in his uncompromising 
 
 in order (to) accommodate 
 
 in order (to) accomplish 
 
 in order to magnify 
 
 in order to recognize 
 
 in order to recommend 
 
 in my recognition 
 
 in the accompanying 
 
 in their incompetence 
 
 it is accomplished 
 
 it is incomplete 
 
 it is inconceivable 
 
 it is not accompanied 
 
 may be recognized 
 
 mus(t) magnify 
 
 mus(t) recompense 
 
 my misconduct 
 
 our recompense 
 
 public recognition 
 
 these disconnected reasons 
 
 we magnify 
 
 we may accompany 
 
 we may magnify 
 
 we may reconcile 
 
 we recognize 
 
 we recommend 
 
 we might accomplish 
 
 when we recognize 
 
 with recommendations 
 
 you may recommend 
 
 you may reconcile 
 
 "ING A," ''ING THE," ETC. 
 
 339. When a word having the participial termination 
 ing is immediately followed by a, an or and, the a tick (per- 
 pendicular or horizontal, according to convenience), may 
 
184 PROXIMITY. 
 
 be written in the place of the ing dot to express ing a, ing 
 an or ing and. Of the two allowable directions of the tick, 
 that one is to be chosen which varies most from the direc- 
 tion of the stroKe to which it is appended. Illustrations: giv- 
 
 ing a .................. , doing a_.,,l.._.,, loving a .../ ..... >-<. losing a 
 
 340. The termination ing the may be expressed by writ- 
 ing, in place of the ing aot, the the tick disjoined. This 
 tick is struck in the direction of either p or chay, that di- 
 rection being preferred which varies most from the direc- 
 tion of the stroke to whicu it is appended. Illustrations: 
 
 giving the ...= doing the J, t i ov i ng th 
 
 losing the ..../r$>.... . 
 
 341. In the following phrases, ing a or ing the is to be 
 written by the a or the tick, detached, the a tick being made 
 perpendicular: 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 becoming a correcting the 
 
 becoming the costing a 
 
 begging a costing the 
 
 begging the drinking a 
 
 calling a drinking the 
 
 calling the forsaking a 
 
 conducting a forsaking the 
 
 conducting the gaining a 
 
 correcting a gaining the 
 
PROXIMITY. 
 
 185 
 
 giving a 
 giving the 
 having a 
 having the 
 investing a 
 investing the 
 leaving a 
 leaving the 
 losing a 
 losing the 
 missing a 
 
 342. In the following 
 curs, is to be written with' 
 acknowledging a 
 acknowledging the 
 admiring a 
 admiring the 
 choosing a 
 choosing the 
 committing a 
 committing the 
 ( concerning a 
 ( concerning the 
 considering a 
 considering the 
 contesting a 
 contesting the 
 destroying a 
 destroying the 
 dividing a 
 dividing the 
 doing a 
 doing the 
 embracing a 
 embracing the 
 enjoying a 
 enjoying the 
 
 missing the 
 refusing a 
 refusing the 
 sinking a 
 sinking the 
 smoking a 
 smoking the 
 striking a 
 striking the 
 taking a 
 taking the 
 
 phrases, ing a, where it oc- 
 the detached tick (horizontal); 
 exposing a 
 exposing the 
 expressing a 
 expressing the 
 obliging a 
 obliging the 
 observing a 
 observing the 
 producing a 
 producing the 
 reducing a 
 reducing the 
 representing a 
 representing the 
 reversing a 
 reversing the 
 suggesting a 
 suggesting the 
 thinking a 
 thinking the 
 trying a 
 trying the 
 weighing a 
 weighing the 
 
186 PROXIMITY. 
 
 THE TERMINATION "ING THERE." 
 
 343. When there or their immediately follows a word 
 having the participial termination ing, a disjoined there 
 tick (in the direction of either b or ;') may be written in 
 the place of the ing dot to express ing there or ing their. 
 Of the two possible directions for the tick, that one should 
 be chosen which varies most from the direction of the pre- 
 
 ceding stroke. Illustrations: loving their ...(......S*/.... , raising 
 
 their ....^.. ....... , paying their .....>s^ ..... , choosing their 
 
 _ ........ / . This heavy tick for there or their is sanctioned 
 
 by Graham, not by Pitman. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 344. In the following exercise the detacued tick for 
 ing there or ing their is to be written in the direction 
 of b: 
 
 acknowledging their observing their 
 
 approaching their pledging their 
 
 beseeching their preaching their 
 
 burning their raising their 
 
 enjoying their rejoining their 
 
 enriching their resigning their 
 
 fetching their running their 
 
 imagining their searching their 
 
 knowing their silencing their 
 
 loaning their signing their 
 
 losing their suggesting their 
 
 maligning their turning their 
 
 matching their urging their 
 
PROXIMITY. 187 
 
 345. In the following phrases, the detached tick for 
 ing there or ing their is to be written in the direction of ;': 
 
 abusing their expressing their 
 
 becoming their forsaking their 
 
 begging their giving their 
 
 causing their having their 
 
 committing their investing their 
 
 ( concerning their having their 
 
 (con) sidering their missing their 
 
 costing their passing their 
 
 destroying their inducing their 
 
 devoting their representing their 
 
 doing their striking their 
 
 embracing their taking their 
 
 exposing their testing their 
 
 346. Where the termination ing may be more conven- 
 iently written by the consonant stroke than by the ing 
 dot, ing their may be expressed by making the ing stroke 
 double length. (See Paragraphs 405, 407.) 
 
 THE TERMINATION "ING HIS" OR "ING US." 
 
 347. A disjoined circle may be written in the place of 
 the ing dot to express ing his or ing us. Illustrations: tak- 
 
 ~..\ __ , 
 
 ing his or taking us ~.. __ , loving his or loving us .. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 348. In the following phrases, ing his or ing us is to 
 be expressed by the detached circle: 
 
 \ acknowledging his I concerning his 
 
 I acknowledging us / concerning us 
 
 \ begging his j considering his 
 
 I begging us 1 considering us 
 
 j calling his j doing his 
 
 1 calling us ( doing us 
 
188 PROXIMITY. 
 
 j dividing his j missing his, 
 
 I dividing us / missing us 
 
 j embracing his \ observing his 
 
 \ embracing us ! observing us 
 
 | enjoying his j reducing his 
 
 1 enjoying us ' reducing us 
 
 j exposing us _* reversing his 
 
 1 exposing his I reversing us 
 
 j giving his j serving his 
 
 I giving us ( serving us 
 
 I having his i striking his 
 
 1 having us I striking us 
 j losing his . j taking his 
 
 ( losing us / taking us 
 
 j loving his j thinking his 
 
 ( loving us "j thinking us 
 
 PROXIMITY IN SPECIAL PHRASES. 
 
 349. Sometimes a "special phrase" is not written by a 
 continuous movement, but is broken by lifting the pen, the 
 two parts being written in proximity. In such cases "prox- 
 imity" serves the purpose simply of showing that the two 
 parts of the phrase are not to be read as separate words. 
 
CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 "WILL" OR "ALL" EXPRESSED BY THE "L" HOOK. 
 
 350. The I hook, prefixed to a single consonant stroke, 
 such as each, which, much, they, adds will or all. Illustra- 
 
 tions: it will 1 , which will ......../. , each will 
 
 <L 
 
 much will. -f 1 - > the y wiu ..V , if att , , &2/ all 
 
 \ 
 
 ,atall. P r ,inall- - The context in 
 
 most cases readily suggests whether the word added by the 
 hook is ivill or all. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 351. In the following phrases, will is to be represented 
 by the I hook: 
 
 each will it will always 
 
 each will be it will be 
 
 each will make it will bring 
 
 each will perhaps it will be seen 
 
 each will receive it will be observed 
 
 each vrill suppose it will be remembered 
 
 each will therefore it will be said 
 
 it will it will be seen 
 
 it will also it will certainly 
 
190 "WILL" OR "ALL" EXPRESSED BY "L" HOOK. 
 
 it will make they will mention 
 
 it will only they will remember 
 
 it will perhaps they will soon be 
 
 it will probably they will submit 
 
 it will sometimes they will think 
 
 it will therefore they will wonder 
 
 it will very soon which will 
 
 much will which will be 
 
 much will be which will be sent 
 
 much will be read which will be such 
 
 much will be received which will become 
 
 much will be retained which will bring 
 
 much will become which will embrace 
 
 much will go which will make 
 
 much will make which will mos (t) ly 
 
 they will which will never 
 
 they will decide which will render 
 
 they will do which will therefore 
 
 they will make which will very soon 
 
 352. In the following phrases, all is represented by the 
 Z hook: 
 
 at all for all this 
 
 at all reasonable for all your 
 
 at all risk if all 
 
 by all if all people 
 
 by all labor if all that is 
 
 by all means if all these (vocalize these) 
 
 by all measures if all this 
 
 by all people if all this is 
 
 by all persons if all those 
 
 by all present if all your 
 
 by all such if all we do 
 
 for all in all 
 
 for all people in all cases 
 
 for all places in all circumstances 
 
 for all they in all (con)ditiona 
 
"WILL" OR "ALL" EXPRESSED BY "L" HOOK. 191 
 
 in all he is in all that he may 
 
 in all his business in all the 
 
 in all of his in all these (I. D.) 
 
 in all places in all they 
 
 in all stations in all those (I. D.) 
 
 in all such cases in all we have 
 
 in all such places in all which is 
 
 354. Will may be added to such by combining the in- 
 
 /* 
 
 itial circle with the I hook, thus: such will- *> . 
 
 x 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 355. Write the following: 
 
 such will such will recognize 
 
 such will be such will render 
 
 such will become such will reply 
 
 such will (con)sider such will require 
 
 such will make such will respect 
 
 such will never such will sometimes 
 
 such will receive such will soon 
 
 356. A stroke to which I hook is prefixed for the pur- 
 pose of adding will or all may not only be written at the 
 beginning of a phrase, as already illustrated, but may be 
 added to a preceding stroke, provided it does not cause an 
 awkward junction (as in the phrase 7 know it will) or 
 
 tend to illegibility. Illustrations: 1 hope it will,,?., 
 whether they will 
 
192 "WILL" OR "ALL" EXPRESSED BY "L" HOOK. 
 
 357. Write the following: 
 
 I hope it will 
 
 I hope it will be 
 
 I hope it will soon be 
 
 I hope they will 
 
 in which they will 
 
 I think it will 
 
 I think it will make 
 
 I trus(t) it will be - ^ 
 
 I trus(t) it will make 
 I trus(t) they will 
 whether it will 
 whether it will be 
 whether it will make 
 whether it will receive 
 whether they will 
 whether they will make 
 
 (For Mr. Graham's method of expressing aZZ or will by 
 enlarging Ian r hook, see Paragraphs 374-5.) 
 
 " FOLLOWING "OF" OB "WITH." 
 
 358. Treating 
 
 ...as a "fictitious primitive" for of, 
 
 and as a "fictitious primitive" for with, we obtain 
 
 c r 
 
 V_ . and with all \ 
 
 the useful phrases of all 
 
 , and with all 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 359. 
 
 Write the following; 
 
 *of all 
 of all a 
 of all his 
 of all such 
 of all such cases 
 of all such persons 
 of all that 
 of all the 
 of all these (vocalize tJiese) 
 
 of all they 
 
 of all those 
 
 of all we do 
 
 of all which 
 
 with all 
 
 with all his 
 
 with all my reasons 
 
 with all such 
 
 with all such cases 
 
 Graham writers may prefer to write of all by prefixing the I hook to- 
 i of tick. 
 
"WILL" OR "ALL" EXPRESSED BY "L" HOOK. 193 
 
 with all such persons with all they 
 
 with all that with all those 
 
 with all the with all we do 
 
 with all these (vocalize with all which 
 
 these) with all your 
 
 360. The use of the I hook in thejGLcaJiaBi-systfim to 
 affix will or all to the tick word-signs has been already ex- 
 plained. (See Paragraphs 234-5.) 
 
 361. The careful and conservative writer will scarcely 
 apply the I hook as the representative of will or all to other 
 strokes than those given in the exercises of this chapter. 
 If the student should use this expedient promiscuously or 
 to excess for instance, if he should write the I hook for 
 will in such phrases as country will or day will illegibility 
 would certainly be the result. 
 
CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 THE "R" HOOK. 
 
 'ARE" EXPRESSED BY THE "R" HOOK. 
 
 362. By combining the r hook with the consonant 
 strokes ivhich, sucli and they, we may add are. Illustra- 
 
 tions: which are 
 
 L. 
 
 they are / , such are. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 L 
 
 363. In the following phrases, are is to be represented 
 by the r hook: 
 
 such are 
 
 such are said (to) be 
 
 such are the 
 
 such are the (con)ditions 
 
 they are 
 
 they are also 
 
 they are always 
 
 they are among the 
 
 they are certain 
 
 they are known 
 
 they are no more 
 
 they are not 
 
 they are now 
 
 they are ready 
 
 they are right 
 
 they are sometimes 
 they are (w) ell-known 
 which are 
 which are again 
 which are also 
 which are better 
 which are good 
 which are likely 
 which are made 
 which are meant 
 which are necessary 
 which are ready 
 which are sent 
 which are subject 
 which are supposed 
 
THE "R" HOOK. 
 
 195 
 
 THE "R" HOOK FOR ''OUR.'' 
 
 364. To a few stroke word-signs at, for, in, which, by, 
 and possibly some others our is added by prefixing the r 
 
 hook. Illustrations: at our. 
 
 , by our 
 
 \ 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 365. In the following phrases, our is to be expressed 
 by the r hook: 
 
 at our church 
 at our expense 
 at our many 
 at our mos(t) important 
 at our pleasure 
 at our reception 
 at our refusal 
 at our reply 
 at our request 
 at our respectful 
 by our 
 
 by our custom 
 by our excellent 
 by our friends 
 'by our judgment 
 by our leave 
 by our legislation 
 by our legislature 
 by our many 
 by our mentioning 
 by our mistake 
 by our permission 
 
 by our promises 
 
 by our receiving 
 
 by our suggestion 
 
 by our system 
 
 by our testimony 
 
 in our* 
 
 in our answer 
 
 in our calculation 
 
 in our case 
 
 in our circumstances 
 
 in our desires 
 
 in our haste 
 
 in our house 
 
 in our hurry 
 
 in our judgment 
 
 in our part 
 
 in our position 
 
 in our sight 
 
 in our sorrow 
 
 in our times (tms) 
 
 in our understanding 
 
 in our way 
 
 *py Graham and Pitman, in our is written in the first position ; but 
 an exceptional resort to the third position, (not necessary in the opinion 
 of tpe author,) is supposed by some writers to insure greater legibility. 
 
196 THE "R" HOOK. 
 
 "FOB OUR." 
 
 366. In the Graham system (not the Pitman) our Is 
 added to for by prefixing to f the r hook, and the hooked 
 stroke is written in the third position, in order that for 
 our may not be confounded with from, in the second posi- 
 tion. Illustration: for our case 
 
 EXEHCISE. 
 
 367. Write the following: 
 
 for our case for our many 
 
 for our course for our readiness 
 
 for our imports for our reasons 
 
 for our legislation for our reputation 
 
 for our legislature for our request 
 
 for our life for our recent 
 
 for our love for our respect 
 
 for our manufactures for our revision 
 
 "SELF" AND "SELVES." 
 
 368. When our has been added to a stroke by prefixing 
 an r hook, self may be added by affixing a circle, and selves 
 by affixing a double circle, as in the phrases by ourself 
 
 ^ 71/ nii.rsf>.li'>f>.s VJ 
 
 by ourselves 
 
 ADDITION OF "OK." 
 
 369. In a few cases the r hook adds or, as in the 
 
 phrases at or about .*!.... , at or near A. 
 
 V. <_x 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 870. Write the following: 
 
 at or about at or near that place 
 
 at or about that time (tm) at or somewhere near 
 
 at or near at or very near 
 
THE "R" HOOK. 197 
 
 "B" HOOK FOE "WERE." 
 
 371. As the ordinary word-sign for were, when affixed 
 to which and such, does not make a convenient junction, 
 the forms which in the second position represent which 
 are and such are may be written in the third position to 
 
 \rhich were ........ , such were ,-.....?.. . This pe- 
 
 _... 9 
 
 culiar method of expressing were by the r hook may, if de- 
 sired, be dispensed with without sacrificing the phrase, by 
 attaching to ichich and such the inverted, instead of the 
 regular, form for were, as in the phrases which were neces- 
 
 sary .L.. r ~S.. , such were never J. (See Paragraph 298.) 
 
 <_V < ^v 
 
 In these cases, where the reporter writes would with the 
 intention that it shall be read were, we have an illustration 
 of "reporting license." Without a context, the character 
 used for were might be misread would; but when were be- 
 comes a part of a phrase, and the phrase a part of a sen- 
 tence, misreading is practically impossible. 
 
 372. Apart from the phrases which were and such were, 
 the r hook is never used to express were, except in the 
 
 phrases it were ^V and as M were \ 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 373. In the following phrases, were is to be expressed 
 by the r hook: 
 
 which were able which were again 
 
 which were about which were made 
 
 which were always which were many 
 
 which were among which were mos(t) impor- 
 
 which were best tant 
 
 which were gone which were rather 
 
198 
 
 THE "R" HOOK. 
 
 which were received 
 which were remembered 
 which were represented 
 which were right 
 which were said to be 
 which were something 
 which were to be 
 which were wrong 
 such were 
 
 such were employed 
 such were his 
 
 such were likely 
 such were my reasons 
 such were our 
 such were received 
 such were sent 
 such were supposed 
 such were the conditions 
 such were the indications 
 such were the opinions 
 such were the thoughts 
 such were to be 
 
 ENLARGED "L" AND "R" HOOKS. 
 
 374. According to the Grahamsystem (not the Pit- 
 man) an I hook enlarged (except on n and ray) signifies 
 Ir; and an r hook enlarged signifies rl. In phrasing the I 
 thus added may represent all or will, and the r thus added 
 
 may represent are or our. For instance, fir 
 
 ..._.., 
 
 represent for all our, and thrl 1. . may repr es,nt there 
 
 will or they are all. 
 
 375. The author has not found it necessary to intro- 
 duce this principle into his own practice, but as it is adopt- 
 ed by many reporters who use the Graham system, the fol- 
 lowing exercise is given for the benefit of students who 
 may wish to take advantage of it: 
 
 at all our 
 
 f 
 
 at all our efforts 
 at all our meetings 
 at all our mistakes 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 at all our reasons 
 
 by all our ....... 
 
THE "R" HOOK. 
 
 198 
 
 by all our legislation 
 by all our principles 
 by all our promises 
 
 during all 
 
 during almost 
 during all meetings 
 during all my life 
 during all my term 
 during all recent 
 during all seasons 
 during all you(r) life 
 during all you(r) resi- 
 dence 
 during all you(r) term 
 
 for all are 
 
 _. 
 
 for all 
 for all 
 for all 
 for all 
 for all 
 for all 
 for all 
 for all 
 for all 
 for all 
 
 are doing 
 are guilty 
 are sensible 
 are such 
 our 
 
 our designs 
 our doings 
 our friends 
 our sakes 
 our success 
 
 from all 
 
 from all (h) arm 
 from all manner 
 from all matters 
 
 from all receipts 
 from all sources 
 
 if all are 
 
 if all are certain 
 
 if all are chosen 
 
 if all are determined 
 
 if all are guilty 
 
 if all are just 
 
 if all are sensible 
 
 if all are successful 
 
 if all our 
 
 CL 
 
 if all our designs 
 if all our decisions 
 if all our efforts 
 if all our friends 
 if all our lessons 
 if all our testimony 
 if all our time (tm) 
 
 nor all 
 
 nor all such 
 
 nor all such matters 
 
 nor all that 
 
 nor all these (I. D.) 
 
 nor all they 
 
 nor all things 
 
 nor all this 
 
 nor all those (I. D.) 
 
 nor will 
 
200 
 
 THE "R" HOOK. 
 
 nor will anyone 
 
 nor will such 
 
 nor will that 
 
 nor will they 
 
 nor will this 
 
 nor will these (I. D.) 
 
 nor will those (I. D.) 
 
 nor will we 
 
 of all our ... 
 
 of all 
 of all 
 of all 
 of all 
 of all 
 of all 
 of all 
 of all 
 of all 
 of all 
 of all 
 of all 
 of all 
 
 our attempts 
 our best 
 our business 
 our friends 
 our lessons 
 our objections 
 our success 
 our suggestions 
 our testimony 
 our thinking 
 our time 
 our vanity 
 our visits 
 
 over all 
 
 over all else (vocalize else) 
 
 over all his 
 
 over all my 
 
 over all these (vocalize 
 
 these) 
 
 over all the nations 
 over all the world 
 
 there will 
 
 there will always 
 there will never 
 there will no doubt 
 there will now 
 there will sometimes 
 
 they are all 
 
 they are all toetssary 
 they are all now 
 they are all ready 
 they are all required 
 they are all sure 
 they are always 
 
 through all 
 
 through all nations 
 
 through all our 
 
 through all places 
 
 through all such 
 
 through all the 
 
 till our 
 
 till our case 
 till our many 
 till our money 
 till our proofs 
 till our receipts 
 till our reasons 
 till our recent 
 till our term 
 
 which are ail 
 
 ..Z. 
 
THE "R" HOOK. 201 
 
 which are all gone which are all right 
 
 which are all impossible which are all the 
 
 which are all mistakes which are all wrong 
 
 which are all necessary which are all the fashion 
 
 LIMITATION ON THE USE OF "R" HOOK. 
 
 376. By careful writers, the use of the r hook in phrases 
 for the purpose of word indication is not carried beyond 
 the limited extent o"^ 'v'^Au 1 w this chapter. Inexperi- 
 enced writers should Dear in mind that the indiscriminate 
 and unrestricted use of this principle may lead to confusion 
 in writing, and hesitation or error in reading. 
 
 377. The use of the r hook on tick word-signs, as prac- 
 tised by Graham writers (not Pitman writers), to add are, 
 our and or. has been fully explained in previous lessons. 
 (See Paragraphs 234, 236.) 
 
CHAPTER XV. 
 
 SOME SPECIAL PHRASE-SIGNS. 
 
 "MAY BE." 
 
 378. The stroke mb .^z^~.is freely used in phrasing 
 to represent may be. Illustrations: it may be U-v 
 
 ' *'j U/& 
 
 , you may be ....... o^s . We may be pre- 
 
 fixed to may be by the w hook, thus: we may be 
 
 Although, in word-writing, this character represents mr, 
 and is a word-sign for remark, no conflict can result from 
 the "reporting license" which thus assigns two different 
 significations to a single character. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 379. In the following phrases may be and we may be 
 are to be represented in accordance with the instruction 
 just given: 
 
 may be may be one 
 
 may be able may be only 
 
 may be also may be perceived 
 
 may be as (w) ell may be placed 
 
 may be always may be ready 
 
 may be certain may be reasonable 
 
 may be aware may be received 
 
SOME SPECIAL PHRASE-SIGNS. 
 
 203 
 
 may be considered 
 
 may be found 
 
 may be greatly 
 
 may be important 
 
 may be impossible 
 
 may be known 
 
 may be likely 
 
 may be made 
 
 may be never 
 
 may be reconciled 
 
 may be represented 
 
 may be required 
 
 may be right 
 
 may be said 
 
 may be so 
 
 may be some 
 
 may be sometime 
 
 may be sure 
 
 may be told 
 
 may be true 
 
 may be very sure 
 
 may be very (w)ell 
 
 may be worth 
 
 may be wrong 
 
 may be you 
 
 he may be certain 
 
 he may be (con)sidered 
 
 he may be ready 
 
 he may be said 
 
 he may be sure 
 
 I may be able 
 
 I may be aware 
 
 I may be (con)sidered 
 
 I may be one 
 
 I may be right 
 
 I may be worthy 
 
 I may be wrong 
 
 it may be also 
 it may be found 
 it may be only 
 it may be rendered 
 it may be represented 
 it may be right 
 it may be said 
 it may be true 
 it may be worth 
 it may be you 
 there may be always 
 there may be certain 
 there may be important 
 there may be only 
 there may be reasons 
 there may be received 
 there may be some 
 there may be somehow 
 there may be supposed 
 they may be aware 
 they may be likely 
 they may be placed 
 they may be received 
 they may be represented 
 they may be somehow 
 they may be very sure 
 we may be always 
 we may be as (w)ell 
 we may be certain 
 we may be likely 
 we may be reasonable 
 we may be reconciled 
 we may be responsible 
 we may be right 
 we may be said 
 we may be sorry 
 we may be wrong 
 
204 
 
 SOME SPECIAL PHRASE-SIGNS. 
 
 you may be able you may be reconciled 
 
 you may be aware you may be recognized 
 
 you may be certain you may be rendered 
 you may be (con)sidered you may be required 
 
 you may be found you may be said 
 
 you may be known you may be serviceable 
 
 you may be one you may be surpassed 
 
 you may be only you may be worth 
 
 ycra may be ready you may be wrong 
 
 "MAY HAVE BEEN." 
 
 380. In the following exercise, may have been is to be 
 represented by the brief elliptical sign m&n~-../"""^. . * 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 he may have been 
 he may have been disposed 
 he may have been taking 
 I may have been asked 
 I may have been coming 
 may have been ( con) demn- 
 ed (con expressed by 
 proximity) 
 
 I may have been known 
 I may have been positive 
 it may have been asked 
 it may have been ('con)- 
 
 fessed* 
 
 it may have been essential 
 it may have been necessary 
 it may have been so 
 there may have been 
 there may have been an- 
 other 
 
 there may have been so 
 
 many 
 
 they may have been anxious 
 they may have been asking 
 they may have been dis- 
 posed 
 
 they may have been doing 
 they may have been taking 
 we may have been asked 
 we may have been capable 
 we may have been especial- 
 ly 
 
 which may have been known 
 which may have been ad- 
 mitted 
 
 there may have been cases 
 there may have been no 
 
 necessity 
 there may have been none 
 
 *Con expressed by proximity. 
 
SOME SPECIAL PHRASE-SIGNS. 205 
 
 which may have been ca- you may have been asking 
 
 pable you may have been especi- 
 
 which may have been pos- ally 
 
 sible you may have been known 
 
 "TO BE." 
 
 381. B struck through the line, thus .....V..... Is a sign 
 for to be. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 382. Write the following: 
 
 to be to be ready 
 
 to be also to be reasonable 
 
 to be always to be received 
 
 to be aware to be recognized 
 
 to be chosen to be reconciled 
 
 to be (con) sidered to be rejected 
 
 to be embarrassed to be represented 
 
 to be just to be something 
 
 to be limited to be sometimes 
 
 to be made to be that 
 to be many times (tms) to be this 
 
 "TO ::AVE BEEN." 
 
 1'83. Bn struck through the line, thus V , is a sign, 
 
 according to the Graham system, for to have been. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 384. Write the following: 
 
 to have been to have been decided 
 
 to have been absent to have been done 
 
 to have been another to have been disposed 
 
 to have been asked to have been found 
 
 to have been better to have been invited 
 
206 SOME SPECIAL PHRASE-SIGNS. 
 
 to have been known to have been passed 
 
 to have been necessary to have been shown 
 
 "IN RE-." 
 
 385. Phrases like in reply, in response, etc., in which 
 the preposition in is followed by a word beginning with re-, 
 
 may be written thus: in reply X... , in response 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 386. Write the following: 
 
 in rebuttal in repayment 
 
 in receipt in reply 
 
 in ref(erence) in resp(ect) 
 
 in rejoining in response 
 
 "IN RECON-," ETC. 
 
 387. Nr, disjoined from, but written in close proximity 
 to, the following character, may represent in recon, in 
 
 recom or in recog, as in the phrases, in recompense 
 in recognition 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 388. Write the following: 
 
 in recommencing in recompense 
 
 in recommending in recognition 
 
 in recommitting in recognizing 
 
 "IS IT," "AS IT," "IS THERE," "AS THERE," ETC. 
 
 389. The use of the st and sir loops as phrasing factors 
 is authorized by Munson, not by Graham or Benn Pitman. 
 
SOME SPECIAL PHRASE-SIGNS. 207 
 
 The expedient seems meritorious enough to be explained in 
 the present chapter, for the adoption of those who may 
 favor it.* 
 
 390. Standing alone or at the beginning of a phrase, 
 the st loop written in the direction of chay may represent, 
 above the line, is it, and on the line, as it or has it. Illus- 
 
 trations: is it f ........... , as it or Ttas it ... (?. ....... is it necessary 
 
 , as it is ...... , as it has been ...<s...., . 
 
 391. If this expedient be adopted, the half-length z on 
 the line, being no longer required for as it, may be freely 
 used for the very common phrase was it, thus dispensing 
 
 with the rather too long and cumbrous sign ) 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 392. In the following exercise, is it, as it and has it 
 are to be represented by the st loop: 
 
 as it has it never 
 
 as it has been has it not 
 
 as it has not has it not been 
 
 as it is is it 
 
 as it is never is it necessary 
 
 as it is necessary is it never 
 
 as it is not is it not 
 
 as it is now is it now 
 
 as it never is it unnecessary 
 
 as it now is it your (you inverted) 
 
 as it now appears opinion 
 
 *That well-known reporter, Mr. Clarence E. Walker, of Louisville, 
 Ky., a writer of the Graham system, has approved and adopted this ex- 
 pedient in his recent book entitled "Speed and Legibility." He remarks 
 that from it "many beautiful, rapidly-made and surely-read phrases 
 result." 
 
208 SOME SPECIAL PHRASE-SIGNS. 
 
 3921,4 Attached to when, where and ichy, the st loop 
 may express is it or has it, as in the phrases when is it, or 
 when has it; where is it, or ichere has it; why is it, or wl'.y 
 has it. 
 
 393. Standing alone, or at the beginning of a phrase, 
 the str loop, written in the direction of chay, may represent 
 above the line is there, and on the line as there 
 
 <7 
 
 or has there; as in the phrases is there ,isthere 
 
 anything.,., ... , as there is ^ ..., Tics there been 
 
 there not 
 
 394. If is there and as there be thus provided for, the 
 double-length z may be freely used for was there, without 
 any care as to position, thus avoiding the confusion and il- 
 legibility which sometimes result from the triple use of 
 this character, to represent is there, was there and as 
 there, with no distinction except carefully-expressed posi- 
 tion. 
 
 395. In the following exercise, is there, as there, has 
 there and as they are should be represented by the str 
 loop: 
 
 as there as there is now 
 
 as there has never as they are now 
 
 as there has no doubt as they are necessary 
 
 as there has not has there 
 
 as there is has there been 
 
 as there is another has there never 
 
 as there is no objection has there now 
 as there is no time is there 
 
 ' as there is not is there any admission 
 
 as there is nothing is there any condition 
 
SOME SPECIAL PHRASE-SIGNS. 209 
 
 is there any objection is there never 
 
 is there anything is there not 
 
 is there enough is there now 
 
 396. A final circle, whether it be a word-sign or part 
 of a word-outline, may be enlarged to a str loop to add 
 their, there or they are; thus; because there or because they 
 
 are .............. , of course there or of course they are. 
 
 why is there , nor is there . This expedient 
 
 affords a convenient means of joining there or their to many 
 verb-forms ending with a circle, to which these words can 
 not be added by doubling the preceding stroke; thus.Zoves 
 
 their ,..(... .N^. . , says there .0 ., thinks there, .v>...... 
 
 takes their I...1.Z7)... 
 
 397. 7s or has, following there added by a loop, may 
 be expressed thus: of course there is or of course there has 
 
 , unless there is or unless there has 
 there is or says there has ........ Q..... , knoics t here is or knows 
 
 there has ^^ 
 
210 
 
 SOME SPECIAL PHRASE-SIGNS. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 398. In the following exercise, there, their or they are 
 is to be expressed by changing a circle to a str loop; and 
 is or has, following there, is to be written in accordance 
 with Paragraph 397: 
 
 (because there (or their) 
 (because they are 
 ( because there has 
 (because there is 
 
 loves their 
 
 knows there 
 (knows there is 
 (knows there has 
 ( nor is there 
 (nor has there 
 ( of course there 
 (of course they are 
 ( says there 
 ( says they are 
 ( says there has 
 (says there is 
 
 ( since their (or there) 
 ( since they are 
 
 since there has 
 
 since there is 
 (thinks there (or their) 
 ( thinks they are 
 | thinks there has 
 ( thinks there is 
 J unless there has 
 ( unless there is 
 ( when has there 
 ( when is there 
 (where has there 
 (where is there 
 ( why has there 
 1 why is there 
 
CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 EXPRESSION OF "THEIR," "THERE" AXD "THEY ARE." 
 
 399. In learning how to write single or separate words, 
 the pupil has learned the use of the double-lengthing prin- 
 ciple to express the consonant sounds thr, dr, tr, as occur- 
 ring, for instance, in the words leather, fodder and meter, 
 In phrase-writing, this principle is called into play to ex- 
 press not merely parts of words, but whole words whose 
 consonants are thr, dr or tr. The words there and their are 
 very commonly thus expressed, as is also the frequent 
 
 phrase they are. Thus we write may there.-<^.~.-~^*-* s 
 there or so they are,, ..\ , love their 
 
 think their or think they are. 
 
 400. In order that a stroke may be doubled to add 
 there or any cognate word, three things are necessary: 
 
 First. The stroke to be doubled must be full length. 
 If a half-length stroke be made twice its ordinary size, we 
 have simply a full-length character, and thr is not added.* 
 
 Second. According to the Benn Pitman system, the con- 
 sonant which is made double-length for the purpose of add- 
 
 *In some rare cases the advanced reporter, desiring to add there to 
 a half-length stroke, such as that or let, voluntarily discards the t or d 
 and writes for instance, tha' there for that there, Ze' there for let there. 
 
212 THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 ing there, or any similar word, must be a curved stroke. 
 The Graham system allows either a curved or a straight 
 .stroke to be doubled for this purpose. This feature of the 
 Graham system will be explained and illustrated in a sub- 
 Sequent part of this chapter. 
 
 Third. The doubling principle cannot be applied to 
 any stroke which, before doubling, has any final appendage, 
 such as a circle, a hook or a loop, because any such ap- 
 pendage must necessarily read after the word expressed 
 by doubling. For instance, though doubling the v in love 
 will give us the phrase love their, we can not, by the same 
 
 means, convert loves into loves their. I \. would be, not 
 
 V^__0 
 
 loves their, but love there is or love theirs.* For *he same 
 reason, if we should double the r in arraign, the resulting 
 
 .... would be, not arraign their, but are their 
 
 own. Any circle, hook or loop, at the end of a double- 
 length stroke reads after the word or words expressed by 
 doubling. 
 
 401. Strokes with initial modifications may be doubled 
 as freely as simple strokes. The doubling principle may 
 be applied either to the last stroke of a complete outline, 
 as when we write love their by doubling the v in love, or 
 to an incomplete outline used as a word-sign, as when we 
 write think there by doubting the incomplete outline which, 
 as a word-sign, represents think. 
 
 POSITION OF DOUBLE-LENGTH STROKES. 
 
 402. When standing alone or at the beginning of a phrase, 
 the double-length stroke must, according to the regular rule, 
 occupy its own distinctive position. In order to write a 
 doubled stroke in any required position, it usually begins 
 
 such phrases as loves their. 
 
 *For a convenient method of writing 
 thinks their, says tkeir, see Paragraph 396. 
 
THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 213 
 
 where a single-length stroke of the same position would 
 
 begin. Illustrations : if J^ . ^ their ...X......... t f or V^ 
 
 for their L ...-thank ....(. , thank their /.... But a 
 
 mure harply-defined distinction between the doubled stroke 
 in the first place and the doubled stroke in the second place 
 will be obtained if the first-position stroke be written some- 
 what higher than the rule requires, so that it will rest on 
 the line, instead of being extended a short distance below 
 
 it, thus: 
 
 "OWN" ADDED TO DOUBLE-LENGTH STROKES. 
 
 403. When their is expressed by double-lengthing, 
 own, which very frequently follows their, is, in such 
 cases, generally expressed by adding an n hook to the 
 
 doubled stroke, thus: -for their own ...V , was their own 
 
 See Paragraphs 447-9. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 404. In the following phrases, there or their is, in 
 every case, to be expressed by doubling: 
 
 along there be sure there is 
 
 although their be sure there mus(t) be 
 
 are there (are downward) between their 
 
 are there as many as between their friends 
 
 are there many more between their several 
 
214 
 
 THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 ca(n) have their 
 
 cannot have their 
 { for there has 
 (for there is 
 j for there has not 
 (for there is not 
 
 for there was 
 
 for there were 
 
 from their 
 
 from their many 
 
 from their representation 
 
 have their 
 
 I am sure there 
 
 I am sure there can be 
 
 I -have seen there 
 
 I have seen there is not 
 
 I know their 
 
 I know there has been 
 
 I know there have 
 
 I know there is 
 
 I know thei'e is not 
 
 I know there was 
 
 I know there will (will 
 downward) 
 
 *I say there mus(t) be 
 
 I shall have their 
 
 I value their (I. D.) 
 
 *I was there 
 
 I wish their (I. D.) 
 
 I wish there would (I. D.) 
 
 if there 
 
 if there be 
 
 if there had 
 (if there has 
 (if there is 
 
 if there has been 
 
 if there has not 
 
 if there is not 
 
 if there is anything 
 
 if there is nothing 
 
 if there is nothing more 
 
 if there is no objection 
 
 if there were 
 
 **in all their 
 
 in all their books 
 
 in all their documents 
 
 in all their doings 
 
 in all their speeches 
 
 in all their subjects 
 
 in their 
 
 in their discharge 
 
 in their interest 
 
 in their opinion 
 
 in their place 
 
 in their position 
 
 it is only their 
 
 it is only their opinion 
 
 it was there 
 
 may have their 
 
 mus(t) have their 
 
 near there 
 
 never there 
 
 nor their 
 
 only their 
 ( over their 
 {over there 
 
 over their objection 
 
 over their protest 
 
 over their resistance 
 
 say there 
 
 say there is 
 
 say there should be 
 
 *See Paragraphs 214-218. 
 **aee Paragraphs 350- 352. 
 
THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 215 
 
 say there was 
 say there will 
 see there 
 
 see there are (are upward) 
 see there is 
 see there mus(t) be 
 see there will be 
 seen there 
 shall have their 
 shall there be 
 shall there never be 
 should have their 
 should think there 
 show their 
 show their reasons 
 so there / 
 
 so there are (are upward) 
 so there can be 
 so there is not 
 so there may 
 so there must 
 so there will 
 some there 
 
 some there are (are up- 
 ward) 
 
 some there should be 
 still there 
 still there is 
 still there may 
 still there mus(t) be 
 still there never 
 such was there 
 sure there 
 sure(ly) there are 
 sure(ly) there is not 
 sure(ly) there would be 
 therefore there 
 therefore there is 
 
 they are there 
 
 think there 
 
 think there has been 
 
 think there mus(t) be 
 
 though there 
 
 though there has been 
 
 though there is 
 
 though there will be 
 
 though there were 
 
 was there 
 
 was there never 
 
 was there not 
 
 was there some 
 
 was there something 
 
 we have seen there 
 
 we have their 
 
 we shall have their 
 
 we think their 
 
 we will have their 
 
 we wish there (I. D.) 
 
 well there is 
 
 well there mus(t) be 
 
 when there 
 
 when there are (are 
 
 downward) 
 when there is 
 when there is not 
 when there never 
 when there shall be 
 whenever there 
 whenever there is 
 whenever there has been 
 whenever there is occasion 
 wherever there 
 wherever there has been 
 wherever there is 
 wheresoever there 
 wheresoever there is 
 
216 
 
 THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 wheresoever there is not 
 wheresoever there will be 
 while there have 
 while there is 
 while there seems (to) be 
 who will there be 
 why there are (are up- 
 ward) 
 
 why there can be 
 why there is 
 why there is not 
 why there is nothing 
 
 why there is so much 
 why there should be 
 will there 
 will there be 
 will there never be 
 wish there 
 worth their 
 worthy their 
 you have seen there 
 you have seen there is nev- 
 er 
 you will think there 
 
 DOUBLE LENGTH "ING" AXD ".Ml!." 
 
 405. In word-writing the double-lengthing of ing has 
 the peculiar and exceptional effect of adding kr or gr, as in 
 
 the words rancor. .S. and languor. 
 
 and the 
 
 doubling of raft adds r, as in chamber. .rrrr^*.. t . But in 
 
 phrases, the double-lengthing of ing and mb has the effect, 
 as with all other curved consonants, of adding there or they 
 
 are. Illustrations: may be there 
 
 . raising their 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 406. In the following phrases, there or their is to be 
 expressed by making mb double-length: 
 
 he may be there they may be there 
 
 I may be there you may be there 
 
 I may be their friend you may be their repre- 
 
 it may be there sentative 
 
THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 217 
 
 which may be there 
 which may be their reason 
 which may be their repre- 
 sentation 
 
 we may be there 
 we may be there also 
 what may be their 
 what may be their reasons 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 407. In the following phrases, their is to be expressed 
 
 by making ing double length: 
 choosing th^ir l>y.e:v.ftM" 
 commencing their work 
 exposing their purpose 
 effacing their names 
 hastening their decay 
 noticing their business (vo- 
 calize business) 
 opposing their desires 
 passing their time (tm) 
 purchasing their goods 
 
 raising their voices 
 reducing their expenses 
 refusing their admission 
 registering their decrees 
 resigning their positions 
 signing their bills 
 singing their songs 
 supposing there has been 
 surpassing their expecta- 
 tion 
 
 "THERE" AS A SYLLABLE. 
 
 408. The doubling principle is used to express there, 
 not onjy when it is a complete word, but when it is merely 
 a syllable of such words as thereupon, thereby, therefore, 
 etc. This principle is especially useful in writing the word 
 therefore in phrases. Illustrations: you will therefore 
 
 , , you will thereby ....</ , . you will thereupon 
 
 ivhen therefore 
 
 I know therefore 
 
 *Iny-therea,nd iiiff-their can also be expressed in the Graham system 
 by the there or their tick, disjoined, written in the place of tilting dot. 
 (See Paragraphs 344 and 345.) 
 
218 THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 409. In the following exercise, there as part of the word 
 therefore, etc., is to be expressed by doubling: 
 
 he may therefore they are therefore 
 
 he will therefore you will thereby 
 
 I may therefore you will therefore 
 
 I shall thereby you will thereupon 
 
 I shall therefore was therefore 
 
 I shall thereupon we have therefore 
 
 I will therefore we may therefore 
 
 I wish therefore you may therefore 
 
 "THEY ARE." 
 
 410. The phrase they are is frequently expressed by 
 doubling, in the same manner and under the same restric- 
 tions as in the case of there or their. Illustrations: 
 
 / know they are done ^^ ,_..J... .... / think they are able 
 
 411. In the following exercise, the phrase they are is to 
 be expressed by doubling: 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 although they are seen *I say they are necessary 
 
 for they are chosen *I say they are right 
 
 for they are known I think they are sent 
 
 for they are said if they are guilty 
 
 I am sure they are now if they are jus(t) now 
 
 I am sure they are (to) be if they are seen 
 
 I know they are decided if they are sensible 
 
 I know they are just so they are right 
 
 I know they are not when they are decided 
 
 *See Paragraphs 214-21 0. 
 
THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 when they are discussed 
 when they are done 
 when they are seen 
 whenever they are sent 
 whenever they are suggest- 
 ed 
 wherever they are known 
 
 wherever they are seen 
 why they are many times 
 
 (tms) 
 
 why they are ready 
 why they are received 
 why they are sometimes 
 why they are (w) illing 
 
 "OTHEK." 
 
 412. "Other may be joined to a preceding word by 
 doubling; but the vowel must generally be inserted." (Mun- 
 son.) But in doubling every, several, some, my, our and 
 your to add other, vocalization is not necessary, because 
 there is no danger of conflict, as other, not there, will nec- 
 essarily be supplied in reading. 
 
 EXERISE. 
 
 413. In the following phrases, other is expressed by 
 doubling, without vocalization: 
 
 every other 
 
 every other case 
 
 every other occasion 
 
 every other reason 
 
 every other representation 
 
 every other right 
 
 if every other 
 
 my other 
 
 my other reasons 
 
 one other 
 
 one other advantage 
 
 one other decision 
 
 one other person 
 
 one other position 
 
 one other suggestion 
 
 several other 
 
 several other subjects 
 several other suggestions 
 in several others 
 some other 
 some other cases 
 some other man 
 some other person 
 some other reason 
 some other respects 
 some other rights 
 some others 
 your other 
 your others 
 your other supposition 
 when your other 
 if your other 
 
220 THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 414. In the following phrases, other following any 
 may be expressed by doubling, but the accented vowel must 
 
 be inserted, thus: 
 
 any other any other passage 
 
 any other cases any other position 
 any other circumstances any other subject 
 
 any other day any other thing 
 
 any other decision any other testimony 
 
 any other disposition any other time 
 
 any other lesson any other variety 
 
 415. The common phrase no other, when it stands alone 
 or begins a phrase, may be expressed by double-length n un- 
 vocalized, but must be written in the third position (under 
 the line) to distinguish it from another, written in the 
 second. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 416. The object of the following exercise is to familiar- 
 ize the learner with the very important distinction between 
 another and no other: 
 
 another answer another occasion 
 
 no other answer no other occasion 
 
 another book another passage 
 
 no other book no other passage 
 
 another day another person 
 
 no other day no other person 
 
 another notice another portion 
 
 no other notice no other portion 
 
 another objection another position 
 
 no other objection no other position 
 
 417. When no other is attached to a preceding stroke, 
 thereby losing its distinctive position, it must be vocalized, 
 
THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 221 
 
 thus: there is no other position.. al ...^ No other be- 
 
 ing thus distinguished by vocalization, another does not re- 
 quire vocalization, though when written in the midst of a 
 phrase it loses the distinction of position. 
 
 418. In the following phrases, another is to be written 
 without vocalization, and no other is to be vocalized: 
 
 in another case there is no other time 
 
 in no other case upon another (con)sideration 
 
 I have another objection upon no other (con) sideration 
 I have no other objection upon another occasion 
 this is another case upon no other occasion 
 
 this is no other case upon another subject 
 
 there is another position upon no other subject 
 there is no other position under another (con)dition 
 there is another time under no other (con)dition 
 
 419. If, at the end of a phrase, one word or several words 
 be omitted, to be supplied by the sense, as in the phrase 
 
 in reference to, which is constantly written ^~ ,the 
 
 last stroke actually written, though it be not the last sound 
 of the phrase, may be made double length to express their, 
 if the requirements for doubling be otherwise complied 
 
 with. Thus we write in reference to their ... 
 
 "FICTITIOUS PIUMITIVES" MADE DOUBLE LENGTH. 
 
 420. As previously explained, in some cases the prim- 
 itive word of the phrase is supposed or assumed to be writ- 
 ten in a manner different from ordinary, whereby, when 
 the supposed or assumed form is subjected to phrasing 
 rules, we obtain useful phrases which would not otherwise 
 be practicable. These primitive forms, different from those 
 
222 THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 which are in fact used, have been designated "fictitious 
 primitives." The following illustrations will show how the 
 fictitious forms are utilized in connection with the doubling 
 principle: 
 
 By doubling the fictitious primitive for the, we 
 
 obtain the phrase the other. 
 
 By doubling .., the fictitious primitive for of, we 
 
 obtain the phrases of their \?^_...and of all there ..>*_., 
 
 By doubling 4--- , the fictitious primitive for that, we 
 
 obtain that there "** "* . 
 
 By doubling r ..^,,..^.-. the fictitious primitive for with, we 
 obtain the phrase with their...-. .!...,. 
 
 By doubling., , the fictitious primitive for or, we 
 
 obtain the phrase or there or or other 
 
 By doubling ^.. ; and ........Y...., the fictitious primitives for 
 
THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 223 
 
 is and as, we obtain the phrases is their,..../..., ...and as 
 their ... 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 421. In the following phrases other, their and there, 
 wherever they occur, should be expressed by doubling the 
 "fictitious primitive," which in each case is distinguished by 
 italics: 
 
 all the other 
 
 and the other 
 
 *as there 
 
 as there are (are upward) 
 
 as there can be 
 
 as there has been 
 
 as there has never 
 
 as there may be 
 
 as there should be 
 
 as there was 
 
 as there will be 
 
 between the other 
 
 by some means or other 
 
 by the other 
 
 give the other 
 
 *has there 
 
 7ms there been 
 
 Ties there never 
 
 Tias there not 
 
 I know the other 
 
 if the other 
 
 is the other 
 
 *is there 
 
 is there a 
 
 is there never 
 
 is there nobody 
 
 is there none 
 
 is there no more 
 
 is there not 
 
 is there now 
 
 is their own 
 
 is there some 
 
 is there somebody 
 
 is there to be 
 
 many of their 
 
 of all their 
 
 of all their doings 
 
 of all their lessons 
 
 of all their services 
 
 of all their success 
 
 of all their suggestions 
 
 of all their demands 
 
 on the other supposition 
 
 of some kind or other 
 
 of there 
 
 of their doings 
 
 of their lessons 
 
 of their services 
 
 *For another method of expressing as there, has there and is there, see 
 Paragraphs 393-395. 
 
224 
 
 THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 of their success 
 of their suggestions 
 of their time 
 that there is now 
 that there must be 
 that there will be 
 the other 
 the others 
 the other is said 
 the other side 
 under the other 
 when the other 
 where the other 
 
 with 
 with, 
 with 
 with 
 with 
 with 
 with 
 with 
 with 
 with 
 with 
 with 
 with 
 
 the other 
 their 
 
 their cases 
 their majesty 
 their management 
 their many 
 their reasons 
 their 'regards 
 their representations 
 their requests 
 their respects 
 their services 
 their success 
 
 422. In a certain class of phrases, generally of a saln- 
 tatory character, my may be made double length to add 
 dear. 
 
 EXEBCISE. 
 
 423. Write the following: 
 
 my dear brethren (brn) my dear Judge 
 
 my dear brother my dear madam 
 
 my dear captain my dear Major 
 
 my dear Charles my dear mother 
 
 my dear colleague my dear Mr. 
 
 my dear Colonel my dear Robert 
 
 my dear Doctor my dear sir 
 
 my dear father my dear sister 
 
 my dear friend my dear Smith 
 
 "WHETHER." 
 
 424. In a few cases, whether may be expressed by doub- 
 ling the preceding stroke. Illustrations: you know whether 
 
 it is 
 
 I will think whether you are 
 
THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 225 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 425. In the following phrases, ivhether is to be ex- 
 pressed by doubling the preceding stroke: 
 
 can you (inverted) say you (inverted) know 
 
 whether the whether it is 
 
 can you (inverted) think I know whether you (in- 
 
 whether you verted) think so 
 
 I know whether you (in- *I would not say whether 
 
 verted; do you 
 
 I know whether you (in- tell me whether you are 
 
 verted) have when you (inverted) have 
 
 seen whether it is so 
 
 UOCRLE-LEXGTII STROKES JOINED WITHOUT AN ANGLE. 
 
 426. Although in general it is forbidden to run to- 
 gether two strokes of different lengths without an angle or 
 distinct point of junction, to show where one stroke ends 
 and the other begins, yet by "reporting license" we may 
 
 write among there **^\^ -^ , bring there 
 
 being there \^-^-^-, and a few similar combinations. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 427. Write the following: 
 
 among their acquaintance being their agent 
 
 among their agents being their counsel 
 
 among their families being their friend 
 
 among their friends being there at once 
 
 among their neighbors being there in time (tm) 
 
 among their partisans bring their friends 
 
 among their patrons bring their energy 
 
 among their superiors bring their information 
 
 among their supporters bring their knowledge 
 
 among their workmen bring their work 
 
 *See Paragraphs 214-210. 
 
226 THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 TRIPLE-LENGTH STROKE. 
 
 428. Sometimes a consonant stroke is extended to 
 triple length, for the purpose of including therein an addi- 
 tional there or tliey are, as in the phrase whether they are 
 
 ready 
 
 \A 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 429. In the following phrases, there or their is to be 
 expressed by making the preceding strokes triple length: 
 
 center their energies render their decision 
 
 enter their names surrender their posts 
 
 enter their house tender their services 
 
 enter their service tender their thanks 
 
 I know they are there now whether there can be 
 
 I wonder there is not whether there is now 
 
 murder their reputation whether there will be 
 
 430. Some authorities have undertaken to teach and 
 exemplify strokes of quadruple length, representing, for 
 instance, such phrases as do you "know whether they are 
 there. But, in the opinion of the author, even a triple 
 length should be used very sparingly, and the quadruple 
 length not at all. 
 
 UNDULY LONG PHRASES TO BE AVOIDED. 
 
 431. In order to avail himself of the doubling principle, 
 the young stenographer is often tempted to make phrases 
 extending upward, downward or laterally to an undue 
 length.- If wise, he will adhere to the rule already given, 
 that in general a phrase should not extend more than two 
 strokes, or the equivalent thereof, below or above the line, 
 and should not extend laterally to a length which the hand 
 feels to be inconvenient. (See Paragraphs 49 and 50.) 
 
THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 227 
 
 Such undesirable phrases as would say there was, should 
 have therefore, you will there receive, some other matter 
 may therefore, illustrate the double-lengthing principle 
 carried to excess. 
 
 DOUBLE LEXGTHING OF STRAIGHT STROKES. 
 
 432. According to the Graham system (not the Pitman) 
 thr, tr and dr may, by doubling, be added to a straight 
 stroke as well as a curve. Heavy straight consonants.^when 
 made double length for this purpose, are to be made taper- 
 
 ing, thus: u.-N^. Applied to the straight strokes, the doub- 
 ling principle gives us such phrases as had there.. 
 
 their \. . give t Jieir ; where there </... A double- 
 length straight stroke, like a double-length curved stroke, 
 may take on additional words by means of initial or final 
 hooks. As already explained in connection with double- 
 length curves, an initial hook takes effect before the doub- 
 ling, and a final hook afterward. Thus, in the phrase by all 
 
 their own _^> aZZ, expressed by the Z hook, reads before 
 
 their; and own, expressed by the n hook, reads after. By 
 means of an n hook, the Graham writer may add to a double- 
 length straight siroKe^bicn^one "or not; and by means of an 
 f-v hook, have, ever, for or fore. Illustrations: by their 
 
 \ r 
 
 own \ it will therefore state whether (or) not 
 
228 
 
 THE DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 ,.. . In certain cases where no ambiguity will result, 
 the doubling may imply other or whether. Illustrations: 
 
 each other (.. , such other /.... , state whether you are 
 
 EXEKCISE. 
 
 433. In the following phrases, there, their, they are, 
 other and whether are expressed, according to the Graham 
 system, by double-lengthing; all and icill by the I hook; 
 and the syllable -fore in therefore by the f-v hook: 
 
 f ask whether 
 I ask their 
 
 ask their attention 
 
 ask their leave 
 
 ask their permission 
 
 ask whether it is 
 
 ask whether their (fc, the 
 last stoke of ask, is made 
 triple length to add 
 whether their or whether 
 they are) 
 
 ask whether they are done 
 
 ask whether you may 
 
 at all their 
 
 at all other 
 
 at all other places 
 
 at other places 
 
 at their 
 
 at their own 
 
 at their pleasure 
 
 be there 
 
 be therefore 
 
 be their own 
 
 believe their 
 
 believe therefore 
 
 believe they are right 
 
 by all their 
 
 by all their life 
 
 by all their love 
 
 by all their own 
 
 by their 
 
 by their money 
 
 by their own 
 
 by their reason 
 
 by their request 
 
 by their resolution 
 
 do their 
 
 do therefore 
 
 do there exist 
 
 each other 
 
DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 229 
 
 each other one 
 
 each therefore 
 
 give their 
 
 give their own 
 
 give their time (tm) 
 
 give therefore 
 
 had there 
 
 had therefore 
 
 had there existed 
 
 had their own 
 
 had their reasons 
 
 I believe there is 
 
 I do therefore 
 
 I had their leave (I. D.) 
 
 it will therefore 
 
 state their 
 
 state their case 
 
 state their matter 
 
 state their reasons 
 
 state whether 
 
 state whether he knows 
 
 state whether (or) not 
 
 state whether there is (t, 
 the last consonant of 
 state, is made triple 
 length to add whether 
 there) 
 
 state whether you can 
 
 such (an) other one 
 
 such other 
 
 such therefore 
 
 tell there 
 
 tell their own 
 
 tell whether there is (t, 
 
 the last consonant of tell, 
 is made triple length to 
 add ivhether there 
 
 tell whether there may 
 
 tell whether there must 
 
 till there can 
 
 till therefore 
 
 till there is 
 
 till there must be 
 
 till there seems to be 
 
 till there should be 
 
 till they are ready 
 
 till they are received 
 
 till they are right 
 
 to their own* 
 
 to other* 
 
 to other cases 
 
 to other matters 
 
 to other persons 
 
 where there 
 
 where there are 
 
 where there is 
 
 where there is not 
 
 where there never 
 
 where they are at present 
 
 where they are engaged 
 
 where they are now 
 
 which are there 
 
 which are therefore 
 
 which are their own 
 
 which therefore 
 
 which there is not 
 
 which they are sure 
 
 which will therefore 
 
 *7b, ordinarily written with a tick, is in these cases represented by the 
 Stroke t in order to facilitate the phrases to other and to their. 
 
CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 THE "N" HOOK. 
 
 EXPRESSION OF "ONE." 
 
 434. Subject to fundamental phrasing laws as to con- 
 venience of junction, legibility, etc., the n hook may be 
 added to any full-length or double-length stroke to express 
 
 ....... 
 
 one. Illustrations: every one ...... ....... , some one ... 
 
 435. The n hook, when written for one, may take an s 
 circle to express the possessive or the plural. Illustrations: 
 
 each one's > every ones ..... o) ..... , some ones 
 
 another one's 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 436. In the following exercise, one is to be expressed 
 
 by the n hook, an s circle being added whenever necessary: 
 
 another one any one's 
 
 another one can be any one may respect 
 
 another one may be any one receives 
 
 another one must any one recognizes 
 
 another one must be at one 
 
 any one at one assembly 
 
THE "N" HOOK. 
 
 231 
 
 at once 
 
 at one's 
 
 at one showing 
 
 at one time (tm) 
 
 at one town 
 
 at one visit 
 
 by every one 
 
 by every one's 
 
 by some one 
 
 by such (a) one 
 
 by such (a) one's 
 
 by the other one 
 
 ca (n) such (a) one 
 
 each one 
 
 each one's 
 
 every one asks 
 
 every one does 
 
 every one fears 
 
 every one knows 
 
 every one says 
 
 every one shall be 
 
 every one's time (tm) 
 
 give every one 
 
 gives every one 
 
 I think every one 
 
 if every one does 
 
 if every one knows 
 
 if every one says 
 
 if some one 
 
 if some one asks 
 
 if some one was 
 
 if some one would be 
 
 if such (a) one 
 
 if such (a) one's 
 
 if the other one 
 
 if the other one can be 
 
 in each one (I. D.) 
 
 in each one's 
 *no other one 
 no other one's 
 no other one can 
 no other one receives 
 no other one recognizes 
 no other one requires 
 no other one shall be 
 
 (shall upward) 
 no other one will be 
 of each one (I. D.) 
 of each one's 
 of every one 
 of such (a) one 
 of such (a) one's 
 on each one (I. D.) 
 on each one's 
 on the other one's 
 send another one 
 some one 
 some one's 
 some one answers 
 some one asked 
 some one's position 
 some one was 
 some one was there 
 some other one's 
 such (a) one 
 such (a) one's 
 tell every one 
 tells every one 
 that is another one 
 the other one 
 the other one's 
 there is another one 
 to some one 
 to such (a) one 
 
 *See Paragraph 415. 
 
232 THE "N" HOOK. 
 
 to some one or other (r) to such (a) one's 
 double-length) when another one* 
 
 437. Exception: No one should be writtenis < /> not 
 
 ,.>>^.. t , in order to avoid a possible conflict between none 
 
 and no one, involving, if not a variation of the sense, a loss 
 of verbal accuracy. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 438. Write the following: 
 
 no one no one observes 
 
 no one dares no one of you 
 
 no one denies no one shall be 
 
 no one does no one thinks 
 
 no one has been no one thought 
 
 no one has said no one understands 
 
 no one has seen no one was 
 
 439. To the n hook representing one, the circle s may 
 be added, when convenient, to represent is or has. 
 
 440. Write the following: 
 
 another one is every other one is 
 
 any one is no other one is 
 
 each one is some one is 
 
 every one is the other one is 
 
 "OWN." 
 
 441. To the ordinary signs of her, our, their and your 
 the n hook may be added to express own. Illustrations: her 
 
 -^ > 
 own.. our own ,^\...... , their own J your ow.i 
 
 JL 
 
 *Neilher, if introduced into a phrase anywhere else than at the be- 
 ginning, should be vocalized. 
 
THE "N" HOOK. 
 
 233 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 442. Write the following: 
 
 her own 
 
 her own admission 
 her own advantage 
 her own business 
 her own decision 
 her own discharge 
 her own family 
 her own information 
 her own judgment 
 her own knowledge 
 her own position 
 her own showing 
 her own time (tm) 
 our own 
 
 our own assumption 
 our own knowledge 
 our own name 
 our own notion 
 our own position 
 our own time (tm) 
 your own 
 
 your own business 
 your own decision 
 your own duty 
 your own family 
 your own judgment 
 your own knowledge 
 your own name 
 your own notion 
 your own opinion 
 your own position 
 your own time (tm) 
 your own work 
 about your own ability 
 
 about your own business 
 about your own decision 
 all your own 
 all your own doing 
 all your own fault 
 if your own ability 
 if your own information 
 if your own knowledge 
 if your own opinion 
 if your own time (tm) 
 in your own name 
 in your own position 
 in your own opinion 
 in your own time (tm) 
 it is your own 
 it is your own business 
 it is your own choice 
 it is your own doing 
 it is your own fault 
 their own 
 their own ability 
 their own business 
 their own fault 
 tneir own position 
 their own time (tm) 
 ail their own 
 by their own 
 by their own folly 
 by their own industry 
 bjf their own showing 
 by their own testimony 
 by their own violation 
 do their own 
 do their own business 
 
234 
 
 THE "N" HOOK. 
 
 give their own 
 give their own information 
 give their own judgment 
 gives their own 
 on their own (on down- 
 ward) 
 
 on their own part 
 pay their own debts 
 take their own 
 all your own testimony 
 at your own 
 at your own option 
 at your own position 
 by your own ability 
 Ly our own business 
 by your own decision 
 
 by your own name 
 
 by your own neighbors 
 
 does your own business 
 
 for your own 
 
 for your own business 
 
 to your own 
 
 to your own disgrace 
 
 to your own shame 
 
 to your own testimony 
 
 to your own volition 
 
 with your own 
 
 with your own hands 
 
 with your own knowledge 
 
 with your own name 
 
 with your own neighbors 
 
 with your own things 
 
 443. In many cases, own is conveniently joined by the 
 n hook to with our, thus: with our own . ( ^/^. 
 
 EXEECISE. 
 
 444. Write the following: 
 
 with our own 
 with our own army 
 with our own case 
 with our own exertions 
 with our own imports 
 with our own lives 
 with our own manufactures 
 
 with our own money 
 with our own mouth 
 with our own receipt 
 with our own report 
 with our own respect 
 with our own responsibility 
 with our own right 
 
 445. Own, expressed by the n hook, is often convenient- 
 
 ly joined to in our, thus: in our own 
 
THE "N" HOOK. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 235 
 
 448. Write the following: 
 in our own 
 in our own case 
 in our own manufactures 
 in our own materials 
 in our own regiment 
 
 in our own report 
 
 in our own reply 
 
 in our own representations 
 
 in our own respect 
 
 in our own writing 
 
 447. The n hook affords often a very convenient means 
 of adding oicn to their expressed by double-lengthing. Il- 
 
 lustrations: for their own 
 may be their own .<^~~^>. 
 
 , icas their own 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 448. Write the following: 
 
 although their own 
 
 are their own 
 
 ask only their own 
 
 between their own 
 
 ca (n) have their own 
 
 for their own 
 
 for their own case 
 
 for their own government 
 
 for their own information 
 
 for their own name 
 
 for their own necessities 
 
 for their own neighbors 
 
 for their own notions 
 
 for their own reasons 
 
 for their own sake 
 
 from their own admission 
 
 from their own information 
 
 from their own names 
 from their own necessities 
 from their own objections 
 from their own showing 
 from their own testimony 
 have their own 
 have their own notions 
 have their own opinions 
 have their own reasons 
 have their own responsibil- 
 ities 
 
 have their own rights 
 I have seen their own 
 I take only their own 
 I think their own 
 I think their own informa- 
 tion 
 
236 
 
 THE "N" HOOK. 
 
 I think their own knowl- 
 edge. 
 
 I value their own (I. D.) 
 
 I wish their own (I. D.) 
 
 in their own 
 
 in their own cases 
 
 in their own report 
 
 in their own representa- 
 tion 
 
 in their own reputation 
 
 in their own right 
 
 it is only their own 
 
 it was their own 
 
 know their own 
 
 know their own case 
 
 know their own reasons 
 
 may their own 
 
 nor shall their own 
 
 over their own 
 
 over their own name 
 
 over their own town 
 
 receive only their own 
 
 say their own 
 
 seen their own 
 
 shall have their own 
 
 shall their own 
 
 should know their own 
 
 so their own 
 
 they may have their own 
 
 they mus(t) have their 
 own 
 
 think their own 
 though their own 
 through their own 
 through their own fault 
 through their own objec- 
 tion 
 
 through their own volition 
 value their own 
 was never their own 
 was their own 
 was their own choice 
 was their own position 
 was their own showing 
 we have only their own 
 we have seen their own 
 we have their own 
 we think their own 
 when shall their own 
 whenever their own 
 wherever their own 
 while their own 
 will have their own 
 why their own 
 why their own information 
 why their own judgment 
 why their own notice 
 why their own objection 
 wish their own 
 worthy their own 
 you have only their own 
 you have seen their own 
 
 449. Exception: Own, in the phrase my own, should be 
 expressed by the stroke n, instead of the hook, to avoid pos- 
 sibility of conflict between mine and my own in such sen- 
 tences as it is my own and it is mine. 
 
THE "N" HOOK. 237 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 450. Write the following phrases, expressing oicn by 
 the n stroke: 
 
 my own business expressed by "proximi- 
 
 my own confessions (con ty") 
 
 expressed by "proximi- my own course 
 
 ty") my own decision 
 
 my own conscience (con my own duty 
 
 expressed by "proximi- my own information 
 
 ty") my own judgment 
 
 my own condition (con eli- my own objection 
 
 ded and dition joined) my own position 
 
 my own convictions (con my own showing 
 
 451. It need hardly be said that the final hook for one 
 and own must not be used in any case where its use would 
 cause an awkward junction or endanger legibility. But, in 
 general, no confusion is found to result from representing 
 one and own by the same hook, as the context usually indi- 
 cates clearly the word intended. 
 
 "N" HOOK FOB "THAN." 
 
 452. Than may be added by means of the n hook to the 
 words more, other and rather, and to any word ending with 
 er, the sign of the comparative degree. Illustrations: ~bet- 
 
 ^ 
 ter than %/?,.. , lower &,/_... ..A... , higher than 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 453. Write the following: 
 
 any more than better than mine 
 
 any more than enough better than my own 
 
 any more than necessary better than the 
 
 better than better than you 
 
 better than a better than you can 
 
238 
 
 THE "N" HOOK. 
 
 earlier than 
 easier than 
 farther than 
 farther than a 
 farther than asked 
 farther than necessary 
 farther than the 
 farther than was 
 greater than 
 greater than the 
 greater than you 
 greater than you can 
 harder than 
 harder than a 
 harder than ever 
 harder than necessary 
 harder than now 
 harder than the 
 harder than was 
 higher than 
 higher than now 
 it is better than a 
 it is better than mine 
 it is better than the 
 larger than 
 longer than a 
 longer than necessary 
 longer than now 
 longer than required 
 longer than the 
 more than 
 
 more than necessary 
 more than a 
 more than enough 
 more than now 
 more than the 
 more than would be 
 
 much more than 
 
 much more than necessary 
 
 no greater than will be 
 
 no longer than 
 
 no more than 
 
 no more than can be 
 
 no more than necessary 
 
 no more than would be 
 
 no more than would an- 
 swer 
 
 other than 
 
 rather more than 
 
 rather than 
 
 rather than a 
 
 rather than ask 
 
 rather than make 
 
 rather than mention 
 
 rather than receive 
 
 rather than refuse 
 
 rather than remain 
 
 rather than say 
 
 rather than the 
 
 shorter than 
 
 shorter than they 
 
 smoother than 
 
 so many more than 
 
 sooner than 
 
 sooner than a 
 
 sooner than required 
 
 sooner than risk 
 
 sooner than the 
 
 stronger than 
 
 this is better than 
 
 you know better than 
 (you inverted) 
 
 you know more than (you 
 inverted) 
 
THE "N" HOOK. t 239 
 
 454. In three exceptional cases, the n representing than 
 is by some reporters attached to an s circle or an sir loop 
 
 thus: less than ....(.. , faster than.... : ..L , vaster than 
 
 455. To the n hook representing than the circle s may 
 be added when convenient, to represent is, his, has. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 456. Write the following: 
 
 /- better than is , longer than is 
 
 -1 better than his -1 longer than his 
 
 ( better than has I longer than has 
 
 ( farther than is /-more than is 
 
 -| farther than his \ more than his 
 
 * farther than has ' more than has 
 
 ^ harder than is ,- shorter than is 
 
 J harder than his J shorter than his 
 
 I harder than has ( shorter than has 
 
 c higher than is /- smaller than is 
 
 \ higher than his -I smaller than his 
 
 ( higher than has v smaller than has 
 
 , larger than is , smoother than is 
 
 J larger than his J smoother than his 
 
 { larger than has ( smoother than has 
 
 "N" HOOK FOE "BEEN." 
 
 457. Been may be added by the n hook to had,- have and 
 
 Tiave there, thus: have been V;>.., had been.. 4 , have 
 
 there 
 
 *Benn Pitman does not use the hook for this purpose ; nor does 
 Graham, except on have. 
 
240 THE "N" HOOK. 
 
 458. Write the following: 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 could have been 
 could not have been 
 have been 
 have there been 
 he had been* 
 he may have been 
 he may not have been 
 he might not have been 
 he might have been 
 he must have been 
 I cannot have been 
 **I have been 
 I have been received 
 I had been (I. D.) 
 I may not have been 
 I might have been 
 I mus(t) have been 
 it mus(t) have been 
 it should not have been 
 it would have been 
 many hare been 
 may not have been 
 never have been 
 
 must have been 
 nor have there been 
 should not have been 
 such as have been 
 there have been 
 there might have been 
 there must have been 
 they might not have been 
 they must have been 
 we have been acknowledged 
 we have been ready 
 when there have been 
 which should not have been 
 would have been 
 would not have been 
 you cannot have been 
 you have been 
 you have been ready 
 you hare been right 
 you might have been 
 you will have been 
 you know more than 
 enough (you inverted) 
 
 459. The use of the n hook in the expression of nol 
 will be explained in the next chapter, in connection with 
 the half-length principle. 
 
 459^. In a very few phrases, when in follows are, such 
 as we are in, n hook is used by some writers to express in. 
 
 *He should be made downward in this particular case to guai d against 
 confounding the very common phrases he had 6rand Thad been. (See 
 Paragraph 187 and note.) Or he had may be written with the half-length 
 hay in the third position, as explained in a previous note. 
 
 **In this and the next phrase, / have is supposed to be written ac- 
 cording to Benn Pitman. 
 
CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 THE HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 "IT" EXPRESSED BY HALVING. 
 
 460. To a word consisting of, or ending with, a full- 
 length stroke, it may frequently be added by halving such 
 
 stroke. Illustrations: if it,. , until it . , wish it , 
 
 it ...._ . By a circle added to the half-length stroke, 
 
 it may be converted into its, it is, or it has. Thus- - 
 
 may represent ivhen its, when it is, or when it has. The 
 stroke thus halved to add it may have an initial or a final 
 
 hook; thus, over it . upon it ,....->>...., from /,*.. J3u. 
 
 461. By it must not be expressed by half-length & stand- 
 ing alone, nor which it by half-length chay standing alone, 
 as these strokes, when thus detached, might be mistaken 
 respectively for all or on. Nor should the half-length chay 
 be used for which it at the end of a phrase, as in the phrase 
 
 by which it , because the half-length chay in such a 
 
 case might be mistaken for the tick the. 
 
242 
 
 HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 462. In the following exercise, it is to be represented 
 by halving the last or only stroke of the preceding word; 
 and in some cases it is converted into its, it is, or it has by 
 the addition of the s circle: 
 
 at it 
 
 at its 
 
 during it 
 
 during its 
 
 during its necessary 
 
 during its only 
 
 during its own 
 
 during its time (tm) 
 
 had it 
 
 had it appeared 
 
 nad it been 
 
 had it left 
 
 had it made 
 
 had it received 
 
 had it recognized 
 
 had it represented 
 
 had it something 
 
 had it that 
 
 had it this 
 
 have it 
 
 I must have it 
 
 I shall have it 
 
 could have it 
 
 I will have it done 
 
 if it 
 
 if it be 
 
 if it be necessary 
 
 if it did 
 
 if it does 
 
 if it does not 
 
 if it had 
 
 if it had (to) be 
 
 if it has not been 
 ( if it is 
 i if it has 
 
 if it has been 
 
 if it is not done 
 
 if it is not necessary 
 
 if it is not so 
 
 if it please your Honor 
 
 if it were 
 
 if it were only 
 
 make it 
 
 make it clear 
 
 make it necessary 
 
 make it plain 
 
 I may make it 
 
 if they make it 
 
 over it 
 
 over its 
 
 over its own 
 
 take it 
 
 take it down 
 
 cannot take it 
 
 I take it 
 
 should take it 
 
 I think it (think it should 
 be written on the 
 
 ' line to distinguish it 
 from thought) 
 
 I think it is 
 
 I think it is not 
 
HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 243 
 
 I think it may be 
 I think it mus (t) be 
 I think it mus (t) have 
 
 been 
 
 through it 
 through its 
 until it 
 until it can 
 until it can be 
 until it is 
 until it is done 
 until it is impossible 
 until it is known 
 until it may be 
 until it makes 
 until it must be 
 until it should be 
 upon it 
 upon its 
 depend upon it 
 was it (see Paragraph 391) 
 was it necessary 
 was it never 
 was it not 
 was it not seen 
 was it reasonable 
 was it right 
 was it said 
 was it supposed 
 was it true 
 when it 
 when it is 
 when its 
 when it is done 
 when it is necessary 
 when it is not 
 when it is time (tm) 
 
 when it shall be 
 
 when it was 
 
 whenever it 
 
 whenever it has been 
 
 whenever it is chosen 
 
 whenever it is done 
 
 whenever it is necessary 
 
 where it is 
 
 where it is necessary 
 
 where it is not 
 
 where it is now 
 
 where it is known 
 
 by which it appears 
 
 by which it can 
 
 by which it is 
 
 by which it is not 
 
 by which it may not 
 
 by which it may be 
 
 by which it mus(t) be 
 
 by which it was 
 
 by which it would have 
 
 for which it is not 
 
 in which it is 
 
 in which it has been 
 
 of which it has been 
 
 of which it may be 
 
 to which it is 
 
 with which it is not 
 
 with which it was 
 
 with which it would be 
 
 wish it 
 
 I wish it 
 
 I wish it could 
 
 I wish it understood 
 
 I wish it had 
 
 I wish it would 
 
 to whom it may 
 
244 
 
 HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 to whom it may be to whom it mus (t) be 
 
 to whom it may (con)cern to whom it will be 
 
 463. By the use of "fictitious primitives" for of, is, as 
 and were (see Paragraphs 108,274), we obtain the following 
 
 facile phrases: of it '... , is it , as it or has it 
 
 ) , were it 
 
 c 
 
 of all it .... _ 
 
 To these the circle 
 
 may be added, changing it to its, it has, or it is. 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 464. Write the following: 
 
 of all it 
 
 of all its 
 
 of all its own 
 
 of all it is now 
 
 of all it has been 
 
 of it 
 
 of its 
 
 of its own 
 
 of its information 
 
 of its introduction 
 
 of its necessity 
 
 of its passage 
 
 is it (for another way of 
 writing is it, see Para- 
 graph 390) 
 
 is it the 
 
 is it better 
 
 is it important 
 
 is it impossible 
 
 is it known 
 
 is it likely 
 
 is it necessary 
 
 is it never 
 
 is it not 
 
 is it now 
 
 is it observed 
 
 is it reasonable 
 
 is it right 
 
 is it wrong 
 
 is it so 
 
 is it so much (m, ch.) 
 
 is it supposed 
 
 is it to be 
 
 is it true 
 
 is it understood 
 
 is it you 
 
 is it you (r) right 
 
 as it (this phrase, if writ- 
 ten with the half-length z, 
 is best written in th 
 third position to distin- 
 guish it from was it in 
 the second. (See Para- 
 graphs 390, 391.) 
 
HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 245 
 
 as it came has it become 
 
 as it can has it been 
 
 as it could be has it come 
 
 as it is has it happened 
 
 as it may be has it made 
 
 as it must has it many 
 
 as it might has it never 
 
 as it might not has it not 
 
 as it requires has it not been 
 
 as it seems were it 
 
 as it should be were it not 
 
 as it sometimes were it necessary 
 
 as it was were it not necessary 
 has it (see remark on as were it known 
 
 it) were it never 
 
 "TO" EXPRESSED BY HALVING. 
 
 465. In a few cases the last or only stroke of a word 
 
 may be halved to add to; thus, able^^\. ., able to , S. ...,., . 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 466. In the following exercise, to is expressed by halv- 
 ing the preceding stroke: 
 
 able to I shall not be able to 
 
 be able to should be able to 
 
 might not be able to you should be able to 
 
 you may be able to we are able to 
 
 I shall not be able to when I am able to 
 
 he is able to you are able to 
 
 I may be able to you will be able to 
 
 "WOULD" EXPRESSED BY HALVING. 
 
 467. Certain single strokes representing respectively 
 it, which, such, she, they, there and they are, may be writ- 
 
246 HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 ten half length in the third position to add would; thus, 
 
 it would-, -, such would ...^ ., they would ...... 
 
 there would f _. 
 
 468. In the opinion of the author, would in these cases 
 is best expressed in the ordinary way, thus, it would . ..I,.. 
 
 which would ^^ SUC h would. ..^......, she would *... 
 
 there would .../... ~. In the phrase they would, the ordi- 
 nary sign for would, which does not conveniently join, may, 
 without risk of illegibility, be inverted, according to the 
 principle already explained in Paragraphs 298-9. Or in this 
 particular case, the half-length may be resorted to. 
 
 469. If the word would be uniformly expressed by the 
 "brief way'' character, and not by half-lengthing, the half- 
 length device, instead of representing in these cases both 
 would and had, will, of course, have but a single significa- 
 tion had as explained in Paragraph 471. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 470. In the following exercise, would may be expressed, 
 if preferred, by writing the preceding word half-length in 
 the third position: 
 
 it would it would sanction 
 
 it would be it would be required 
 
 it would leave it would be received 
 
 it would make she would 
 
 it would receive she would be 
 
 it would retain she would never 
 
HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 247 
 
 she would insist there would now 
 
 she would observe they would 
 
 she would say they would decide 
 
 such would they would do 
 
 such would be they would deny 
 
 such would require they would make 
 
 such would make which would 
 
 such would never which would be 
 
 such would now which would be necessary 
 
 such would remain which would be left 
 
 there would which would be required 
 
 there would be which would be received 
 
 there would go which would make 
 
 there would never which would receive 
 
 there would necessarily which would sanction 
 
 "HAD" EXPRESSED BY HALVING. 
 
 471. The words named in Paragraph 467, and also had 
 and have, may be written half-length in the third position 
 
 to add had; thus, it had wMch ha(l ........... ^ such had 
 
 ,...^e ... they had ......... , there had ....... _.. . , ...... , she had 
 
 /. ., -have had .,_ ........ , had 7iad . ...... ..--.-. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 In the following exercise, had is to be expressed by 
 writing the preceding word half-length in the third position: 
 
 it had it had sometime 
 
 it had been it had such 
 
 it had once it had sure(ly) 
 
 it had only it had the 
 
 it had some it had their own 
 
248 
 
 HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 it had theirs 
 
 it had to be 
 
 it had your own 
 
 had had 
 
 had had many 
 
 had had reason 
 
 had had some 
 
 had had something 
 
 had had occasion 
 
 had had trouble 
 
 have had 
 
 have had the 
 
 have had information 
 
 have had sufficient 
 
 have had time (tm) 
 
 have had none 
 
 have had several 
 
 have had such 
 
 she had 
 
 she had been 
 
 she had better 
 
 she had gone 
 
 she had made 
 
 she had never 
 
 she had not 
 
 she had observed 
 
 she had received 
 
 she had said 
 
 she had (to) be 
 
 she had (to) say 
 
 such had 
 
 such had a 
 
 such had the 
 
 such had been 
 
 such had become 
 
 such had many 
 
 such had only 
 
 such had (to) be 
 such had received 
 there had 
 there had been 
 there had better 
 there had never 
 there had no doubt 
 there had rarely 
 they had 
 they had chosen 
 they had done 
 they had many 
 they had only 
 they had recently 
 they had several 
 they had such 
 they had their 
 they had this 
 which had 
 which had a 
 which had the 
 which had become 
 which had been 
 which had occasion 
 which had once 
 which had only 
 which had received 
 which had somehow 
 which had something 
 which had sometimes 
 which had such 
 which had sure(ly) 
 which had the 
 which had their own 
 which had (to) be 
 which had (to) make 
 which had (to) say 
 
HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 249 
 
 472. Have had may generally be attached with safety 
 to a preceding stroke, although thereby it loses positional 
 
 V 
 distinction. Examples: I have had ..... , may have had 
 
 r .<rr>^.. _.*_. , you have had the^.--<\- ...... 
 
 "NOT," BY HALVING AND THE "N" HOOK. 
 
 4t3. To a full-length stroke without a final attachment, 
 not may be added by halving the stroke and adding the n 
 
 hook; thus, if not ,... ........ ^ not ..... J. ....... > had n ot....^ ...... , 
 
 J 
 
 may not ^ .^.. M ~be net ., , JOill not, . (usually 
 
 written above the line) ; are not ~^\ /> 
 
 ' -"-r-... Of .- f. .~ 
 
 was not ^ ...... ,^ve not,,..^, ,were not ..r..</ > we will 
 
 not - we ma y n t. i> we are not . . .., they 
 
 C T, ** 
 
 will not' 'I think not _ ; why not. (This use- 
 ful phrase may be thus represented by "reporting license." 
 (See Paragraphs 111-112.) 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 474. In the following exercise, not is to be expressed 
 oy halving the preceding stroke and adding an n hook: 
 
250 
 
 HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 am not 
 
 am not to be 
 
 am not responsible 
 
 I am not 
 
 I am not to be 
 
 I am not responsible 
 
 I am not going 
 
 I am not attempting 
 
 are not (are upward or 
 
 downward) 
 
 are not now (r downward) 
 are not known 
 are not asked 
 are not assumed 
 such as are not 
 who are not 
 those who are not 
 you are not (r upward) 
 which you are not 
 if you are not 
 you are not ready 
 you are not received 
 you are not recognized 
 be not 
 
 be not deceived 
 if it be not 
 if it be not necessary 
 if it be not known 
 if it be not so much 
 if there be not 
 do not 
 do not think 
 do not know 
 do not now 
 do not ask 
 do not usually 
 do not possess 
 
 I do not (I. D.) 
 
 I do not know 
 
 I do not now 
 
 I do not possess 
 
 I do not think 
 
 I do not say 
 
 I do not see (vocalize see) 
 
 we do not (I. D.) 
 
 we do not ask 
 
 we do not know 
 
 we do not say 
 
 we do not think 
 
 we do not wish 
 
 do not 
 
 you (inverted) do not (I. D.) 
 
 you do not ask 
 
 you do not intend 
 
 you do not know 
 
 you do not now 
 
 you do not possess 
 
 you do not think 
 
 they do not. ( They had not 
 would take a different 
 form, as explained later 
 in Paragraphs 475, 477, 
 and they did not would 
 be distinguished by writ- 
 ing did not separatelyj 
 
 if they do not 
 
 if they do not know 
 
 had not 
 
 had not been 
 
 had not asked 
 
 had not thought 
 
 had not time 
 
 had not known 
 
 had not intended 
 
HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 251 
 
 *I had not (I. D.) 
 
 I had not asked 
 
 I had not time 
 
 I had not the 
 
 I had not necessarily 
 
 we had not (I. D.) 
 
 we had not asked 
 
 we had not known 
 
 we had not intended 
 
 we had not so many 
 
 have not 
 
 have not received 
 
 have not now 
 
 have not asked 
 
 have not so much 
 
 I have not 
 
 I have not been 
 
 I have not observed 
 
 I have not received 
 
 you have not 
 
 you have not been 
 
 you have not now 
 
 may not 
 
 may not be 
 
 may not ask 
 
 may not receive 
 
 may not go 
 
 may not have 
 
 we may not 
 
 we may not be 
 
 we may not be able 
 
 we may not be sure 
 
 we may not have the 
 
 we may not have their 
 
 it may not 
 
 it may not be 
 
 it may not have 
 
 which may not 
 
 I fear you may not 
 
 as it may not be 
 
 as it may not go 
 
 such as may not 
 
 such as may not receive 
 
 such as may not be aware 
 
 he may not 
 
 he may not go 
 
 he may not come 
 
 you may not be 
 
 you may not know 
 
 you may not attempt 
 
 there may not be 
 
 you may not know 
 
 you may not attempt 
 
 there may not be 
 
 all may not be 
 
 all may not have 
 
 all may not have their 
 
 they may not come 
 
 they may not go 
 
 they may not be able 
 
 they may not be sure 
 
 they may not have 
 
 think not 
 
 I think not 
 
 I think not now 
 
 was not 
 
 was not shown 
 
 was not taken 
 
 *H<> liail nof must be distinguished by writing the lie tick downward 
 or by adding the ordinary si^n for not to half-length hay in the third po- 
 sition, which, although not recognized by Graham or Benn Pitman, is a 
 safe and useful sign for fie liail. ^^- 
 
252 
 
 HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 was not doing 
 
 was not thinking 
 
 he was not 
 
 who was not 
 
 I was not (/ downward in 
 
 the direction of chay) 
 we are not 
 we are not to be 
 we are not received 
 we are not recognized 
 we are not many 
 if we are not 
 I think we are not 
 when we are not 
 where we are not 
 were not 
 
 were not received 
 were not making 
 were not many 
 were not going 
 we were not 
 if it were not 
 all were not ready 
 they were not 
 if they were not right 
 why not 
 why not ask 
 why not do 
 why not have 
 why not insist 
 why not now 
 why not say 
 why not take 
 will not (always written in 
 
 the first position) 
 will not attempt 
 will not ask 
 
 will not be 
 
 will not be ready 
 
 will not become 
 
 will not do 
 
 will not have 
 
 will not obtain 
 
 will not receive 
 
 will not remain 
 
 will not say 
 
 will not say so 
 
 will not make 
 
 will not be supposed 
 
 all will not 
 
 all will not be 
 
 all will not say 
 
 all will not ask 
 
 we will not 
 
 we will not be 
 
 we will not be responsible 
 
 we will not have 
 
 I will not say 
 
 I will not ask 
 
 I will not do 
 
 I will not receive 
 
 I will not remain 
 
 I will not say 
 
 you will not 
 
 you will not be 
 
 you will not have 
 
 you will not make 
 
 you will not ask 
 
 if you will not be 
 
 for you will not be 
 
 but you will not be 
 
 I fear you will not be 
 
 I think you will not be 
 
 of which you will not be 
 
HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 253 
 
 all will not receive this will not be (will not 
 
 they will not (express will downward) 
 
 by the I hook) this will not do 
 
 they will not be it will not be ( express will 
 
 I know they will not be by the I hook) 
 
 (See Paragraph 110) you will not be 
 
 EXPRESSION OF "NOT" BY N HOOK. 
 
 475. In certain cases, the expression of not by n hook 
 and half-lengthing is not practicable, because the stroke 
 to which not is to be attached has already been halved. 
 Hence the following rule: To the half-length stroke repre- 
 senting did and to any stroke which has been halved to add 
 had or would, we may add not by an n hook, thus: did 
 
 not _ ...... ,., ( u would not,...^. ..... ... which would not ...... 
 
 J 
 
 they had not-- - -, there would not .......... 
 
 In these cases many writers prefer, as simpler and clear- 
 er, such phrases as the following: it would not __ 1 J( 
 
 would not 
 
 , ./. ....... there would not ....... / 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 476. In the following exercise, not is expressed by the n 
 hook: 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 did not did not say so 
 
 did not have I did not anticipate 
 
 did not know I did not ask 
 
 did not intend I did not know 
 
 did not think that I did not intend 
 
254 HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 I did not think you did not say that 
 
 I did not say you did not have there 
 
 I did not see (vocalize we did not 
 
 see) we did not ask 
 you (inverted) did not (L we did not have 
 
 D.) we did not think 
 
 you did not ask that we did not know 
 
 you did not know we did not say 
 
 you did not think we did not say there 
 
 477. In the phrases there did not and they did not, the 
 pen must be lifted, in order to give the phrase did not its 
 regular position. If the tnree words were joined, did not 
 might be confounded with do not or had not. No distinc- 
 tion between they do not and they had not is necessary, aa 
 .the context will make clear the words intended. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 478. In the following phrases in which would or had 
 has been added to it, ^vh^ch, they, there and such, by halv- 
 ing, not is appended by attaching the n hook to the half- 
 Jength stroke: 
 
 it had not she would not 
 
 it had not assumed she would not listen 
 
 it had not been she would not think 
 
 it had not done such had not 
 
 it had not taken such had not thought 
 
 it would not such had not visited 
 
 it would not be such had not enough 
 
 it would not become there would not 
 
 it would not have there would not be 
 
 it would not possess there had not 
 
 it would not take there had not been 
 
 she had not they had not 
 
 she had not thought they had not been 
 
 she had not this they had not become 
 
 she had not then they had not had 
 
HALF-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 255 
 
 they 
 they 
 they 
 they 
 they 
 they 
 they 
 they 
 they 
 they 
 they 
 they 
 they 
 
 479. 
 also to 
 
 had not observed 
 had not understood 
 would not 
 would not answer 
 would not be 
 would not become 
 would not do 
 would not have 
 would not know 
 would not necessarily 
 would not observe 
 would not say 
 would not take 
 
 they would not understand 
 which had not 
 which had not been 
 which had not enough 
 which had not now 
 which had not information 
 which had not necessarily 
 which would not 
 which would not answer 
 which would not necessa- 
 rily 
 
 which would not now 
 which would not insist 
 
 won 
 
 According to the Graham system, not may be added 
 or or but by the n hook. (See Paragraphs 234, 238.) 
 
CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 THE "F-V HOOK." 
 
 "HAVE" AND "TO HAVE" EXPRESSED BY THE "F-V HOOK." 
 480. In many cases, have or to have may be expressed 
 
 bv a hook, thus: which have </ , such have-.b^Jtwitt 
 have... ..,,li,,.. which will have ^ , much will have / 
 hope (to) have. .\~--said (to) have. ..\i which are (to) have 
 
 ^._c. His, as or us, -Allowing have, may be expressed 
 
 by a circle written inside the hook, thus: ivhich have his 
 
 or which have us.-~.&~,...., it will have his or -It will have us 
 
 I ... 
 
 481. In the following exercise, have is to be expressed 
 by the f-v hook, and his, as or us following have, is to be 
 written by a circle inside the hook: 
 
THE "F-V" HOOK. 
 
 257 
 
 it will have 
 it will have a 
 it will have the 
 it will have his 
 it will have no 
 it will have now 
 it will have this 
 it will have necessarily 
 it will have done 
 it will have been 
 it will have to be 
 ca(n) have* 
 ca(n) have a 
 ca(n) have the 
 ca(n) have his 
 ca(n) have nothing 
 ca(n) have received 
 which have 
 which have a 
 which have become 
 which have been 
 which have chosen 
 which have done 
 which have no 
 which have not 
 which have not been 
 which have never 
 which have now 
 which have taken 
 which have the 
 which have us 
 which have his 
 which have this 
 which have that 
 which have necessarily 
 
 which will have 
 which will have a 
 which will have done 
 which will have his 
 which will have his own 
 which will have this 
 which will have that 
 which will have the 
 which will have them 
 which will have no 
 which will have been 
 which will have never 
 which will have now 
 which will have necessarily 
 which will have nothing 
 much will have 
 much will have been 
 much will have to be 
 much will have now 
 such have 
 such have his 
 such have been 
 such have never 
 such have none 
 such have now 
 such have to be 
 such will have 
 such will have a 
 such will have the 
 such will have been 
 such will have done 
 such will have none 
 such will have this 
 such will have that 
 such have the 
 
 "The writing of can by the simple stroke k without the hook, is sanc- 
 tioned by Isaac Pitman and Munson, not by Benn Pitman or Graham. 
 
258 
 
 THE "F-V" HOOK. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 482. In the following exercise, to have is to be expressed 
 by the v hook: 
 
 hope (to) have 
 hope (to) have a 
 hope (to) have the 
 hope (to) have his 
 hope (to) have enough 
 hope (to) have none 
 hope (to) have better suc- 
 cess 
 
 hope (to) have informa- 
 tion 
 
 hope (to) have no more 
 I hope (to) have (I. D.) 
 I hope (to) have enough 
 I hope (to) have the 
 I hope (to) have a 
 I hope (to) have informa- 
 tion 
 
 I hope (to) have another 
 said (to) have 
 said (to) have information 
 said (to) have another 
 said (to) have now 
 said (to) have been 
 said (to) have known 
 said (to) have obtained 
 said (to) have finished 
 is said (to) havetaken (be- 
 gin phrase with double 
 circle) 
 
 is said (to) have informa- 
 tion 
 is said (to) have included 
 
 is said (to) have none 
 is said (to) have shown 
 who was said (to) have 
 may be said (to) have 
 I may be said (to) have 
 you may be said (to) have 
 they may be said (to) have 
 we may be said (to) have 
 cannot be said (to) have 
 will be said (to) have 
 should be said (to) have 
 never said (to) have 
 it is said (to) have (double 
 
 circle following it) 
 we are said (to) have 
 they are said (to) have 
 who is said (to) have 
 (one s omitted. See Par- 
 agraph 159.) 
 
 such may be said (to) have 
 you are said (to) have 
 was said (to) have 
 I was said (to) have (I 
 downward in the direc- 
 tion of chay) 
 he was said (to) have 
 try (to) have 
 we will try (to) have 
 we may try (to) have (I. 
 
 D.) 
 
 I try (to) have (I. D.) 
 you will try (to) have 
 
THE "F-V" HOOK. 
 
 259 
 
 which are (to) have which are (to) have infor- 
 
 which are (to) have anoth- mation 
 
 er which are (to) have noth- 
 
 which are (to) have ing 
 
 enough which are (to) have this 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 483. In the following phrases to have is to be added 
 by means of the v hook to which ivere and such were, thus: 
 
 which were to have ,.,. .2- . 
 
 6 
 
 (See Paragraphs 371-373.) 
 which were to have a 
 which were to have the 
 which were to have anoth- 
 er 
 
 which were to have an- 
 swered 
 
 which were to have been 
 which were to have done 
 which were to have this 
 which were to have enough 
 which were to have infor- 
 mation 
 
 which were to have knowl- 
 edge 
 
 which were to have taken 
 which were to have that 
 which were to have this 
 such were to have 
 
 such were to have a 
 such were to have an- 
 other 
 
 such were to have answer- 
 ed 
 
 such were to have been 
 such were to have enough 
 such were to have entered 
 such were to have this 
 such were to have informa- 
 tion 
 
 such were to have knowl- 
 edge 
 
 such were to have none 
 such were to have noticed 
 such were to have that 
 such were to have the 
 
 such were to have this 
 "OUGHT TO HAVE." 
 
 484. The consonant stroke t, in the first position, is 
 used in the Benn Pitman system, as a "fictitious primitive" 
 for ought, in order to form certain phrases, especially the 
 phrases ought to have and its derivatives. Ought to have 
 may be so expressed in writing the following: 
 
260 THE "F-V" HOOK. 
 
 485. EXERCISE. 
 
 ought to have this ought to have information 
 
 ought to have that ought to have been 
 
 ought to have none ought to have become 
 
 ought to have now ought to have found 
 
 ought to have shown ought to have information 
 
 486. It, which and such, in the first position, with the v 
 hook attached, may be used to represent respectively, it 
 ought to have, which ought to have, and such ought to have; 
 
 thus: it ought to have ....,.,.., which ought to have ^. 
 
 f 
 
 such ought to have In these cases ought is neith- 
 er written nor indicated, unless we may regard it as being 
 indicated by the mere position of the hooked stroke. (It 
 will be observed that it ought to have is in the Benn Pit- 
 man system written in precisely the same way as ought to 
 have. In the. Graham system, the latter phrase is written by 
 adding to the ordinary sign for ought the v hook.) 
 
 487. These three signs are recommended by both Gra- 
 ham and Benn Pitman, and though somewhat anomalous, 
 
 ^fc 
 
 they afford when well learned a convenient means of writ- 
 ing three very common and useful phrases. 
 
 488. EXERCISE. 
 
 it ought to have it ought to have chosen 
 
 it ought to have the it ought to have taken 
 
 it ought to have his it ought to have become 
 
 it ought to have none it ought to have gone 
 
 it ought to have nothing it ought to have shown 
 
 it ought to have enough such ought to have 
 
 it ought to have done such ought 'to have the 
 
 it ought to have been such ought to have his 
 
THE "F-V" HOOK. 
 
 261 
 
 such ought to have finished 
 such ought to have nothing 
 such ought to have become 
 such ought to have been 
 such ought to have done 
 which ought to have 
 which ought to have be- 
 come 
 
 which ought to have been 
 which ought to have chos- 
 en 
 
 which ought to have done 
 which ought to have finish- 
 ed 
 
 which ought to have his 
 which ought to have the 
 
 "WOULD HAVE." 
 
 489. Would have may be added to which, it and such 
 by writing the consonant stroke in the third position and 
 
 adding the v hook, thus: it would have I , which 
 
 would have 
 
 , such would have ^... 
 
 ,. . This 
 
 rather arbitrary method of representing would have is au- 
 thorized by both Graham and Benn Pitman, but is re- 
 jected in practice by many writers, even of those systems, 
 because would have following it, which and such, can be 
 readily and very clearly expressed by joining the ordinary 
 word-signs for would and have. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 it would 
 it would 
 it would 
 it would 
 it would 
 it would 
 it would 
 it would 
 it would 
 it would 
 it would 
 it would 
 
 have 
 have a 
 have the 
 have another 
 have been 
 have found 
 have nothing 
 have taken 
 have that 
 have them 
 have this 
 have to be done 
 
 such would have 
 such would have been 
 such would have his 
 such would have us 
 such would have taken 
 such would have the 
 such would have them 
 such would have to be done 
 such would have to be 
 
 found 
 
 which would have 
 which would have a 
 
262 THE "F-V" HOOK. 
 
 which would have another which would have this 
 
 which would have his which would have to be 
 which would have us done 
 
 which would have that which would have to be 
 which would have them made 
 
 "HAVE HAD" OB "HAVE IT." 
 
 490. A full-length stroke to which an f-v hook has been 
 attached to express have or to have may be made half-length 
 
 to add had or it; thus which have /. t which have 
 
 had c <!.,..,, ought to have '........ , ought to have had or 
 
 b P 
 ought to have it , , it will have ,, b , it will 
 
 have had or it will have it~. .. C_, it would have L. 
 
 it would have it or it would have had 
 
 lj 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 491. In the following phrases, which have 
 becomes by halving which have had or which have it ..A 
 
 which have had which have had informa- 
 
 which have had no tion 
 
 which have had enough which have had knowledge 
 
THE "P-V" HOOK. 263 
 
 which have had nothing which have had the recog- 
 
 which have had the most nition 
 
 which have had the resolu- which have it 
 
 tion which have its 
 
 492. In the following phrases, such have be- 
 
 comes by halving such have had or such have it 
 
 such have had such have had nothing 
 
 such have had another such have had no means 
 
 such have had enough such have had no time (tm) 
 
 such have had information such have had notice 
 
 such have had no knowl- such have it 
 
 edge such have its 
 
 493. In the following phrases, which will have &. ..... .. 
 
 becomes by halving which will have had or which will have 
 
 which will have had which will have had no 
 which will have had anoth- more 
 
 er which will have had no part 
 
 which will have had any- which will have had neces- 
 
 thing sarily 
 
 which will have had enough which will have it 
 
 which will have had none which will have its 
 
 494. In the following phrases, it will have 
 
264 
 
 THE "F-V" HOOK. 
 
 becomes by halving, it will have had or it ivill have it C ., 
 
 it will have had it will have had informa- 
 
 it will have had the tion 
 
 it will have had enough it will have had no notice 
 
 it will have had knowledge it will have it 
 
 it will have had notice it will have its 
 
 495. In the following phrases, such will have ...&._ 
 becomes by halving, such icill have had or such will have it 
 
 such will have had 
 
 such will have had another 
 
 such will have had infor- 
 
 mation 
 such will have had no time 
 
 such will have had the 
 
 pleasure 
 
 such will have had various 
 such will have it 
 such will have its 
 
 496. In the following phrases, it would have 
 becomes by halving it would have had or it would have it 
 
 it would have had 
 it would have had a 
 it would have had another 
 it would have had enough 
 it would have had knowledge 
 it would have had no in- 
 formation 
 
 it would have had none 
 it would have had nothing 
 it would have had no sucli 
 
 thing 
 
 it would have it 
 it would have it known 
 it would have its 
 
THE "F-V" HOOK. 265 
 
 497. In the following phrases, which would have ..~./.-~~. 
 
 Lf 
 
 becomes by halving, which would have had or which would 
 
 have it .... 
 t 
 
 which would have had which would have had no 
 
 which would have had a more reason 
 
 which would have had which would have had noth- 
 
 enough ing 
 
 which would have had in- which would have had time 
 
 formation which would have it 
 
 which would have had the which would have its- 
 
 498. In the following phrases, such would have .../?. .... 
 
 L/ 
 
 becomes by halving such would have had or such would 
 have it '# ' 
 
 such would have had such would have had tes- 
 
 such would have had a timony 
 
 such would have had an- such would have had time 
 
 other such would have it 
 
 such would have had such would have its 
 
 enough 
 
 499. In the following phrases, hope to have ,...\^ .......... 
 
 becomes by halving hope to have had or hope to have it 
 
 hope to have had hope to have had informa- 
 hope to have had another tion 
 
 hope to have had anything hope to have had no more 
 
 hope 4o have had enough hope to have had nothing 
 
266 THE "F-V" HOOK. 
 
 hope to have it hope to have it now 
 
 hope to have it entered hope to have its 
 500. In the following phrases, the Benn Pitman sign 
 
 for ought to nave ......... - becomes by halving ought to 
 
 have had or ought to have it 
 
 ought to have had mation 
 
 ought to have had a ought to have had knowl- 
 
 ought to have had anoth- edge 
 
 er ought to have had notice 
 
 ought to have had enough ought to have had testi- 
 ought to have had infor- mony 
 
 501. In the following phrases, said to have 
 becomes by halving said to have had or said to have it 
 
 .t : 
 
 said to have had said to have had no such 
 
 said to have had enough thing 
 
 said to have had informa- said to have had time 
 
 tion said to have it 
 
 *3aid to have had no more said to have its 
 
 502. In the following phrases, which were to have 
 
 ,^,...2..* becomes by halving which were to have had or 
 which were to have it *--*; 
 
 which were td have had which were to have had 
 
 which were to have had a enough 
 which were to have had which were to have it 
 another which were to have its 
 
THE "F-V" HOOK. 267 
 
 which were to have had which were to have had no 
 nothing which were to have had it 
 
 503. In the following phrases, such were to have ~ ? , 
 becomes by halving such were to have had or such were to 
 
 have it ..... -a ...... ; 
 
 such were to have had such were to have had in- 
 such were to have had an- formation 
 
 other such were to have had 
 such were to have had any- nothing 
 
 thing such were to have had 
 such were to have had time (tm) 
 
 enough 
 
 "OF" EXPRESSED BY "v" HOOK. 
 
 504. Of, medial or final, may be expressed by the v hook; 
 thus: out of, ........ I ........ ... , each of, ............... , in receipt of 
 
 Q-^f 
 
 L...,, another side of ,.s~- -*3 -., aware of 
 
 time of day ~V His or us following of may be ex- 
 pressed by writing a circle inside the hook, thus: each of us 
 
 .,... , much of his,.-./- , out of his.. I 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 505. In the following exercise, of is to be expressed by 
 the v hook; and his or us following of is to be attached to 
 the hook by a circle: 
 
268 
 
 THE "F-V" HOOK. 
 
 a number of cases 
 a number of his 
 a number of us 
 ahead of another 
 ahead of time (tm) 
 another side of 
 aware of 
 aware of his 
 aware of many 
 aware of most 
 "city of Annapolis 
 city of Newark 
 city of Newport 
 danger of delay 
 danger of fire 
 danger of his 
 danger of that 
 danger of this 
 danger of those 
 day of January 
 day of June 
 day of July 
 day of October 
 day of November 
 each of 
 each of a 
 each of his 
 each of us 
 each of his own 
 each of them 
 each of this 
 each of which 
 each of your 
 great number of 
 
 I am aware of 
 in receipt of them 
 in sight of (I. D.) 
 inside of 
 
 it is said of another 
 it is said of us 
 lack of information 
 lack of knowledge 
 much of 
 much of his 
 much of his own 
 much of that 
 much of this 
 much of your own 
 number of bills 
 number of books 
 number of his 
 number of us 
 number of names 
 number of packages 
 number of necessary 
 number of pages 
 number of papers 
 out of 
 out of a 
 out of the 
 out of fashion 
 out of his 
 out of nothing 
 out of patience 
 out of this 
 out of that 
 out of time (tm) 
 out of town 
 
 *O/ following City is often omitted and the next word joined, leav- 
 ing of to be supplied by context. 
 
THE "F-V" HOOK. 
 
 269 
 
 out of temper 
 
 outside of that 
 
 right of another 
 
 right of action 
 
 right of possession 
 
 right side of them 
 
 state of decay 
 
 state of neglect 
 
 *State of New York 
 
 State of New Jersey 
 
 State of Texas 
 
 such are of 
 
 such are of no account 
 
 such of 
 
 such of a 
 
 such of his 
 
 such of us 
 
 such of his neighbors 
 
 such of those 
 
 such of them 
 such of your own 
 such were of this class 
 such were of this kind 
 time of day 
 time of night 
 time of payment 
 which are ef 
 which are of another 
 which are of bes(t) make 
 which are of bes(t) mate- 
 rial 
 
 which are of necessity 
 which are of no account 
 which are of no value 
 which are of that class 
 which are of those classes 
 which are of this class 
 which are of this kind 
 
 "IT" OB "ITS" EXPRESSED BY HALVING. 
 
 506. A full-length stroke to which of has been attached 
 by the v hook, may be made half-length to add it, which 
 may be converted into its by adding a circle to the hook, 
 
 thus: out of 
 
 507. 
 
 ., , out of it , , out of its v> 
 
 U \s> 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Write the following: 
 
 aware of it 
 each of its 
 much of it 
 much of its 
 out of it 
 
 out of its 
 such of it 
 such of its 
 said of it 
 said of its 
 
 * O/ following State is often omitted, and the next word joined leav- 
 ing of to b supplied by context. (See Paragraph 657.) 
 
\ 
 
 270 . THE "F-V" HOOK. 
 
 "v" HOOK ON "ITH" AND "THE." 
 
 508. The large final hook on the consonant strokes ith 
 and the is theoretically a shun hook; but as such it is use- 
 less, there being no word in the English language which 
 f or the use of such a hook upon these two strokes. 
 some authors (including Graham, but not Benn Pit- 
 man) treat the large final hook in these two cases as an 
 f-v hook, and utilize it to represent of on ith, and have on 
 
 the, thus obtaining the useful phrases think of. . __ 
 and they have ,.\j... , which become still further useful 
 
 in their various combinations, as 7 think of an- 
 
 .other ....^Trr^T .. , they have never been 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 509. The following exercise has been prepared for the 
 
 -use of those who wish to introduce into their practice this 
 
 method of representing of and have: 
 I think of we think of objecting 
 
 I think of answering when you (inverted) think 
 
 I think of his of 
 
 I will think of another will they think of 
 
 I will think of his they have 
 
 I will think of nobody they have a 
 I will think of no such they have another 
 
 thing they have attempted 
 
 we think of they have become 
 
 we think of answering they have done 
 
 we think of doing they have had 
 
 we think of going they have enough 
 
 we think of nothing they have finished 
 
THE "F-V" HOOK. 271 
 
 they have found as soon as they have 
 
 they have information enough 
 
 they have no knowledge they will have 
 
 they have nothing they will have no time 
 
 will they have time(t, m) (tm) 
 
 will they have known they will have 4 another 
 
 as soon as they have chance 
 
 510. In analogy with which ought to have ... 
 
 etc., (see Paragraph 486), we may write they ought to have 
 
 \J 
 
 : and in analogy with which would have ../.. eiCt 
 
 (see Paragraph 488), we may write they would have C < - 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 511. Write the following: 
 
 they ought to have they would have denied 
 
 they ought to have another they would have done 
 
 they ought to have heen they would have entered 
 
 they ought to have enjoyed they would have finished 
 
 they ought to have infor- they would have gone 
 
 mation they would have kept 
 
 they ought to have insist- they would have known 
 
 ed they would have no such 
 
 they ought to have seen they would have nothing 
 
 they would have they would have notice 
 
 they would have a they would have seen 
 
 they would have answered they would have taken 
 
 "V" HOOK ON TICKS. 
 
 512. The attaching of the f-v hook to tick word-signs 
 (as taught hv Mr rtrafrjyn^ to express have or of, as in 
 the phrases all of., to lia-ve. has been fully explained in 
 Paragraphs 234, 237. 
 
CHAPTER XX. 
 
 THE "N CURL." 
 
 513. The initial n hook (otherwise called the "in hook" 
 or the "in curl") is used in word-writing to express the 
 syllables in, un, or en at the beginning of such words as 
 
 Leu ^ 
 , , unstrung - .[^, -and enslave ./o....V_ 
 
 In phrase-writing the "in curl" or "in hook" represents only 
 the word in. The circle following the "curl" expresses 
 
 sometimes the s beginning the next word, as in sober >.._\ .... 
 
 T 
 
 in stronf l^^.... In other phrases, fche hook and accom- 
 panying circle may represent the words in his or in as; 
 
 thus: in his life .............. ; in as many _<# v^^, _... The ini- 
 
 tial n hook, as its name implies, is never used in phrases 
 except at the beginning. 
 
 THE COMBINATIONS REPRESENTED BY THE "N CURL." 
 
 514. The in hook with its accompanying circle may be 
 prefixed to the following-named consonants and consonantal 
 combinations: 
 
 To pr, as in the phrase in spring,..^. 
 
THE "N" CURL. 273 
 
 oi 
 
 To lr, as in the phrase in sober , ..... \ ........ ^ 
 
 To tr, as in the phrase in strong .. 
 
 To fir, as in the phrase in ( consideration . ..... \j 
 
 To clir, as in the phrase in his charming 
 To jr. as in the phrases in his danger ( 
 
 To Arr, as in the phrase in his crime , 
 
 To gr, as in the phrase in his grief 
 
 To Z, a& in the phrase in his letter 
 
 To m, as in the phrase in some 
 
 To mcl, as in the phrase in his immediate 
 
 To r, as in the phrase in his remittance 
 
 d 
 
274 THE "N" CURL. 
 
 To rd, as in the phrase in his word 
 
 To s, as in the phrase in liis escape 
 
 \ 
 
 *) 
 
 To z, as in the phrases in size...... , in his zeal 
 
 y 
 
 To sh, as in the phrase in his wish ... ^ 
 
 To zh, as in the phrase in his usual f. 
 
 To mp, (or w&), as in the phrases in Ms amMtion 
 
 in Ms important 
 
 To way, as in the phrase in his way , J..,. . 
 
 To hay, as in the phrase in his hurry +.3L. 
 
 515. This hook, or "curl," may be prefixed to word- 
 signs (incomplete outlines) as well as to complete out- 
 lines. Illustrations: in Scripture , in his improve- 
 ment 
 
THE "N" CURL. 275 
 
 POSITIOX OF "N CURL." 
 
 516. As the n curl, like a tick, can never be written 
 alone, it has no position of its own, and hence, with its ac- 
 companying circle, accommodates itself to the normal 
 position of the succeeding word. Illustrations: in Ms grief 
 
 . , in his grave -. -> , in his list , in Ms 
 
 last ./? , in similar .* ; in some. rsTTTX 
 
 /D 
 
 *'x CURL" FOR "IN." 
 
 517. In the following exercise, initial in is followed by 
 a circle which is a part of the next word: 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 in (con)sideration in small 
 
 in (con)sidering a in small numbers 
 
 in (con)sidering his in smoke 
 
 in (con)sidering the in sober 
 
 in ( construction in some 
 
 in (ex) press language in some cases 
 
 in sacred in some degree 
 
 in secret in some instances 
 
 in security in some measure 
 
 in seeming in some one 
 
 in seizing in some other 
 
 in selfish in- some other respects 
 
 in selling in some other way 
 
 in sermons in some other places 
 
 in ceremony in some you will find 
 
 in similar in spring 
 
 in sleep in something 
 
27b 
 
 THE "N" CURL. 
 
 in something better 
 
 in strict accord 
 
 in something else (else 
 
 in summer 
 
 made downward) 
 
 in supreme 
 
 in some things 
 
 in surprise 
 
 in somewhat 
 
 in swallowing 
 
 in strong 
 
 in (ex) pressing 
 
 in strength 
 
 in suppressing 
 
 in strict 
 
 in symmetry 
 
 in striving 
 
 in sympathy 
 
 "IX HIS" REPRESENTED BY 
 
 THE "CURL" AND CIRCLE. 
 
 518. In the following exercise, the in hook and its ac- 
 
 companying circle represent in 
 
 his: 
 
 in his ambition 
 
 in his credit 
 
 in his allusion 
 
 in his credulity 
 
 in his ample 
 
 in his crime 
 
 in his appearance 
 
 in his criticism 
 
 in his argument 
 
 in his cruelty 
 
 in his arrest 
 
 in his crusade 
 
 in his association 
 
 in his danger 
 
 in his brain 
 
 in his drama 
 
 in his branch 
 
 in his drawer 
 
 in his brave 
 
 in his dread 
 
 in his bravery 
 
 in his dream 
 
 in his breast 
 
 in his dress 
 
 in his brief 
 
 in his drink 
 
 in his brutality 
 
 in his eagerness 
 
 in his care 
 
 in his easy 
 
 in his careful 
 
 in his empire 
 
 in his character 
 
 in his error 
 
 in his charming 
 
 in his escape 
 
 in his course 
 
 in his grace 
 
 in his courage 
 
 in his grade 
 
 in his courtesy 
 
 in his grasp 
 
 in his creation 
 
 in his grave 
 
THE "N" CURL. 
 
 277 
 
 in his gravity 
 
 in his merit 
 
 in his great 
 
 in his method 
 
 in his grip 
 
 in his mind 
 
 in his gross 
 
 in his miserable 
 
 in his growth 
 
 in his mission 
 
 in his habits 
 
 in his mistake 
 
 in his haste 
 
 in his moderation 
 
 in his head 
 
 in his motive 
 
 in hi's hearty 
 
 in his mouth 
 
 in his heavy 
 
 in his music 
 
 in his hesitation 
 
 in his order 
 
 in his holy 
 
 in his perception 
 
 in his house 
 
 in his permission 
 
 in his hurried 
 
 in his praise 
 
 in his hurry 
 
 in his personal 
 
 in his husky 
 
 in his precious 
 
 in his illustration 
 
 in his precise 
 
 in his image 
 
 in his prediction 
 
 in his immense 
 
 in his preface 
 
 in his immediate 
 
 in his preference 
 
 in. his importance 
 
 in his premises 
 
 in his imposition 
 
 in his principles 
 
 in his improvement 
 
 in his promise 
 
 in his impulses 
 
 in his process 
 
 in his journey 
 
 in his proof 
 
 in his labor 
 
 in his property 
 
 in his last 
 
 in his proposition 
 
 in his las (t) letter 
 
 in his provision 
 
 in his lecture 
 
 in his protest 
 
 in his letter 
 
 in his prime 
 
 in his line 
 
 in his remonstrance 
 
 in his list 
 
 in his remedy 
 
 in his love 
 
 in his room 
 
 in his grief 
 
 in his treaty 
 
 in his management 
 
 in his trunk 
 
 in his manuscript 
 
 in his usual 
 
 in his march 
 
 in his usual way 
 
278 THE "N" CURL. 
 
 in his way in his western 
 
 in his weariness in his wish 
 
 in his wise in his weary 
 
 "IN AS" REPRESENTED BY THE "CURL" AND CIRCLE. 
 
 519. In the following exercise, the in hook and the ac- 
 companying circle represent in as: 
 
 in as brave in as many 
 
 in as brief in as many ways 
 
 in as cheerful in as many cases 
 
 in as correct in as many as possible 
 
 in as careful in as many more 
 
 in as great in as true 
 
 in as gross in as wise 
 
 in as little in as zealous 
 
 in as moderate 
 
 ELLIPSIS OF "A," "AX" OR "THE." 
 
 520. In some cases, a, an, or the, following in express- 
 ed by the "curl," is omitted in the writing, to be supplied 
 
 by the sense in the reading. Thus we may write 
 
 for in the street; for in a similar manner; 
 
 ,,'g'^X for in the same. When in the same is thus writ- 
 ten, same should always be vocalized to distinguish this 
 phrase from in some. 
 
 521. EXERCISE. 
 
 in (a or the) consider- tion 
 
 able in (a or the) experi- 
 
 in (a or the) consider- ence 
 
 ation in (a or the) express- 
 in (a or the) construe- sion 
 
THE "N" CURL. 279 
 
 in (a or the) sacred in (a) similar 
 
 in (the) same (vocalize in (a) strange 
 
 same) in (the) street 
 
 in (a or the) secret in (the) supreme law 
 
 in (a or the) selfish in the Supreme Court 
 
 DOUBLE CIRCLE FOLLOWING THE "IN CURL." 
 
 522? When the initial n hook and its accompanying 
 circle are prefixed to a word beginning with a circle, the 
 two circles merge or coalesce, forming a double-sized circle; 
 
 thus: in his sympathy , ........ \ ..... , in his supreme 
 
 Published lists contain phrases constructed on this prin- 
 ciple; but in the opinion of the author a double circle after 
 the n curl is difficult of execution, and on account of the 
 special pains required to form it correctly, is often a de- 
 tention rather than an aid to speed. With this cautionary 
 remark, the following exercise is presented for the benefit 
 of those who may wish to practise it: 
 
 523. EXERCISE. 
 
 in his (cou)sideration in his simple 
 
 in his description in his sober 
 
 in his experience in his sojourn 
 
 in his expression in his solitude 
 
 in his salvation in his soul 
 
 in his secret in his spirit 
 
 in his security in his surprise 
 
 in his seeming in his sympathy 
 
 524. CAUTION. When written easily and promptly, 
 the in hook is a valuable time-saving expedient; but to 
 force it into use where it does not make a convenient junc- 
 tion or where the proper method of joining it does not read- 
 ily suggest itself, is a sad waste of time. In order that the 
 xise of this expedient in proper cases may be thoroughly ac- 
 quired, the foregoing lists have been made copious enough 
 to suit the wishes of the most ambitious student. 
 
CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 SPECIAL METHODS OF WRITING PARTICULAR 
 WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 525. Ability. Disjoined I, which in word-writing ex- 
 presses the termination bility, may be used in phrases to 
 
 represent ability. Illustrations: my ability . ...... \ ...... 
 
 your ability t-i ....... ,best (of) my ability 
 
 526. Any and no, when standing alone or beginning a 
 phrase, are sufficiently distinguished by position, without 
 vocalization; but in the midst of a phrase a distinction by 
 means of vocalization is necessary. In accordance with the 
 rule already given, the reporter habitually vocalizes any, 
 the less common of the two words, and habitually allows no, 
 the more common, to go unvocalized. Illustrations: If 
 
 there is any objection ^s^j^^ , if there is no objection 
 
 527. Are. For this word standing alone, Benn Pitman 
 writers use the upward stroke, and Graham writers the 
 downward. But in phrases these two schools of wrl'feTS" 
 agree in using either the upward or the downward stroke, 
 according to convenience. Illustrations: There are enough 
 
PARTICULAR WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS. 281 
 
 ... , there are many ... 
 
 At the beginning of a phrase, the downward form, ar, 
 generally joins more conveniently with the next word 
 
 than ray; as in the phrases, are you ..Jv... , are many 
 
 ' The downward stroke, made double length, 
 
 is more suggestive for are there than the lengthened ray, 
 which some writers employ, and generally joins more con- 
 veniently with the following word, as, are there many 
 
 ~^\-- , are there some ^\^ . (See Gra- 
 
 ham's Second Reader, page 142, note.) 
 
 There are two other ways of expressing are in phrases: 
 First, by the r hook (see Chapter XIV), and, second, as 
 part of a double-length stroke which includes they are. 
 
 528. At all and until, written with tl in the third posi- 
 tion, as they are by many Pitmanic stenographers are 
 liable to serious conflict. The best means of distinction 
 known to the author is to write at all in the first position, 
 and until in the third. 
 
 529. At the same time and at some time, written with 
 
 the same outline 1 , must generally be distinguish- 
 ed. A convenient method of doing this is by vocalizing some 
 in the phrase last named. 
 
 530. Avenue, following the name of a street, may often 
 be represented, especially if the phrase is familiar, by a 
 joined v, if the junction be convenient, thus: Jackson Av- 
 
282 PARTICULAR WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 enue 
 
 531. Been, ordinarily written bn, is in some phrases 
 represented by b only, and in others by the n-hook only. 
 
 Illustrations: Had been,..!..., have been...\^, which have 
 
 v 
 
 been there ... / 
 
 532. Bill, in phrases, may be written bl, as, true bill 
 _ , due bill .... 
 
 533. Body, in phrases, is generally written bd, as any- 
 body , nobody...^. ,x- resurrection (of the) body 
 
 Somebody, by way of exception, is written 
 
 ~, because bd will not join conveniently to m. 
 534. Business, is in phrases frequently written bs, as.. 
 
 \ 
 
 no business x_^v , in his business \> . Many 
 
 V> 
 
 writers use the same outline in the first position for bus- 
 iness, when standing alone; others prefer to write the 
 full outline. 
 
PARTICULAR WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS. 283 
 
 535. Can, though usually written with a final hook by 
 both Graham and Benn Pitman writers, may safely drop 
 the Eiook in all cases where thereby a more convenient 
 junction with the next word will be obtained. It is the 
 author's experience that in all cases, can, whether isolated 
 or in a phrase, may safely be represented by the simple 
 k stroke. It is so expressed in the Munson and Isaac Pit- 
 man systems. 
 
 53514. First, as an isolated word, is habitually repre- 
 sented by its word-sign, the disconnected st loop. In 
 phrases this sign has a very restricted use, the phrase at 
 
 first I being perhaps the only instance of its advan- 
 
 b 
 
 tageous employment. The phrase the first is by some 
 writers represented thus: . ?? , but there seems to be no 
 
 need for making this single exception to the otherwise un- 
 broken rule that the tick shall not begin a phrase. In sev- 
 eral common phrases, first takes, for the sake of the phrase, 
 
 a form different from the ordinary one; thus: 
 
 in the first place, and .._T\^> in the first instance. 
 
 536. Have has three forms, the alphabetic stroke v, 
 the f-v hook, and that variation of form which it assumes 
 when the stroke v is made double length to add thr. 
 
 537. I and he. Care must be taken that the personal 
 pronouns 7 and he are not confounded. For the best meth- 
 ods of securing the needed distinction, see Paragraphs 
 220-222. 
 
284 PARTICULAR WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 538. Him and me, when occurring in the midst of 
 phrases, need to be carefully distinguished, because in such 
 cases the ordinary positional distinction is lost. In several 
 instances the necessary distinction is secured by joining 
 the word which in the phrase retains its ordinary position, 
 and separating the word which the phrase would take out 
 
 of its usual place. Illustrations: of me , of Mm 
 
 .,tome > , to him vrrv...... in other 
 
 instances, a distinction is secured by vocalization, in which 
 case it is best to vocalize me and allow him to go unvo- 
 calized . 
 
 539. House. In many cases the regular sign for the 
 very common word house can not be phrased. Hence, 
 to secure a convenient phrase, the alphabetic stroke s is 
 
 sometimes used for house, as State House Legisla- 
 
 tive House L..L....' In other cases, for the sake of the 
 
 phrase, house is represented by the s circle, which, if it 
 follows another circle, as in the phrase at his house, merges 
 with the preceding circle, forming a double circle, thus: 
 
 this house .^O , at his house -...L^^, in his house 
 
 If there be danger of misreading, the vowel ow may bo 
 
 inserted in the double circle, thus 
 
PARTICULAR WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS. 285 
 
 540. There seems to be no reason why the circle should 
 
 ^3 
 not be used for house in such phrases as in the, house , 
 
 if the house 
 
 541. In law. These words, terminating the phrases 
 mother-in-law, etc., may be represented by nl. Illustra- 
 
 tions: motlier-in-law ..^r^r^>. , sister-in-law 
 
 542. Indeed and no doubt. Indeed should not be used 
 in the midst of a phrase unless vocalized with e. No doubt 
 may be freely interjoined without vocalization. 
 543. Instance and circumstance should be carefully 
 
 distinguished by writing the full formal, -for the former 
 word, wherever it occurs, except in the special phrase for 
 
 instance 
 
 544. Ocean. The last word of such phrases as Atlantic 
 Ocean, Pacific Ocean, Arctic Ocean, may, when convenient, 
 
 be expressed by the shn hook, thus: Atlantic Ocean 
 
 in^. 
 
 545. Own, introduced into a phrase, if it may possibly 
 conflict with know, should be vocalized. 
 
 546. Less, else. When written as separate words, less 
 and else are distinguished by vocalizing the latter. The 
 same method of distinction should be adopted in phrases. 
 The downward direction of the I stroke does not sufficiently 
 
286 PARTICULAR WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 distinguish the word else, as in phrases both these words 
 are frequently written with the downward stroke. 
 
 547. Me, Mac or Mack, at the beginning of personal 
 names, may.be represented by m joined. Illustrations: 
 
 Macmullin ...t^*^*. , McManus . 
 
 548. North, which begins many geographical names, is 
 commonly represented by nr joined. Illustrations: North 
 
 Dakota I-,... f North America . In a 
 
 few cases nr is used for northern, though more generally 
 norther is used if the n hook cannot be conveniently join- 
 
 ed. Illustration: Northern Democracy 
 
 549. Of the, in phrases, is expressed in two ways: First, 
 by the joined ticks of and the; second, by proximity. (See 
 Paragraphs 317-323). It is also implied, not expressed, by 
 joining the words between which it occurs; as one of the 
 
 most,. 
 
 550. Or, in phrases, is sometimes expressed thus: three 
 
 or four . .Jr... >^....^,,once or twice. .... The con 
 
 sonant stroke r (downward) is sometimes treated as a 
 "fictitious primitive" for or, in order to add there or oth- 
 er by doubling. (See Paragraph 420.) 
 
 551. Part, in phrases, is written either ...jv.,or .... r \..., 
 according to convenience. 
 
PARTICULAR WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS. 287 
 
 552. Regard and regret, as isolated words, are distin- 
 guished by position. Either of them occurring as the second 
 
 word of a phrase may often have positional distinction by 
 means of "initial displacement." (See Paragraphs 70-81.) 
 When this is not practicable, these words may be distin- 
 guished by vocalization or "exclusion." (See Paragraphs 
 87, 88, 92.) If "exclusion" be resorted to, regard should 
 "be excluded, as regret is the more common of the two words 
 and has the greater need of being phrased. 
 
 553. Secretary. This word, at the beginning of certain 
 
 phrases, may be expressed by. , , as in Secretary of State 
 
 a f O C/ 
 
 , Secretary of War , Secretary of the Navy 
 
 554. See, say. At the beginning of a phrase these 
 words are distinguished by position. Elsewhere in a 
 phrase, see should be vocalized, while say need not be. 
 
 555. Session is often added to a preceding word by the 
 
 circle and the eshon hook; as, legislative session .^//. 
 
 another session _?__ ^ Where the preceding 
 
 word ends with a circle or a loop, session is often expressed 
 lay adding the hook only; thus: this session V , next 
 
 session ^? ., last session > ft?- . 
 
238 PARTICULAR WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 556. Stairs, in a few phrases, may be represented by 
 
 the str loop and the circle, as, down stairs \> , up stairs 
 ^\>.... , back stairs 
 
 557. State, in phrases, may be represented initially or 
 finally by the st loop when it will conveniently join. II- 
 
 t 
 
 lustrations: state if there -S , State of Texas 
 
 L_Q... , Stale of New York _?!.., , New York 8tate 
 
 - Y s-^P Another common 
 
 _..,.() t Empire State -^^^- 
 
 method of writing state is shown in the following illustra- 
 
 tions: / will state , in my State' 
 
 558. Stock, at the beginning of certain phrases, may be 
 
 represented by the st loop, thus: stockholder 
 stock-book . 
 
 559. Store may often be added to the preceding word 
 by the str loop. Illustrations: Book-store\.. ^-drug-store 
 
 , our store ,.77\. , your store n .. 
 
PARTICULAR WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS. 289 
 
 560. Street may be represented by st loop attached to 
 the name of the street, thus: Jackson street / p/; 
 
 561. Therefore, in phrases, takes sometimes its ordi- 
 nary form, while in other cases there is expressed by dou- 
 ble-lengthing, and f is added for fore, as I know therefore 
 
 562. Time. The word-sign for time^^^is rarely used 
 in a phrase, either initially, medially or finally. Thus we 
 
 write better time VJ^->. he has no time <(_ at 
 
 TT 
 
 all times- -p "-, our time .. , etc. The word-sign 
 
 may, of course, be used where ambiguity or obscurity in 
 reading will not result. 
 
 563. Way or away may, if convenient, be represented in 
 phrases by the diphthong icay, joined, instead of the alpha- 
 
 betic stroke. Illustrations: some wajac^., this way 
 
 go away -. r - . 
 
 564. Were, in phrases, is sometimes represented, as 
 heretofore explained, by the r hook prefixed to a stroke in 
 
 the third position; thus: which were... 9 ,, such were-*?~ 
 
 565. Year. Many common phrases are facilitated by 
 the use of the consonant y as a word-sign for year. For 
 
 instance: This year \o , many years t^-^., ; one y ear 
 
290 PARTICULAR WORDS OR EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 s_...two years. > , next year.... w^ , from year 
 
 y> , next year.... w^ 
 
 to year ..... S....,,. ..... The author, has, fora number of 
 
 years used this sign with great satisfaction. It is not recog- 
 nized by either Benn Pitman or Graham. When standing 
 alone or beginning a phrase, it should be written above the 
 line. 
 
CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 INVENTION OF IRREGULAR PHRASE-SIGNS. 
 
 566. When particular word-groups are uttered over and 
 over again, in either general or special matter, the speaker 
 becomes accustomed to their utterance, and hence they are 
 spoken with more than his average rapidity. For their 
 prompt expression, regular methods of phrasing seem in 
 many cases inadequate. Hence arises an occasional neces- 
 sity for irregular phrase forms, wholly or partially unau- 
 thorized by phrasing rules, and therefore in some respects 
 arbitrary. These, being analogous in this particular to word- 
 signs, which are abbreviated according to no settled rule, 
 may be called phrase-signs. Though irregular and arbi- 
 trary in their character, some of these phrase-signs are so 
 highly useful in connection with the general subjects of 
 the stenographer's work that it is the duty of the learner 
 to make himself as familiar with them as with the or- 
 dinary word-signs. For a list of such phrases the reader is 
 referred to the chapter entitled "Irregular Phrases of 
 General Utility." 
 
 567. But there are irregular phrases, useful only on 
 certain occasions or in connection with particular subjects; 
 and while a certain number of these are provided in many 
 of the text-books phrases, for instance, relating to law, 
 theology, commercial business, etc. yet often the steno- 
 grapher is required to invent such phrases for himself, be- 
 cause no text-book maker can anticipate the varying needs 
 of every individual writer. The office stenographer, deal- 
 ing with the technicalities peculiar to his particular line of 
 business, as well as the professional reporter, whose work 
 
292 INVENTION OF IRREGULAR PHRASE SIGNS. 
 
 may range over such varied topics as theology, science, 
 medicine, law, politics, history, education, etc., is at times 
 called upon to provide special forms for verbal combina- 
 tions which, because, for the time being, they occur so fre- 
 quently, and because, perhaps, they involve some special 
 difficulty, require briefer phrase-forms than could be con- 
 structed in accordance with ordinary phrasing rules. 
 
 PREMEDITATED PHRASE-SIGNS. 
 
 568. In some cases these are provided beforehand, be- 
 cause of their foreseen necessity. The office stenographer, 
 if anxious to give full satisfaction to his employer, will, 
 when a lull of regular business allows it, examine letter- 
 books, catalogues, etc., relating to the business of the estab- 
 lishment, and wherever it may seem necessary, will delib- 
 erately and carefully invent facile methods of representing 
 particularly difficult terms or phrases that the employer 
 is likely to use in dictation. The professional reporter, 
 who has been engaged to report a particular law case, will, 
 if he is wise, take occasion beforehand to glance over, or, 
 indeed, carefully examine, books and papers embodying the 
 names, the facts, the precedents, the arguments which will 
 be brought into the consideration of the case in court; and 
 he will, so far as seems desirable, make special provision 
 by irregular phraseograms for specially difficult word- 
 groups which are likely to be frequently uttered. 
 
 OFF-HAND PHRASE-SIGNS. 
 
 569. But irregular phrase-signs must oft-times be in- 
 vented by the stenographer during the course of note- 
 taking. Such invention is generally a step-by-step process. 
 Rarely does the reporter, on the spur of the moment, take 
 a single leap from the too cumbrous regular sign to an 
 irregular representation absolutely adequate and satisfac- 
 tory. More often these special signs are developed grad- 
 ually, the method of representation becoming shorter and 
 
INVENTION OF IRREGULAR PHRASE SIGNS. 293 
 
 shorter as the verbal combination continues to recur. The 
 first time a particular word group is encountered, the re- 
 porter may not phrase it at all, or a phrase-form constructed 
 according to regular methods may suggest itself. But, as the 
 speech proceeds, and as the word-group, repeated from time 
 to time, is spoken with increasing rapidity, the regularly 
 constructed sign seems too cumbrous. So, without effort 
 of thought by instantaneous suggestion, as it were, for 
 in such cases there is no time for deliberation a sign fs 
 written which does not follow any regular phrasing rules; 
 and this sign, as the speech proceeds, may give place to 
 another and another, each more abridged than its prede- 
 cessor, until the utmost brevity is attained. 
 
 IRREGULAR PHRASES CLASSIFIED. 
 
 570. The following are the principal classes of word- 
 groups which, often recurring and not briefly enough writ- 
 ten by ordinary methods, may be represented by irregular 
 phrase-signs, similar in construction to those suggestively 
 given below: 
 
 1. Names of individuals, as, for instance, Jonathan 
 
 Smith x/ry. , Benjamin Franklin ^^^ Andrew Jackson. 
 
 2. Names of business firms or establishments, as, for 
 example: Bosivorth & Bacon .....S^ ..... Skivington Brothers 
 
 3. Titles of societies, associations, corporations, etc., 
 for instance: District of Columbia ]L.,.. Temperance 
 
294 INVENTION OF IRREGULAR PHRASE SIGNS. 
 Society ..... UW .. , Pennsylvania Loan and Trust Company 
 
 ..... , Citizens' National Bank 
 
 O 
 
 b^^ 
 
 4. Terms applying to historical events or to public 
 measures, present or past. Illustrations: Declaration of In- 
 
 dependence .U. ....... , Missouri Compromise.. - 
 
 Monroe Doctrine ....... K, Demonetization of Silver . 
 
 Spanish-American War 
 
 5. Technical terms; that is to say, verbal combinations 
 peculiar to special subjects chemistry, medicine, law, etc. 
 
 Illustrations: Carbonic acid . ...i\ ,~> rheumatic gout 
 
 law of primogeniture 
 
 6. Any combinations of words (though general, not 
 technical, in their character) if frequently recurring, and 
 not written easily or briefly enough by regular methods. 
 
 HOW ARE IRREGULAR PHRASES CONSTRUCTED f 
 
 571. Irregular phrase-signs are constructed according 
 to three different methods: 
 
 1. In one class of irregular phrases, words or parts of 
 words are very freely omitted, without regard to the regular 
 methods of ellipsis heretofore explained; and the remain- 
 ing words or parts of words are joined without lifting the 
 
 pen. Illustration: Nort h Dakota * , Central Pacific 
 
INVENTION OP IRREGULAR PHRASE SIGNS. 295 
 Railway ,^^^^\^^ _ A f avor i te method of construct 
 
 ing phrases of this class is "to join one or two letters, usual- 
 ly the initial ones, of two or more parts of the name or 
 
 phrase," as Pacific Hail steamship Company ^j 
 
 (A. J. Graham.) 
 
 2. In other irregular phrases, the omission of certain 
 letters is accomplished by breaking the phrase and repre- 
 senting the whole verbal combination by two disjoined 
 
 fragments, as viva voce -V, - 
 
 3. In other cases, while, as in the class of phrases last 
 described, the phrase is broken, the fragments are not com- 
 pletely disjoined, but are brought into contact by the prin- 
 ciple of "intersection;" in other words, after the first part 
 of the phrase has been written, the pen is lifted, and the 
 latter part generally a single stroke is written across 
 
 the former part. Illustration: Democratic party 
 
 572. In applying the principle of "intersection," the 
 following suggestions (not intended to cover all cases) will 
 be found useful: 
 
 (a.) An intersecting s may represent, at the end of a 
 
 title, the word society, as phonetic society ..V Xir _l_. . 
 (b.) An intersecting k may represent company; as, 
 
 cotton company - 
 
 (c.) An intersecting sh may represent association; as, 
 
 beneficial association 
 
296 INVENTION OF IRREGULAR PHRASE SIGNS. 
 
 (d.) An intersecting p may represent party; as, na- 
 
 tional party 
 
 (e.) An intersecting t may represent committee; as, 
 
 finance committee ...\jU_s... . 
 
 (f.) An interesecting d may represent department; as 
 
 railway department ....< 
 
 If the direction of the preceding stroke does not allow 
 the final stroke to intersect, the latter may be written along- 
 side of, and close to, the preceding stroke, making what 
 may be called a "broken phrase;" thus, Republican party 
 
 CAUTIONS. 
 
 573. In devising irregular phrases, the young writer 
 may wisely bear in mind the following suggestions and cau- 
 tions: 
 
 (a.) In the writing of either words or phrases, the 
 stenographer should avoid irregular and arbitrary expe- 
 dients, unless normal and regular methods involve some 
 awkwardness, or some lack of needed speed. 
 
 (b.) Any verbal combination, in order to be entitled 
 to irregular representation, should be, at least transiently 
 and in reference to the particular subject, of frequent occur- 
 rence. 
 
 (c.) While words or parts of words may be freely 
 omitted, the writer should retain those portions of the 
 phrase which will be most significant or suggestive. 
 
 (d.) As brevity is the object sought, the inventor of a 
 phrase-sign should assure himself that the special device ia 
 
INVENTION OF IRREGULAR PHRASE SIGNS. 297 
 
 brief enough to meet the demands of the case, and especially 
 that it avoids inconvenient junctions. 
 
 (e.) A phrase written without lifting the pen is pre- 
 ferable generally to a broken or an intersected phrase. In 
 almost every case where special abbreviation is necessary, 
 it will be found practicable to devise some rapid and legible 
 form which can be written entire without a pen-lift. Not 
 only is time lost in lifting the pen, but an intersecting 
 stroke is sometimes misunderstood as a cancellation of 
 the character through which it is struck. 
 
 (f.) An all-important and never-to-be-forgotten consid- 
 eration is that a phrase-sign should be legible. This does 
 not mean that it must be so clear as to be self-suggestive 
 to a person who meets it for the first time. To comply 
 with such a requirement would be impracticable, because a 
 phrase-sign of this class is but an incomplete and more or 
 less arbitrary expression of the words intended. Yet the 
 special phrase should be at least unambiguous incapable 
 of being mistaken by the writer for another phrase or some 
 single word. As has been remarked by Mr. Graham, "Some- 
 times a contraction which is suggestive and legible in one 
 kind of subject matter would not be legible, and therefore 
 not allowable, in another kind of matter." On the other 
 hand, special contractions devised with reference to a par- 
 ticular subject-matter may be so inherently suggestive, may 
 have such a natural adhesion to the memory, that, once 
 learned, they can never be forgotten; so that the reporter 
 instinctively extends them to all classes of topics that may 
 call them into use. Two incidents of actual occurrence will 
 illustrate some of the dangers attending special contrac- 
 tions devised for the purposes of a particular occasion, but 
 not devised with sufficient care and forethought. In an in- 
 vestigation before a Congressional committee some years 
 ago, "Buenos Ayres hides" were a constant topic of dis- 
 cussion; and the reporter, feeling the need of some special 
 abbreviation for "Buenos Ayres," adopted for that purpose, 
 on the spur of the moment, the longhand letters "B. A." 
 
298 INVENTION OF IRREGULAR PHRASE SIGNS. 
 
 The notes were not written out till some time after they 
 were taken, and, unfortunately, when weeks had elapsed, 
 the initials "B. A." suggested to the mind of the reporter 
 (who, by the way, was a Canadian) not "Buenos Ayres" but 
 "British-American." And so the testimony, as now recorded 
 in the reports of the Congressional Committees, has much 
 to say about British- American hides and nothing to say 
 about Buenos Ayres hides! 
 
 In another case, a youthful student of a certain short- 
 hand text-book made himself very familiar with its reading 
 and writing exercises, including a lecture on chemistry, in 
 which the phrase "carbonic acid" (represented steno- 
 graphically by krbsd) occurred again and again. Years af- 
 terward, when this youthful student had become an expe- 
 rienced reporter, without ever having had occasion to re- 
 call this special sign for "carbonic acid," he was engaged 
 in reporting a law case in which carbonate of soda was 
 much talked about. Thoughtlessly, in the hurry of note- 
 taking, it occurred to him that krbsd would be a good sign 
 for carbonate of soda; and in this way he wrote the phrase 
 over and over again. The law-case proceeded to its end; 
 and no thought of carbonic acid, with its long-disused sign, 
 ever occurred to him. Seemingly it was obliterated from 
 his mind. But, alas, as the sequel proved, memory was 
 cunningly lying in wait to play him one of her fantastic 
 tricks. When the notes came to be transcribed, this phrase- 
 sign which he had written over and over again for car- 
 bonate of soda, recalled to him, without a moment's hesi- 
 tation or doubt, carbonic acid! And so it was transcribed 
 unquestioningly as often as it occurred. Fortunately, be- 
 fore the transcript had passed the stage of possible correc- 
 tion, some good angel flashed upon the reporter's mind the 
 consciousness of his error. What wonderful chemical ab- 
 surdity might, but for this angelic intervention, have been 
 foisted upon confiding court and counsel, only a chemical 
 expert can tell. 
 
 (g.) Until the writer who has, in the course of note- 
 taking, invented an irregular phrase, becomes familiar wich 
 
INVENTION OF IRREGULAR PHRASE SIGNS. 299 
 
 it, (which is generally accomplished after it has been writ- 
 ten several times), it is a wise precaution, if time allows, 
 to call attention to the irregular and arbitrary nature 
 of the sign, by, for instance, encircling it with the pen or 
 by making a cross in the margin. This will prove especially 
 useful if the notes are to be transcribed by some other per- 
 son than the reporter himself. 
 
 (h.) A final caution to the young writer may fittingly 
 be given in the words of that eminent shorthand writer 
 (now deceased), Thomas Allen Reed: "Nor should he (the 
 student) be in a hurry to devise special contractions of his 
 own. They may at first seem very convenient and unob- 
 jectionable; but the probability is that, as he proceeds, he 
 will find it advisable, if not absolutely necessary, to discard 
 them. Better follow the lines laid down in the instruction- 
 books than diverge into untrodden paths, until by study 
 and experience the writer has qualified himself to assume 
 the role of an explorer and guide." 
 
CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 IRREGULAR PHRASES OF GENERAL UTILITY. 
 
 574. To some students the following list of Special or 
 Irregular Phrases may at first glance appear disappoint- 
 ingly meagre. For such, a few words of explanation may 
 be necessary. In the first place, many phrases ordinarily 
 classed as "Special Phrases" (for instance United States of 
 America) are in fact "Simple Phrases," as already de- 
 fined; that is, phrases constructed by merely joining togeth- 
 er several words in their ordinary forms. Phrases of this 
 character are appropriately included in the list of "Simple 
 Phrases." (See Chapter XXIV). Other so-called "Special 
 Phrases" (especially those whose only peculiarity is an ellip- 
 sis of some word or words) have in this volume found their 
 logical place under some specific principle of phrase forma- 
 tion. It would not have been practicable to include here all 
 phrases that may be found useful by different writers in all 
 the various branches of business. Any such list, if at- 
 tempted, could not possibly be complete; and it would simply 
 swell this volume to inordinate size, without any corres- 
 ponding advantage to the general student. A third consid- 
 eration, the most important of all, is that such a list, if 
 placed before the student, would be regarded by him as an 
 invitation to memorize a number of phrastss which he would 
 suppose to have been invented for his benefit; and in that 
 way, one prime object of this book to educate the student 
 to construct for himself phrases suitable to meet his indi- 
 vidual needs would be defeated. The author's aim has 
 been, not to make the present list exhaustive, or to adapt it 
 to the demands of particular lines of business, but simply 
 
IRREGULAR PHRASES OF GENERAL UTILITY. 301 
 
 to give enough phrases of irregular formation to serve as 
 models for the young writer in learning to make phrases for 
 himself, according to the principles presented in this vol- 
 ume. 
 
 Almighty God 
 and company 
 at any rate 
 at hand 
 at least 
 at some time 
 at the same time 
 at length 
 as far as 
 
 best of your (or my) 
 knowledge 
 
 British America 
 carbonic acid 
 
 ir 
 
302 IRREGULAR PHRASES OF GENERAL UTILITY. 
 Christian society 
 circumstantial evidence - ^- 
 
 C~ r 
 
 Court of Common Pleas ^>- 
 
 Democratic party 
 District of Columbia 
 
 down stairs .....L. 
 
 eight or nine 
 
 Episcopal church 
 
 eternal life 
 express company 
 fellow-citizens 
 finance committee 
 
 five or sir .!.-. 
 
 for instance .Jw 
 
1RREGUULAR PHRASES OF GENERAL UTILITY 303 
 for the purpose of 
 
 four or five 
 
 Great Britain 
 
 Great Britain and Ireland 
 
 habeas corpus 
 
 handwriting 
 
 Her Majesty 
 
 Holy Ghost 
 
 honorable gentleman-men 
 honorable member 
 honorable Senator 
 House of Commons 
 House of Lords 
 
 Hous. of Representatives 
 
304 IRREGULAR PHRASES OF GENERAL UTILITY, 
 human life 
 
 inasmuch as 
 
 <^ 
 in order 
 
 in order to 
 
 ^ 
 
 in order that 
 
 in the first place 
 in the last place 
 
 in the next place 
 in the second place 
 in this shape 
 
 in writing 
 
 Jesus Christ JOT" 
 
 joint stock 
 
 justification by faith / 
 
IRREGULAR PHRASES OF GENERAL UTILITY. 305 
 learned counsel ..U.Z 
 
 learned friend <-/. 
 
 learned gentleman-men 
 
 learned judge 
 
 Lord and Savior Jesus 
 Christ 
 
 may it please your Honor 
 medical department 
 might there 
 my beloved brethren 
 my beloved brother 
 my beloved friends 
 
 my brethren 
 
 my Christian brethren 
 'my fellow-citizen 
 
306 IRREGULAR PHRASES OF GENERAL UTILITY, 
 my honorable friend 
 national bank >~^- 
 
 * 
 
 New Testament 
 nine or ten 
 
 L 
 
 northeast 
 northeastern 
 
 Northern States 
 
 Old and New Testament 
 
 a~> 
 
 on the one hand 
 
 on the other hand 
 per annum 
 
 per cent 
 
IRREGULAR PHRASES OF GENERAL UTILITY. 307 
 
 per centum 
 
 Presbyterian church 
 prisoner at the bar 
 railway car 
 
 railway station 
 respecter of persons 
 
 right honorable 
 
 right reverend 
 Roman Catholic 
 
 Roman Catholicism 
 
 Roman Catholic church 
 Secretary of State 
 Secretary of the Interior 
 
 ,_ 
 
 As 
 
308 IRREGULAR PHRASES OF GENERAL UTILITY. 
 
 Secretary of the Navy Sw. 
 
 Secretary of the Treasury J. "... 
 
 Secretary of War 
 
 seven or eight ....Awsf.... 
 
 six or seven ...No.... 
 
 so far as 
 
 -N 
 
 sooner or later (Graham) 
 statute book 
 
 southeast ..../'..... 
 
 southeastern ../... /7 . 
 
 southwest ..... ~A.. 
 southwestern 
 
 step by step 
 
IRREGULAR PHRASES OF GENERAL UTILITY. 309 
 temperance society 
 
 ten or eleven (Graham) 
 three or four 
 to a great extent 
 to some extent 
 
 "1? 
 
 J 
 to that extent 
 
 to this extent 
 
 1 
 
 United States 
 
 United States of America 
 United States Senate v o 
 
 * 
 
 United States Senator 
 up stairs 
 
 Vice-President 
 vice versa 
 
310 IRREGULAR PHRASES OF GENERAL UTILITY. 
 
 viva voce \^.... 
 
 words of my text ~yx_-^ 
 
 p 
 where do you reside ( y\ 
 
 *yes, sir 
 
 c 
 
 yours truly f 
 
 v~ 
 
 *ln the opinion of the author, the sign here given for yes [S3] is more 
 legible and more phrasable than ys, the sign usually written. 
 
CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 575. The words composing the following phrases are 
 written just as they would be if standing separate, except 
 where, in the midst of phrases, they necessarily lose their 
 normal position. The correct execution of these phrases 
 calls for no knowledge ef phrasing principles as expounded 
 in the previous chapters of this book. Nothing more is re- 
 quired than that the student, giving each word its accus- 
 tomed form, shall keep his pen on the paper till the phrase 
 is finished. Hence these phrases afford excellent exercises 
 for the learner at any stage of his shorthand study, after he 
 can write correctly the separate forms of ordinary words. 
 As soon as he begins the study of this book, these phrases 
 should be practised upon in convenient portions from day 
 to day, in order that the habit of extempore phrasing may 
 be acquired as quickly as possible. (See note to Para- 
 graph 65.) 
 
 about it about that which is 
 
 about its about their 
 
 about its own about them 
 
 about matters about themselves 
 
 about several about this 
 
 about some about when 
 
 about something about which 
 
 about such things about which you are 
 
 about that about which you may 
 
 about that date about which you will 
 
 about that matter about your 
 
 about that which about yours 
 
312 
 
 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 above his 
 
 account book 
 
 after he 
 
 after such 
 
 after the 
 
 after that 
 
 after them 
 
 after they 
 
 after this 
 
 after which 
 
 after you 
 
 after your 
 
 after yours 
 
 agree that 
 j although it is 
 I although it has 
 
 although this 
 
 always be 
 
 always ready 
 
 always right 
 
 always there 
 
 always was 
 
 always will be 
 
 among yourselves 
 
 among your friends 
 
 another affair 
 
 another day 
 
 another instance 
 
 another nation 
 
 another point 
 
 another question 
 
 another subject 
 
 another thing 
 
 any better 
 
 any man 
 
 any more 
 
 any subject 
 
 anything 
 
 anything further 
 
 anything more 
 
 anything said 
 
 anything that is done 
 
 any way you like 
 
 any worse 
 
 are we (upward r) 
 
 are we decided 
 
 are we doing 
 
 are we having 
 
 are you (are downward) 
 
 are you prepared 
 
 are you ready 
 
 are you sure 
 
 are you there 
 
 as good as 
 
 as good as ever 
 
 as great as 
 
 as great as ever 
 
 as little as 
 
 as long as 
 
 as long as it is 
 
 as long as it may 
 
 as long as necessary 
 
 as long as possible 
 
 as many 
 
 as many as 
 
 as many as possible 
 
 as many as they 
 
 as many as were 
 
 as many more 
 
 as many such 
 
 as much as 
 
 as much as another 
 
 as much as it is 
 
 as much as may 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 313 
 
 as much as our 
 
 as much as possible 
 
 as much as they 
 
 as much as was 
 
 as shall 
 
 as shall be 
 
 as that 
 
 as usual 
 
 at church 
 
 at first 
 
 at him 
 
 at his 
 
 at his own 
 
 at last 
 
 at most 
 
 at one glance 
 
 at one another 
 
 at present 
 
 at some 
 
 at such 
 
 at that 
 
 at that date 
 
 at that place 
 
 at their 
 
 at their request 
 
 at them 
 
 at this 
 
 at which 
 
 at which you may 
 
 at your 
 
 at your place 
 
 at yourself 
 
 at yourselves 
 
 Attorney-General 
 
 baggage master 
 
 bank note 
 
 be able 
 
 be called upon 
 
 be careful 
 
 be certain 
 
 be clearly 
 
 be claimed 
 
 be done 
 
 be glad 
 
 be good 
 
 be good enough 
 
 be gratified 
 
 be greatly 
 
 be it so 
 
 be kind enough 
 
 be likely 
 
 be made 
 
 be manifest 
 
 be met 
 
 be obliged 
 
 be pleased 
 
 be ready 
 
 be received 
 
 be requested 
 
 be said 
 
 be said to 
 
 be saved 
 
 be seen 
 
 be seen that 
 
 be such 
 
 be supposed 
 
 be sure 
 
 be surprised 
 
 be sustained 
 
 be that 
 ("be their 
 (be there 
 
 be they 
 
 be these (vocalize these) 
 
314 
 
 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 be this 
 be those 
 be told 
 be told that 
 be told this 
 be very 
 
 be very careful 
 be your 
 
 because it has been 
 because it is 
 because it is not 
 because it is so 
 because it is your 
 because it may always 
 because it should be 
 because it will be 
 because it would be 
 because of their 
 because of this 
 because their position 
 because there is no one 
 because there are 
 because there are some- 
 times 
 
 because they may 
 because they were 
 because they will 
 because this 
 because we have 
 because you are 
 because you are aware 
 because you have 
 because you will be 
 
 been answered 
 
 been done 
 
 been enabled 
 
 been known 
 
 been observed 
 
 been so 
 
 been taken 
 
 been understood 
 *before him 
 
 before his 
 
 before that 
 
 before there is another 
 
 before there has been 
 
 before they 
 
 before these (vocalize 
 these) 
 
 before this 
 
 before those 
 
 before you 
 
 before you are 
 
 before you are ready 
 
 before you can 
 
 before you go 
 
 before you make 
 
 before you mention 
 
 before you receive 
 
 before you trust 
 
 before your 
 
 begin again 
 ** believe that 
 
 believe them 
 
 believe this 
 
 better that 
 
 *In this and the phrases immediately following 
 be written by the Benn Pitman feign, 
 **See note to Paragraph 207. 
 
 , hefore is intended to 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 315 
 
 between any such 
 
 between his 
 
 between that 
 
 between them 
 
 between themselves 
 
 between these (vocalize 
 
 these) 
 
 (between this 
 , between those 
 
 between which 
 
 between your 
 
 between themselves 
 
 bill book 
 
 bills payable 
 
 bona fide 
 
 bring to mind 
 
 brings to mind 
 
 brought forward 
 
 but you are 
 
 but you must 
 
 but you will be 
 
 by any means 
 
 by as many 
 
 by every 
 
 by every means 
 
 by him 
 
 by his 
 
 by his own 
 
 by his own admission 
 
 by his own opinion 
 
 by his own supposition 
 
 by it 
 
 by itself 
 
 by its own 
 
 by many 
 
 by many more 
 
 by many persons 
 
 by many such 
 
 by me (vocalize me) 
 
 by means of , 
 
 by no means (vocalize no) 
 
 by one 
 
 by permission 
 
 by reason of 
 
 by some 
 
 by some means 
 
 by some man 
 
 by some persons 
 
 by such 
 
 by such means 
 
 by such things 
 
 by that 
 
 by that which you 
 
 by their 
 
 by their admission 
 
 by them 
 
 by themselves 
 
 by these (vocalize these) 
 
 by this 
 
 i by this account 
 I by this kind 
 
 by those 
 
 by those accounts 
 
 by those who 
 
 by which 
 
 by which many 
 
 by which means 
 j by which their 
 "\ by which they are 
 
 by which you are 
 
 by which you may 
 
 by you 
 
 by your 
 
 call for 
 
316 
 
 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 called for 
 call forth 
 calls forth 
 call them 
 call upon 
 called upon 
 call you 
 call your 
 *can(n) he 
 ca(n) be done 
 ca(n) become 
 ca(n) be said that 
 ca(n) be seen 
 ca(n) be saved 
 ca(n) do 
 ca(n) have 
 ca(n) make 
 ca(n) never 
 ca(n) observe 
 ca(n)not 
 
 ca(n)not be made 
 ca(n)not be received 
 ca(n)not be said 
 ca(n)not be sure 
 ca(n)not do 
 ca(n)not go 
 ca(n)not take 
 Catholic church 
 Catholic priest 
 Catholic religion 
 certain about 
 chief engineer 
 Christian character 
 Christian church 
 Christian doctrine 
 Christian friends 
 
 Christian principles 
 
 Christian religion 
 
 Christian system 
 
 circuit court 
 
 civil law 
 
 civil power 
 
 civil service reform 
 
 commanding officer 
 
 commercial freedom 
 
 common law 
 
 common pleas 
 
 common sense 
 
 conditions of men 
 
 could be 
 
 could have seen 
 
 could it be 
 
 could make 
 
 could never 
 
 could nevertheless 
 
 could no doubt 
 
 could not 
 
 could not be 
 
 could not do 
 
 could not have 
 
 could not have seen 
 
 could not say 
 
 could not see (vocalize see) 
 
 could not take 
 
 could not understand 
 
 could not undertake 
 
 could now 
 
 could there be 
 
 could they 
 
 could these (vocalize these) 
 
 could this 
 
 could those 
 
 *See note to Paragraphs 74, 164, 481 ; see also Paragraph 535. 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 317 
 
 could we 
 
 could you 
 
 could you have seen 
 
 court-martial 
 
 dead-letter office 
 
 dear friend 
 
 dear madam 
 
 dear sir 
 
 depend upon 
 
 did he 
 
 did he have 
 
 did he know 
 
 did that 
 
 did they 
 
 did we 
 
 did we call 
 
 did we claim 
 
 did we do 
 
 did you 
 
 did you have 
 
 did you furnish 
 
 did you get 
 
 did you give 
 
 did you go (vocalize go) 
 
 did you go there 
 
 did you have anything 
 
 did you know 
 
 did you look 
 
 did you make 
 
 did you mean 
 
 did you mention 
 
 did you proceed 
 
 did you receive 
 
 did you refer 
 
 did you regard 
 
 did you remember 
 
 did you render 
 
 did you request 
 
 Divine Providence 
 
 do perhaps 
 
 do so 
 
 do sometimes 
 
 do such 
 
 do that 
 
 do their 
 
 do them 
 
 do themselves 
 
 do their 
 
 do these (vocalize these) 
 
 do those 
 
 do they 
 
 do this 
 
 do we 
 
 do we claim 
 
 do we have 
 
 do you 
 
 do you go there 
 
 do you have 
 
 do you know 
 
 do you never 
 
 do you make 
 
 do you mean to 
 
 do you recollect 
 
 do you remember 
 
 do you require 
 
 do you respect 
 
 do you think 
 
 do your 
 
 does he 
 
 does it 
 
 does it seem 
 
 does not 
 
 does not intend 
 
 does not know 
 
318 
 
 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 does not know that 
 
 does not say 
 
 does not see (vocalize see) 
 
 does not think so 
 
 does not this 
 
 does nothing 
 
 does one 
 
 does that which 
 
 does their 
 
 does this 
 
 does your 
 
 does your Honor 
 
 during my 
 
 during that 
 
 during this 
 
 during your 
 
 each has been 
 
 each moment 
 
 each other 
 
 each was 
 
 East Indies 
 
 engineer-in-chief 
 
 et cetera 
 
 eternal damnation 
 
 eternal death 
 
 eternal glory 
 
 eternal happiness 
 
 ever has been 
 
 ever more 
 
 ever since that 
 
 ever since then 
 
 everybody else 
 
 every direction 
 
 every man 
 
 every moment 
 
 everything 
 
 ex officio 
 
 ex parte 
 
 fee simple 
 
 fellow men 
 
 few persons 
 
 for another 
 
 for certain 
 
 forever 
 
 for every man 
 
 for every reason 
 
 for his 
 
 for his advantage 
 
 for his interest 
 
 for his name('s) sake 
 
 for his own 
 
 for his own interest 
 
 for his own part 
 
 for his own purpose 
 
 for his own sake 
 
 for his own use 
 
 for it is 
 
 for its own 
 
 for many 
 
 for many years 
 
 for my own sake 
 
 for my part 
 
 for my sake 
 
 for one 
 
 for several 
 
 for several years 
 
 for some reason 
 
 for something 
 
 for such 
 
 for such as 
 
 for such as were 
 
 for such as would 
 
 for such is not 
 
 for such was 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 319 
 
 for that 
 
 for that is not 
 
 for them 
 
 for themselves 
 
 for these (vocalize these) 
 
 for this 
 
 for this reason 
 
 for those 
 
 for those who ca(n) 
 
 for which 
 j for which their 
 ) for which they are 
 
 for which there is 
 
 for which there seems 
 
 for yon 
 
 for you are aware 
 
 for you ca (n) 
 
 for you may think 
 
 for you will 
 
 for your 
 
 for your honor 
 
 for your sake 
 
 for as much as 
 
 free trade 
 
 free trader 
 
 from among 
 
 from as many as 
 
 from him 
 
 from many such 
 
 from many things 
 
 from that 
 
 from that day 
 
 from them 
 
 from themselves 
 
 from this 
 
 from those who are (are 
 downward) 
 
 from this place 
 
 from you 
 
 from your 
 
 give me 
 
 give it 
 
 give some 
 
 give that 
 
 give them 
 
 give themselves 
 
 give this 
 
 give you 
 
 give your 
 
 gives me 
 
 gives them 
 
 God is faithful 
 
 God is love 
 
 God is my refuge 
 
 God is not 
 
 good-bye 
 
 good day 
 
 good deal 
 
 good many 
 
 good night 
 
 great advantage 
 
 great applause 
 
 great danger 
 
 great deal 
 
 great deal more 
 
 great majority 
 
 great many 
 
 great many instances 
 
 great measure 
 
 great nation 
 
 great number 
 
 great people 
 
 great pleasure 
 
 great principles 
 
320 
 
 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 had seen 
 \ had their 
 "j had there 
 
 had therefore 
 
 had they 
 
 had we 
 
 had you 
 
 had you known 
 
 half dozen 
 
 has been 
 
 has been done 
 
 has done 
 
 has had 
 
 has just 
 
 has known 
 
 has made 
 
 has many 
 
 has many more 
 
 has not 
 
 has not been 
 
 has not taken 
 
 has that 
 
 has them 
 
 has this 
 
 have become 
 
 have done 
 
 have endeavored 
 
 have found 
 
 have greatly 
 
 have just 
 
 have known 
 
 have many 
 
 have no doubt 
 
 have only 
 
 have said 
 
 have seen 
 
 have sent them 
 
 have several 
 
 have shown 
 
 have spoken 
 
 have suggested 
 
 have such 
 
 have supposed 
 
 have taken 
 
 have that 
 
 have them 
 
 have themselves 
 
 have these (vocalize these) 
 
 have this 
 
 have those 
 
 have thought 
 
 have understood 
 
 have we 
 
 have you 
 
 hear me 
 
 hear you 
 
 Holy Scriptures 
 
 Holy Spirit 
 
 hope that 
 
 hope this 
 
 hope you 
 
 (The following phrases, be- 
 ginning with how, are intend- 
 ed for Benn Pitman writers. 
 For phrases written with the 
 Graham sign for how, see 
 Paragraphs 227-8.) 
 
 how are (are upward) 
 
 how are they 
 
 how are we 
 
 how ca(n) 
 
 how ca(n) it be 
 
 how ca(n) they 
 
 how ca(n) we 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 321 
 
 how ca(n) you 
 how could 
 how could you 
 how is that 
 how is this 
 how many 
 how many cases 
 how many days 
 how many more 
 how many occasions 
 how many places 
 how many such 
 how many years 
 how may 
 how may you 
 how much (m, ch) 
 how much money 
 how must 
 how will they 
 human being 
 human government 
 human happiness 
 human kind 
 human nature 
 human race 
 human rights 
 human understanding 
 (For phrases beginning 
 with 7, see Paragraphs 
 212-9.) 
 if he 
 
 if he ca(n) 
 if he is 
 if he is not 
 if he was 
 if his 
 if his desire 
 
 if possible 
 
 if such 
 
 if that 
 
 if that has 
 
 if that has been 
 
 if that is 
 
 if that is done 
 
 if that is not 
 
 if that were 
 
 if they 
 
 if they were 
 
 if this 
 
 if we 
 
 if we do 
 
 if we have 
 
 if we take 
 
 if we think 
 
 if you are 
 
 if you ca(n) 
 
 if you ca(n)not 
 
 if you have 
 
 if you must 
 
 if you receive 
 
 if your 
 
 in accordance 
 
 in addition 
 
 in advance 
 
 (For phrases beginning 
 
 with in all, see Paragraph 
 
 352.) 
 
 in another 
 
 in another case 
 
 in another instance 
 
 in answer 
 
 in any 
 
 in any business 
 
 in any case 
 
322 
 
 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 in any degree 
 
 in many 
 
 in any instance 
 
 in many instances 
 
 in any position 
 
 in many particulars 
 
 in any way 
 
 i in me 
 
 in anything 
 
 ^ in my 
 
 in behalf 
 
 in my life 
 
 in business 
 
 in my opinion 
 
 in chief 
 
 in my presence 
 
 in detail 
 
 in my speech 
 
 in effect 
 
 in part 
 
 in every case 
 
 in person 
 
 in existence 
 
 in progress 
 
 in general 
 
 in proportion 
 
 in God's name 
 
 in pursuance 
 
 in heaven 
 
 in such 
 
 in vain (vocalize vain 
 
 if in such cases 
 
 necessary) 
 
 in such manner 
 
 in his 
 
 in such way 
 
 in his behalf 
 
 in such words 
 
 in his business 
 
 in such matters 
 
 in his interest 
 
 in that 
 
 in his judgment 
 
 in that manner 
 
 in his opinion 
 
 in that matter 
 
 in his own 
 
 in them 
 
 in his own business 
 
 in this 
 
 in his own interest 
 
 in this age 
 
 in his own name 
 
 in this business 
 
 in his position 
 
 in this case 
 
 in his testimony 
 
 in this claim 
 
 in it 
 
 in this instance 
 
 in its 
 
 in this manner 
 
 in itself 
 
 in this neighborhood 
 
 in its own 
 
 in this part 
 
 in its place 
 
 in this place 
 
 in its position 
 
 in this respect 
 
 in Jesus Christ 
 
 in this world 
 
 in judgment 
 
 in which 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 323 
 
 in which he 
 j in which their 
 ( in which they are 
 in which you 
 in which you are engaged 
 in which you are under- 
 stood 
 in your 
 
 in your presence 
 in yourself 
 in so much as 
 into that 
 into their 
 into them 
 
 into these (vocalize these) 
 into this 
 into those 
 into this country 
 is done 
 is necessary 
 is not 
 
 is not necessary 
 is not necessarily 
 is not quite 
 is not quite clear 
 is not only 
 is not that 
 is not this 
 is now 
 is so 
 is that 
 is this 
 
 it appears that 
 it brings 
 it ca(n) 
 it ca(n) be 
 it ca(n) be made 
 
 it ca(n) be said 
 
 it ca(n) have 
 
 it ca(n) make 
 
 it ca(n)not 
 
 it cannot be 
 
 it cannot be done 
 
 it cannot be said 
 
 it could 
 
 it could be 
 
 it could be done 
 
 it could be made 
 
 it could be said 
 
 it could have 
 
 it could not 
 
 it could not be done 
 
 it could not be made 
 
 it could not be said 
 
 it could not have 
 
 i it is 
 
 I it has 
 
 it has been 
 
 it has been done 
 
 it has been found 
 
 it has been known 
 
 it has been observed 
 j it has not 
 I it is not 
 
 it has not been 
 
 it has not done 
 
 it is absolutely 
 
 it is admitted 
 
 it is also 
 
 it is always 
 
 it is believed 
 
 it is better 
 
 it is clear 
 
 it is clearly 
 
324 
 
 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 it is done 
 
 it is observed 
 
 it is enough 
 
 it is one 
 
 it is found 
 
 it is only 
 
 it is generally 
 
 it is only necessary 
 
 it is good 
 
 it is perhaps 
 
 it is important 
 
 it is plain 
 
 it is impossible 
 
 it is probable-y 
 
 *it is no doubt 
 
 it is quite clear 
 
 it is intended 
 
 it is rather 
 
 it is interesting 
 
 it is right 
 
 it is just 
 
 it is so 
 
 it is known 
 
 it is surely 
 
 it is manifest 
 
 it is that 
 
 it is most 
 
 it is their 
 
 it is mos(t) important 
 
 it is then 
 
 it is mos(t) likely 
 
 it is this 
 
 it is my opinion 
 
 it is true 
 
 it is nearly 
 
 it is understood 
 
 it is necessary 
 
 it is unknown 
 
 it is necessarily 
 
 it is unnecessary 
 
 it is no 
 
 it is wonderful 
 
 it is no more 
 
 it is wrong 
 
 it is no part 
 
 it is your 
 
 it is no use 
 
 it is yours 
 
 it is none 
 
 it looked 
 
 it is not 
 
 it looks 
 
 it is not intended 
 
 it makes 
 
 it is not known 
 
 it makes no difference 
 
 it is not necessary 
 
 it may 
 
 it is not only 
 
 it may never 
 
 it is not so 
 
 it might not be 
 
 it is not understood 
 
 it must 
 
 it is nothing 
 
 it mus (t) be 
 
 it is nothing more 
 
 it mus (t) not 
 
 it is now 
 
 It perhaps 
 
 *Indeed, in order that it may not be confounded with no doubt, is 
 never joined in a phrase, except at the beginning. 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 325 
 
 it probably 
 
 it seemed 
 
 it seems 
 
 it seems so 
 
 it seems strange 
 
 it should 
 
 it should be 
 
 it should not be 
 
 it should not be said 
 
 it should not have 
 
 it sometimes 
 
 it surely 
 
 it therefore 
 
 it was 
 
 it was necessary 
 
 it was never 
 
 it was not 
 
 it was nothing 
 
 it was said 
 
 it was supposed 
 
 it was understood 
 
 it was unnecessary 
 
 judicial decision 
 
 judicial investigation 
 
 know better 
 
 know it Is not 
 
 know nothing 
 
 know that 
 
 know that it is 
 
 know them 
 
 know this 
 
 know where it is 
 
 knows that 
 
 knows them 
 
 knows this 
 
 law court 
 
 letter book 
 
 like them 
 
 like that 
 
 like this 
 
 long ago 
 
 long before 
 
 long enough 
 
 long has been 
 
 long since 
 
 long while 
 
 look at that 
 
 look at this 
 
 look like 
 
 looks like 
 
 Lord's day 
 
 made mention 
 
 major general 
 
 make mention 
 
 make that 
 
 make them 
 
 make this 
 
 manner in which 
 
 many as possible 
 
 many cases 
 
 many (circum) stances 
 
 many instances 
 
 many more 
 
 many nations 
 
 many occasions 
 
 many such 
 
 many things 
 
 may also 
 
 may always 
 
 may always be 
 
 may appear 
 
 may bring 
 
 may have 
 
 may have done 
 
326 
 
 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 may mention 
 
 may never 
 
 may probably 
 
 may perhaps 
 
 may sometimes 
 
 may they 
 
 may we 
 
 may you 
 
 mean to 
 
 might have 
 
 might have done 
 
 might not 
 
 might not be able 
 
 more likely 
 
 more probable 
 
 Mr. Chairman 
 
 Mr. President 
 
 Mr. Speaker 
 
 much as 
 
 much as it is 
 
 much as possible 
 
 much money 
 
 my colleague 
 
 my servant 
 
 my brother 
 
 my Christian friends 
 
 my friend 
 
 my good friend 
 
 my life 
 
 my love 
 
 my mind 
 
 my opinion 
 
 my own opinion 
 
 my own interest 
 
 my own knowledge 
 
 my own sake 
 my own sentiments 
 my own understanding 
 my respect (ed) friends 
 near as possible 
 necessary (con) sequences 
 need never 
 need not 
 need not be 
 need not do 
 need not necessarily 
 need not say 
 never be 
 never do 
 never said 
 no (con) sequence 
 no doubt 
 no intention 
 no instance 
 no interest 
 no knowledge 
 no, it is not 
 no, it won't 
 no man 
 no more 
 no necessity 
 no notice 
 no occasion 
 no one 
 no part 
 no person 
 no reason 
 *no, sir 
 no such thing 
 no, thank you 
 
 *To distinguish this phrase from answer, it is best to give sir it* or- 
 dinary form. 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 327 
 
 no wonder 
 no worse than 
 nobody else 
 nor do I think 
 nor do they 
 nor do you 
 nor have we 
 nor is it 
 nor is that 
 nor is this 
 nor shall 
 nor shall it be 
 nor such 
 nor was 
 nor were 
 nor were the 
 nor were they 
 nor were we 
 not been 
 not enough 
 not known 
 not necessary 
 not necessarily 
 not now 
 not only 
 not only that 
 not possible 
 not quite 
 not that 
 
 not to my knowledge 
 not so 
 
 not understood 
 nothing about it 
 nothing about that 
 nothing more 
 
 (For phrases beginning 
 with of and on, see Para- 
 
 graphs 173, 182-3.) 
 one another 
 one day 
 one generation 
 one idea 
 one instance 
 one item 
 one man 
 one side 
 one thing 
 one thing more 
 one understands 
 one way 
 one which 
 only be 
 only had 
 only he is not 
 only he would 
 only one thing 
 only such 
 only those who 
 ought (to) be 
 over them 
 over this 
 paper money 
 peculiar circumstances 
 perhaps not 
 perhaps they 
 perhaps you will 
 perhaps your 
 personal expenses 
 personal interview 
 personal knowledge 
 personally acquainted 
 police court 
 political advantage 
 political economy 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 political power 
 
 political principles 
 
 present advantage 
 
 present (circum) stances 
 
 present day 
 
 present instance 
 
 public matters 
 
 public mind 
 
 public life 
 
 public service 
 
 public works 
 
 prima facie 
 
 promissory note 
 
 quarter section 
 
 quite agree 
 
 quite likely 
 
 quite probable 
 
 quite sure 
 
 railroad car 
 
 railroad station 
 
 rather better 
 
 recollect that 
 
 recollect their 
 
 recollect them 
 
 retired list 
 
 rising generation 
 
 Sabbath day 
 
 Sabbath School 
 
 St Paul (See Paragraphs 
 
 63-4.) 
 St. Peter (See Paragraphs 
 
 63-4.) 
 said there 
 saw another 
 saw you 
 saw you there 
 say anything 
 
 say so 
 
 say to them 
 
 say you are 
 
 see that 
 
 see that it is 
 
 see that you are 
 
 see you are 
 
 see you will 
 
 seems likely 
 
 seems so 
 
 seems there is 
 
 several thousand dollars 
 
 shall be 
 
 shall be certain 
 
 shall be sure 
 
 shall become 
 
 shall do 
 
 shall endeavor 
 
 shall go 
 
 shall never 
 
 shall not 
 
 shall not be 
 
 shall remain 
 
 shall make 
 
 shall say 
 
 shall take 
 
 she ca(n) 
 
 she ca(n)not 
 
 she did 
 | she has 
 / she is 
 
 she has been 
 
 she has done 
 
 she has never 
 
 she is not 
 
 she may 
 
 she may never 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 329 
 
 she says 
 
 she seems 
 
 she shall 
 
 she was 
 
 she would 
 
 short distance 
 
 short space 
 
 (For phrases beginning 
 with should, see Paragraphs 
 184, 185.) 
 ( since it has 
 j since it is 
 
 since it has been 
 
 since it was 
 
 since that 
 
 since then 
 
 since they 
 
 since this 
 
 since which 
 
 since your 
 
 so as 
 
 so as to appear 
 
 so as to prevent 
 
 so as to receive 
 
 so as to remember 
 
 so be it 
 
 so do you 
 
 so good 
 
 so it appears 
 
 so it makes 
 
 so it rests 
 
 so it seems 
 
 so little 
 
 so many 
 
 so may you 
 
 so sure 
 
 so that 
 
 so that it is 
 
 so that it seems 
 
 so that you may 
 
 so then 
 
 so they 
 
 so this 
 
 so you are 
 
 so you are aware 
 
 so you may 
 
 so you will 
 
 some means 
 
 some regard 
 
 some such 
 
 something has been done 
 
 something is necessary 
 
 sons of men 
 
 South America 
 
 spirit land 
 
 spirit world 
 
 State rights 
 
 stock broker 
 
 subject matter 
 f such as 
 -j such has 
 I such is 
 
 such as are (are down- 
 ward) 
 
 such as ca(n) 
 
 such as ca(n) be 
 
 such as ca(n)not be 
 
 such as could 
 
 such as it is 
 
 such as may 
 
 such as need not 
 
 such as that 
 
 such as these (vocalize 
 these) 
 
330 
 
 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 such as this 
 
 such as those 
 (such as they are 
 (such as there 
 
 such as there are 
 
 such ca(n) 
 
 such ca(n)not be 
 
 such cases 
 
 such could not be 
 
 such could only be 
 
 such has been 
 
 such has never 
 
 such has no doubt 
 (such has not 
 ( such is not 
 
 such matters 
 
 such may 
 
 such men 
 
 such only 
 
 such persons 
 
 such principles 
 
 such therefore 
 
 such you 
 
 suppose you are 
 
 sure way 
 
 take another case 
 
 take care 
 
 take courage 
 
 take notes 
 
 take occasion 
 
 takes occasion 
 
 take pains 
 
 take part 
 
 take place 
 
 take possession 
 
 takes possession 
 
 take such 
 
 take such matters 
 
 take their 
 
 take that 
 
 take them 
 
 take this 
 
 take this occasion 
 
 take you 
 
 take your 
 
 tell him 
 
 tell me (vocalize me) 
 
 tell such 
 
 tell your 
 
 tell them 
 
 thank you 
 
 that day 
 
 that does 
 
 that does not 
 
 that has 
 
 that is 
 
 that has been 
 
 that has never 
 
 that have 
 
 that is all 
 
 that is to 
 
 that is another 
 
 that is another thing 
 
 that is entirely 
 
 that is intended 
 
 that is it 
 
 that is necessary 
 
 that is not 
 
 that is no doubt 
 
 that is nothing 
 
 that is not necessary 
 
 that is not possible 
 
 that is now 
 
 that is one 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 331 
 
 that is only 
 
 that is so 
 
 that is understood 
 
 that is where 
 
 that is worse 
 
 that is worth 
 
 that it is 
 
 that it is only 
 
 that it may appear 
 
 that is might appear 
 
 that it might not 
 
 that it should be 
 
 that it may 
 
 that perhaps 
 
 that probably 
 
 that plan 
 
 that place 
 
 that supposition 
 
 that such 
 
 that such are 
 
 that such as ca(n) 
 (that there 
 (that their 
 
 that there appears 
 
 that there are 
 
 that there is 
 
 that they 
 
 that this 
 
 that we 
 
 that we were 
 
 that were 
 
 that which 
 
 that which ca(n) be 
 
 that which ca(n)not be 
 
 that which has been 
 
 that which is not 
 
 that which you may 
 
 that you 
 
 that you are 
 
 that you have 
 
 that you should be 
 
 that your 
 
 there are 
 
 there are some 
 
 there ca(n) be 
 
 there ca(n)not be 
 
 there could be 
 
 there could not be 
 
 there does not 
 ( there has 
 "j there is 
 
 there has been 
 
 there has never 
 
 there have 
 
 there is another 
 
 there is another point 
 
 there is another subject 
 
 there is little 
 
 there is necessarily 
 
 there is never 
 
 there is no difference 
 
 there is no doubt 
 
 there is no objection 
 
 there is no one 
 
 there is no subject 
 
 there is no such thing 
 
 there is not 
 
 there is nothing 
 
 there is not only 
 
 there is now 
 
 there was occasion 
 
 there was no occasion 
 
 there should be 
 
 there you are 
 
332 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 there you may 
 
 there you must 
 
 there you will 
 
 therefore it is 
 
 these people 
 
 these places 
 
 these points 
 
 these reasons 
 
 these things 
 
 they are said (there for 
 
 they are) 
 they are so 
 they are sometimes 
 they did 
 they do 
 they may have 
 they may sometimes 
 they must 
 they said 
 they themselves 
 they think 
 they think that 
 they were 
 think this 
 think you are 
 think you may 
 think perhaps 
 think probably 
 think that 
 think them 
 think they may 
 this account 
 this advantage 
 this afternoon 
 this age 
 this bill 
 this business 
 
 this country 
 
 this ca(n) be 
 
 this ca(n)not be 
 
 this case 
 
 this (circum) stance 
 
 this could be 
 
 this date 
 
 this day 
 
 this does 
 
 this does not 
 
 this generation 
 
 this instance 
 
 this kind 
 
 this matter 
 
 this never will be 
 
 this notice 
 
 this one thing 
 
 this opinion 
 
 this part 
 
 this passage 
 
 this people 
 
 this period 
 
 this place 
 
 this point 
 
 this purpose 
 
 this question 
 
 this reason 
 
 this thing 
 
 this was 
 
 this was not 
 
 this undertaking 
 
 this vote 
 
 this world 
 
 those are (are upward) 
 
 those were 
 
 those that 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD- JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 333 
 
 those things 
 
 those which 
 
 those who 
 
 those who are (are down- 
 ward ) 
 
 those who could 
 
 those who would 
 
 though that 
 
 though they 
 
 though this 
 
 though they were 
 
 though you may 
 
 thought that 
 
 thought their 
 
 thought they were 
 
 thought them 
 
 thought these (vocalize 
 
 these) 
 
 j thought this 
 (thought those 
 
 thought we were 
 \ through his 
 I through us 
 
 through so many 
 
 through you 
 
 thus far 
 
 thus it is 
 
 till some 
 
 till such 
 
 till that 
 
 till there 
 
 till there be 
 
 till then 
 
 till they 
 
 till these (vocalize these) 
 (till this 
 "(till those 
 
 till those who 
 till you are 
 till you are ready 
 till you ca (n) 
 till you go 
 
 (For phrases beginning 
 with to, see Paragraph 174.) 
 told him 
 
 told me (vocalize me) 
 told them 
 told you 
 
 to-morrow afternoon 
 to-morrow night 
 too great 
 too little 
 too late 
 too many 
 too short 
 too true 
 took you 
 took possession 
 took your 
 took part 
 took them 
 took place 
 total amount 
 toward such 
 toward you 
 towards another 
 towards it 
 
 towards one another 
 towards that 
 towards which 
 towards them 
 towards these (vocalize 
 
 these) 
 true God 
 
334 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 ( towards this 
 (towards those 
 
 truly yours 
 
 under (con)sideration 
 
 under his 
 
 under it 
 
 under no circumstances 
 
 under such 
 
 under such circumstances 
 
 under such regulations 
 
 under that 
 
 under them 
 
 under this 
 
 under which 
 
 under your 
 
 United States of America 
 
 unless it is 
 
 unless that 
 
 unless they 
 
 unless this 
 
 unless your 
 
 universal church 
 
 universal happiness 
 
 until his 
 
 until some 
 
 until there are 
 
 until there is 
 
 until there is another 
 
 until they 
 
 until you 
 
 until you are 
 
 up side down 
 
 upon another occasion 
 
 upon his 
 
 upon his own 
 
 upon his own behalf 
 
 upon ourselves 
 
 upon no such 
 
 very bad 
 
 very best 
 
 very certain 
 
 very dear 
 
 very good 
 
 very great 
 
 very late 
 
 very lately 
 
 very likely 
 
 very many 
 
 very much (m, ch) 
 
 very near 
 
 very probable 
 
 very rare 
 
 very seldom 
 
 very short 
 
 very shortly 
 
 very soon 
 
 very strong 
 
 very sure 
 
 very true 
 
 wants of mankind 
 
 was also 
 
 was always 
 
 was as good as 
 
 was asked 
 
 was another 
 
 was better 
 
 was done 
 
 was lately 
 
 was likely 
 
 was made 
 
 was many times (tms) 
 
 was meant 
 
 was mentioned 
 
 was never 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 335 
 
 was no doubt 
 
 was notwithstanding 
 
 was noticed 
 
 was nothing 
 
 was present 
 
 was received 
 
 was regular 
 
 was said 
 
 was seen 
 
 was sent 
 
 was so 
 
 was somewhere 
 
 was soon 
 
 was lately 
 
 was this 
 
 was then 
 
 was truly 
 
 was understood 
 
 (For phrases beginning 
 
 with we. see Paragraph 276) 
 
 well done 
 
 well known 
 
 well, now 
 
 well that 
 
 well, then 
 
 well, sir 
 
 were we 
 
 what amount 
 
 what ca(n) be 
 
 what ca(n)not 
 
 what could be 
 
 what could they 
 
 what could we 
 
 wlfat could we do 
 
 what could we think 
 
 what do they 
 
 what do you 
 
 what do you mean 
 
 what do you think 
 \ what has 
 ( what is 
 
 what has been 
 
 what has been done 
 \ what it has 
 f what it is 
 
 what it has been 
 
 what it is worth 
 
 what is necessary 
 
 what is right 
 
 what may 
 
 what may not 
 
 what matter 
 
 what means 
 
 what might 
 
 what must 
 
 what position 
 
 what say you 
 
 what was 
 
 what was the 
 
 what way 
 
 what would be 
 
 whatever it may 
 
 when do 
 
 when do they 
 
 when do you go 
 
 when did 
 
 when does it 
 
 when have we 
 
 when I am 
 
 when I am able 
 
 when I am inclined 
 
 when that is 
 
336 
 
 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 when these (vocalize these) 
 j when this 
 (when those 
 
 when they 
 
 when we do 
 
 when we have 
 
 when is this 
 
 when it has been 
 
 when it is 
 
 when it is done 
 
 when it is known 
 
 when it is necessary 
 
 when it may 
 
 when it was 
 
 when was 
 
 when we were 
 
 when were they 
 
 when will you (will down- 
 ward) 
 
 when your 
 
 whenever it is 
 
 whenever it may 
 
 whenever that 
 
 whenever these (vocalize 
 
 these) 
 
 ( whenever this 
 (whenever those 
 
 whenever you 
 
 whenever you are 
 
 whenever you like 
 
 whenever you will 
 
 where are (are upward) 
 
 where are they 
 
 where are these 
 
 where are we 
 
 where did you 
 
 where did you go 
 
 where do you live 
 where do you reside 
 where do you think 
 where does it 
 where does this 
 where is this 
 where have they 
 where have we 
 where have you 
 where is that 
 where we 
 where we had 
 where we have 
 where we were 
 where were 
 where were they 
 where were we 
 whereas it is 
 whereby you may 
 whereby you ca(n) 
 where another has been 
 wherever it is 
 whether you 
 whether you have 
 whether you may 
 wherever you are 
 wherever you ca(n) 
 wherever you will 
 which ca(n) 
 which ca(n) be 
 which could be 
 which ca(n) not 
 which ca(n) not be 
 which could never 
 which could not 
 j which has 
 I which is 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 337 
 
 which has been 
 
 which has never 
 
 which has not been 
 
 which has nothing 
 
 which has now 
 
 which is known 
 
 which is now 
 
 which is no doubt 
 
 which is nothing 
 
 which is not 
 
 which is not clear 
 
 which is not only 
 
 which is not possible 
 
 which is not intended 
 
 which makes 
 
 which many 
 
 which matters little 
 
 which matters not 
 
 which may 
 
 which might 
 
 which must 
 
 which perhaps 
 
 which seems 
 
 which seemed 
 
 which shall (shall upward) 
 
 which should 
 
 which some 
 
 which sure(ly) 
 
 which was 
 
 which was not 
 
 which was never 
 j which they are 
 | which their 
 
 which you 
 
 which you are 
 
 which you ca(n) 
 
 which you will 
 
 which you will perceive 
 
 while another 
 
 while they were 
 
 while this 
 
 who are 
 
 who ca(n) be 
 
 who could be 
 
 who came 
 
 who ca(n) not 
 . who has 
 \ who is 
 
 who has been 
 
 who has done 
 
 who has had 
 
 who has nothing 
 
 who has not observed 
 
 who has it 
 
 when shall 
 
 who is it 
 
 who is this 
 
 who is to 
 
 who was it 
 
 who may 
 
 who said 
 
 who supposes 
 
 who make 
 
 who mean 
 
 who mean (to) b 
 
 who must 
 
 who know nothing 
 
 who said 
 
 who said so 
 
 who said there is 
 
 who therefore 
 
 who told him 
 
 who told that 
 
 who told them 
 
338 
 
 SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 who told you 
 who told your 
 who was not 
 who could not 
 who could not be 
 who would not have 
 who would not say 
 will be 
 will be found 
 will perhaps 
 will probably 
 will be said 
 will have 
 will you 
 with advantage 
 with his 
 with his own 
 with it 
 with its 
 with one 
 with one another 
 with one thing 
 with that 
 with them 
 with themselves 
 with this 
 
 with this understanding 
 with which 
 
 with which you are ac- 
 quainted 
 with your 
 
 with your permission 
 with your sanction 
 without doubt 
 without his 
 without his knowledge 
 
 without one 
 
 without such 
 
 without that 
 
 without these (vocalize 
 
 these) 
 
 ( without this 
 "(without those 
 
 without their 
 
 without them 
 
 without your 
 
 won't be 
 
 won't notice 
 
 won't they 
 
 won't understand 
 
 worthy member 
 
 would be 
 
 would be sufficient 
 
 would come 
 
 would do 
 
 would go 
 
 would hope 
 
 would have 
 
 would it 
 
 would make 
 
 would no doubt 
 
 would know 
 
 would mention 
 
 would never 
 
 would not 
 
 would not be 
 
 would not have said 
 
 would occasion 
 
 would receive 
 
 would rather 
 
 would understand 
 
 would say 
 
SIMPLE OR WORD-JOINING PHRASES. 
 
 839 
 
 would see (vocalize see) 
 *yes, sir 
 yet another 
 yet have 
 you are 
 you are aware 
 you are certain 
 you are determined 
 you are never 
 you are ready 
 you are supposed 
 you ca(n) be 
 you ca(n) hare 
 you may think 
 you may say 
 you made 
 you mean to 
 you mention 
 you might 
 
 you might not be 
 you recollect 
 you require 
 you should 
 you should be 
 you should not 
 you should do 
 you will be 
 you will be sorry 
 you will be sure 
 you will do right 
 you will do wrong 
 you will make 
 you will no doubt 
 you will remember 
 you will think 
 you will understand 
 young man 
 young woman 
 
 *Ss is a more convenient sign for yes than Ys, especially in the very 
 common phrase, Yet, sir. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 (The figures refer to the numbers of the Paragraphs.) 
 
 A, ellipsis of, 129. (See Tick Word-signs.) 
 
 A con, a com, etc., indicated by disjoined ticks, 331, 334. 
 
 Ability, special method of writing, in phrases, 525. 
 
 Al, termination, ellipsis of, 151. 
 
 All or will, expressed by I hook on consonant strokes, Chap. 
 XIII, 350-361; caution in regard to, 361; all or will ex- 
 pressed by I hook on tick word-signs, 234-5; all or will 
 expressed by enlarging r hook, 374-5. 
 
 Already (See Tick Word-signs.) 
 
 Ambiguity, safe, law of, 83. 
 
 An (See Tick Word-Signs.) 
 
 And, ellipsis of, 130: (See Tick Word-signs.) 
 
 Any, no, how distinguished in phrases, 526. 
 
 Are, expressed by r hook on consonant strokes, 362-3; on 
 tick word-signs, 234, 236; expressed by enlarging I 
 hook, 374-5; word-sign for, written upward or downward 
 in phrases, 527. 
 
 As, initial, 249; rule for placing, 79; fictitious primitive 
 for, 420-1, 463-4. 
 
 As it, expressed by st loop, 389-392; expressed by halving 
 consonant stroke z, 463-4. 
 
 As there, expressed by double-length z, 420-1; expressed bj 
 str loop, 393-8. 
 
 At all, until, how distinguished in phrases, 528. 
 
 At some time, at the same time, how distinguished in 
 phrases, 529. 
 
 Avenue, how expressed in phrases, 530. 
 
 Aivay, how sometimes expressed in phrases, 563. 
 
342 INDEX. 
 
 Bad junctions (See Junctions). 
 
 Been, expressed by n hook, 457-8; various methods of ex- 
 pressing, in phrases, 531; to have been, special phrase- 
 sign, 383-4. 
 
 Before (See Tick Word-signs). 
 
 Believe, how best written, 207 (note). 
 
 Beyond, initial, 287. 
 
 Bill, how expressed in phrases, 532. 
 
 Body, how expressed in phrases, 533. 
 
 Books, shorthand, consulted in preparing this volume, 6. 
 
 Brace, meaning of, in exercises, 173 (note). 
 
 Broken phrase defined, 20. 
 
 Business, how expressed in phrases, 534. 
 
 But (See Tick Word-signs). 
 
 Can, how expressed in phrases, 74 (note), 164 (note), 481 
 (note), 535. 
 
 Cannot, how expressed in phrases, 187, (first note.) 
 
 Cautions, general, to students, Chap. IV, 56-60. 
 
 Circles, double (See Circle Word-signs). 
 
 Circle Word Signs (is, his, as, has, us) Chap. X, 246-274; 
 position of, 246; 'is, initial, 247; his, initial, 248; has, 
 initial, 250; caution as to initial circle-signs, 251; circle 
 for us, medial or final, 252-3; circle word-signs, joined to 
 ticks or brief w and y word-signs, 254; circles, merging 
 of, 255-9, 262-4; circle word-signs as part of double circle, 
 255-266; double circle followed by a or the tick, 259; double 
 circle beginning a phrase, 260-1; circle word-signs follow- 
 ing double circle, 265-6; circle word-signs following loop, 
 267-8; ellipsis of circle, 269-272; vocalization of circles, 
 273; "fictitious primitive" substituted for circle word- 
 signs, 274. 
 
 Composite phrase, defined, 22. 
 
 Con or com, ellipsis of, 147-8; indicated by proximity, 328-9; 
 Implied by joining, 330. 
 
 Context, a means of word distinction, 82-4. 
 
 Contra-normal expedients, why necessary, 111-2; classified, 
 113-121. 
 
INDEX. 343 
 
 Court reporting, American system of, 14. 
 
 Court, phrases beginning with, 63-5. 
 
 D or ed, ellipsis of, 154-5, 157. 
 
 Dear, expressed by double-lengthing, 422-3. 
 
 Distinction, means of, between possibly conflicting words, 
 82-100; distinction by position, 85-7; by "exclusion," 88-9; 
 by variation of outline, 90-91; by vocalization, 9/-100. 
 
 Double-circles (See Circle Word-signs.) 
 
 Double-lengthing as a phrasing factor, Chap. XIII, 399-433; 
 double-length for their or there, 399-409, t!9-421, 426-7; 
 double-length for they are, 410-11; double-length for 
 other, 412-418, 421; dou Die-length for whether, 424-5; 
 double-length for dear, 422-3; double-lengthing of straight 
 strokes, 432-3. 
 
 Ellipsis (the law of implication), Chap. VIII, 122-168; im- 
 plication and indication distinguished, 126-7; what words 
 may be omitted, 122; caution as to use of this principle, 
 128; ellipsis of a, 129; ellipsis of -al and -ly, 151; ellipsis 
 of and, 130; ellipsis, of con or com, 148; ellipsis of 
 from, 146; ellipsis of h tick, 152; ellipsis of ing, 149; ellip- 
 sis of n hook, 163-4; ellipsis of of, 133; ellipsis of of the, 
 134-5; ellipsis of on the, 136; ellipsis of personal pro- 
 nouns, 165; ellipsis of r hook, 161-2; ellipsis of s, 159; 
 ellipsis of t or d, 153-7; ellipsis of to, 138-146; ellipsis of 
 the, 132; ellipsis of w hook, 160; ellipsis of with, 137; 
 irregular ellipsis, 167-8. 
 
 Elliptic phrase, defined, 21. 
 
 Else, less, how distinguished in phrases, 546. 
 
 "Exclusion," a means of word-distinction, 88-9. 
 
 Exercises, modo of practising, 65 (note). 
 
 Expedients, contra-normal, (See Contra-normal Expedients.) 
 
 Extra care necessary in writing some useful phrases, 34-5. 
 
 F-v hook as phrasing factor, Chap. XIX, 480-512; f-v hook 
 for have and to have, 480-9; have had and have it, 490- 
 503; f-v hook for of, 504-5; of it and of its, 506-7; en- 
 larged f-v hook for have and of, 508-512. 
 
 "Factors of Shorthand Speed," relation of this book to, 7. 
 
844 INDEX. 
 
 "Fictitious primitives" (consonant strokes in lieu of tick 
 word-signs, etc.. 108, 274, 358-9, 420-1, 463., 484. 
 
 First, how expressed in phrases, 535%. 
 
 First, the, not an advisable phrase, 206 (note). 
 
 From, ellipsis of, 146. 
 
 From-to, indicated by proximity, 324-5. 
 
 Graham, Andrew J., states law of implication, 124. 
 
 H, initial tick, ellipsis of, 152. 
 
 Had, depressed by halving, 471. 
 
 Half-lengthing as a phrasing factor, Chap. XVIII, 460-479; 
 half-lengthing for it, 460-4; half-lengthing of "fictitious 
 primitive," 463-4; half-legthing for to. 465-6; half-lengtlt- 
 ing for would, 467-470; half-lengthing for had, 471-2; ha.f- 
 lengthing and n hook for not, 473-4, 477-8. 
 
 Hand-training required for facile phrasing, 36-38. 
 
 Has, initial, 250; rule for placing, 79; "fictitious primitive" 
 for, 420-1; 463. 
 
 Has it, expressed by st loop, 389, 392; expressed by halving 
 consonant stroke z, 463-4. 
 
 Has there, expressed by double-length z, 420-1; expressed by 
 str loop, 393-8. 
 
 Have, ellipsis of, 168 (note) ; expressed by f-v hook on con- 
 sonant strokes, 480-488; on tick word-signs, 234, 237; affix- 
 ed to they by enlarged f-v hook, 508-511; several methods 
 of expressing, in phrases, 536. 
 
 Have had, or have it, expressed by f-v hook and half-length- 
 ing, 490-503. 
 
 He, ellipsis of, 165. (See Tick Word-signs.) 
 
 He had, he had not, how phrased, 474 (note). 
 
 He, I, how distinguished in phrases, 186 (note), 537. 
 
 Him, me, how distinguished in phrases, 538. 
 
 His, initial, 248. 
 
 "Horse-shoe," or enlarged semi-circle, for we would, would 
 you, etc., 304-10. 
 
 House, how expressed in phrases, 539-540. 
 
 How, tick word-sign, 226-230. 
 
INDEX. 345 
 
 I, ellipsis of, 165; I initial, 209-220; I and he distinguished, 
 80, 537. 
 
 Z con-, he con-, is con-, has con-, etc. indicated by detached 
 ticks or circles, 335-6. 
 
 I. D., a sign for "initial displacement, 141 (note). 
 
 I had, he had, how distinguished, 458 (note). 
 
 I had not, he had not, how distinguished, 474 (note). 
 
 Implication, the law of, 122-5; distinguished from indica- 
 tion, 126-7. 
 
 In, expressed by n hook, 459 l /. 
 
 In as and in his, expressed by "in curl" (See In Curl). 
 
 In curl, for in, in as, iti his, Chap. XX, 513-524; in expressed 
 by "in curl," 513, 517; in as, expressed by "in curl" and 
 circle, 513, 519; in his, expressed by "in curl" and circle, 
 513, 518; a, an or the, elided in the "in curl," 520-1; double- 
 circle following "in curl," 522-3. 
 
 In law, how expressed in phrases, 541. 
 
 In our, position of, 365 (note). 
 
 In re-, how expressed in such phrases as in reply, etc., 385-6. 
 
 In recom-, in recog-, etc., how expressed in such phrases as 
 in recompense, etc., 387-8. 
 
 Indeed, no doubt, how distinguished in phrases, 542. 
 
 Indication and implication distinguished, 126-7. 
 
 -Ing, termination, ellipsis of, 149. 
 
 Ing (consonant stroke) double-lengthing of, in phrases to 
 add their or there, 405-7. 
 
 -Ing a, -ing the, indicated by disjoined tick, 339-342. 
 
 -Ing is, -ing his or -ing us, indicated by detached circle, 
 347-8. 
 
 -Ing their or -ing there, indicated by disjointed tick, 343-5. 
 
 Initial displacement (See Position). 
 
 Instance, circumstance, how distinguished in phrases, 543. 
 
 Intersection, how used in phrase-construction, 572. 
 
 Invention of irregular phrases, (See Phrases, Irregular). 
 
 Inversion of ice, were, would, you, 298-9. 
 
 Irland, Fred, acknowledgment of assistance rendered by, 12. 
 
 Irregular phrase denned, 23. (See Phrases, Irregular). 
 
346 INDEX. 
 
 7s, initial, 247; fictitious primitive for, 420-1, 463. 
 
 7s con-, his con-, as con-, has con-, etc., indicated by detached 
 circle, 335-6. 
 
 7s, his, as, has, position of, when initial, 79, 251; not to be 
 needlessly displaced, 246 (note). 
 
 7s it, as it, has it, expressed by halving consonant stroke z, 
 463-4; expressed by st loop, 389, 392, 392%. 
 
 7s there, as there, has there, expressed by double-length z, 
 420-1; expressed by sir loop, 393-8. 
 
 It, expressed by halving, 460-464. 
 
 Junctions, bad, classified, 39-47; how obviated, 48; easy 
 junctions necessary for good phrases, 31-2; difficult junc- 
 tions sometimes tolerated, but require extra practice, 33-5. 
 
 L hook on consonant strokes for all or will, Chap. XIII, 350- 
 361; I hook on tick word-signs for all or will, 234-5; I hook 
 enlarged to add are or our, 374-5. 
 
 Legibility, requisite for good phrases, 52-3; legibility pro- 
 moted by good phrases, 14%. 
 
 Less, else, how distinguished in phrases, 546. 
 
 Letters or syllables, ellipsis of, 150. 
 
 "License, reporting," when and why allowable, 111-2. 
 
 Limitations, cautions, etc., Chap. IV, 56-60. 
 
 Lineality, required in a good phrase, 49. 
 
 -Ly, termination, ellipsis of, 151. 
 
 Mavor. William, states law of implication, 122. 
 
 May be, special phrase sign for. 378-9. 
 
 May have been, special phrase sign for, 380. 
 
 Mb (consonant stroke) double-lengthing adds their or 
 there, 405-6. 
 
 Mac, Me, etc., expressed by m at the beginning of proper 
 names, 547. 
 
 Morris, F. G., states law of implication, 125. 
 
 Mount, phrases beginning with, 63-5. 
 
 N curl (See "In Curl"). 
 
 N hook, ellipsis of, 163-4; n hook as a phrasing factor, 
 Chap. XVII, 434-459; been expressed by n hook, 457; one 
 expressed by n hook, 434-440; own expressed by n hook, 
 
INDEX. 347 
 
 234, 238, 441-451; than, expressed by n hook, 452-6; not 
 expressed by n hook, 234, 238, 475-9; by n hook and halv- 
 ing, 473-4. 
 
 No, any, how distinguished in phrases, 526. 
 
 No other, how expressed in phrasing, 415-418. 
 
 North, how expressed in phrases, 548. 
 
 Northern, how expressed in phrases, 548. 
 
 Not, expressed by halving and the n hook, 473-4; expressed 
 by n hook only, 475-9. 
 
 Ocean, how expressed in phrases, 544. 
 
 Of, ellipsis of, 133; indicated by proximity, 327; initial tick 
 for, 173; "fictitious primitive" for, 108, 358-9, 420-1, 463-4; 
 expressed by f-v hook on consonant strokes, 504-5; on 
 tick word-signs, 234, 237; affixed to think by enlarged f-v 
 hook, 508-9. (See Tick Word-signs.) 
 
 Of all, how phrased, 234-5, 358-9. 
 
 Of all it, how phrased, 463-4. 
 
 Of it, expressed by halving "fictitious primitive," 463-4; ex- 
 pressed by f-v hook and halving, 506-7. 
 
 Of the, ellipsis of, 134-5; indicated by proximity, 317-322; 
 when not indicated by proximity, 323; several methods 
 of expressing, 549. (See Tick Word-signs). 
 
 Omission of words. (See Ellipsis). 
 
 On the, ellipsis of, 136. 
 
 One, expressed by n hook, 434-440. 
 
 Or, ellipsis of, 131; expressed by r hook, 369-370; fictitious 
 primitive for, 420; several methods of expressing, in 
 phrases, 550. (See Tick Word-signs). 
 
 Originality, absolute, not practicable in a phrase-book, 5. 
 
 Other, expressed by double-lengthing, 412-418, 421. 
 
 Ought, (See Tick Word-signs). 
 
 Ought to have, how written, 484-488; affixed to they by en- 
 larged f-v hook, 510-511. 
 
 Our, expressed by r hook on consonant strokes, 365-7; 
 on tick word-signs, 234, 236; our added by enlarging I 
 hook, 374-5. 
 
 Ourself, ourselves, expressed by r book and circle, 368. 
 
34S INDEX. 
 
 Outline, variation of (See Variation). 
 
 Own, expressed by n hook, 234, 238, 441-451; how distin- 
 guished from knoio, 545. 
 
 Parenthesis, an indication of omitted letters or words, 123. 
 
 Part, how expressed in phrases, 551. 
 
 Patterson, Robert, states law of implication, 123. 
 
 Personal pronouns, ellipsis of, 165. 
 
 Phrase, general, definition of, 24; "simple, or word-join- 
 ing phrase" defined, 15; "word-blending phrase" defined, 
 16-19; "broken phrase" defined, 20; "elliptic phrase" de- 
 fined, 21; "composite phrase" defined, 22; "irregular or 
 special phrase" defined, 23. 
 
 Phrase, a good, requisites of, Chap. Ill, 28-55. 
 
 Phrases, advisability of particular, varies with different 
 writers, 60. 
 
 Phrases, customary, sometimes varied, 110. 
 
 Phrases, irregular, utility and necessity of, 566-7; invention 
 of, Chap. XXII, 566-573; premeditated, 568; off-hand, how 
 suggested and evolved, 569; irregular phrases classified, 
 570; how constructed, (a) by omission of words or parts 
 of words, (b) by breaking the phrase, (c) by intersection, 
 571-2; irregular phrases, off-hand, indication of, 5730; ir- 
 regular phrases, cautions in regard to construction of, 
 573; irregular phrases, legibility of, how endangered, 
 573/v irregular phrases of general utility, list of, Chap. 
 
 XXIII, 574; why larger number are not listed, 574. 
 Phrases, shorthand key to, why unnecessary and harmful, 3. 
 Phrases should correspond with natural word-groups, 29. 
 Phrases, simple or word-joining, defined, 15; list of, Chap. 
 
 XXIV, 575. 
 
 Phrases, unduly long, to be avoided, 431. 
 Phrase-signs, special, Chap. XV, 378-398. 
 Phrase-signs, irregular. (See Phrases, Irregular). 
 Phrasing, how correctly learned or taught, 1-2 ; when should 
 study of, begin, 8; lessons on, how studied, 11, 65 (note). 
 Phrasing in Pitmanic shorthand, gradually developed, 17; 
 
INDEX. 319 
 
 utility of, testimony of 'i. A. Reed, 13; especially useful in 
 testimony and other colloquial matter, 14. 
 
 Phrase word-signs, 10,3-104. 
 
 Position, general and special rules for, Chap. V, 61-81; first 
 word generally determines position of phrase, 61; two 
 exceptions to general rule of position (phrases treated as 
 compound words, and phrases whose first word or first two 
 words have no position of their own), 66-68; "initial dis- 
 placement" (first word or first two words displaced to ac- 
 commodate second or third), 70-79, 223; when proper, 78; 
 utility of "initial displacement," 81; displacement of ini- 
 tial is, his, as, has, he, I, 79, 80; I. D., a sign for "initial 
 displacement," 141 (note) ; position as a means of word- 
 distinction, 85-7; substitutes for positional distinction 
 "exclusion," variation of outline, vocalization), 88-100. 
 
 Preface, 1-12. 
 
 Prefixes in the midst of phrases, 337-8. 
 
 "Primitives, fictitious." (See "Fictitious Primitives"). 
 
 Pronouns, personal, ellipsis of, 165. 
 
 Proximity, a means of indicating omitted words or syl- 
 lables, 315-349; when dispensed with in familiar phrases, 
 326; of the indicated by proximity, 317-323; from-to indi- 
 cated by proximity, 324-6; of indicated by proximity, 327; 
 con or com indicated by proximity, 328-336; prefixes In 
 midst of phrases, 337-8; -ing a and -ing the indicated by 
 proximity, 339-341; -ing their indicated by proximity, 
 343-5; -ing his or -ing us indicated by proximity, 347-8; 
 proximity in special phrases, 349. 
 
 Quadruple lengths disapproved, 430. 
 
 Quasi r hook for you, 314%. 
 
 R hook, ellipsis of, 161-2; r hook as phrasing factor, Chap. 
 XIV, 362-377; r hook for are, 363; r hook for or, 369; r 
 hook for our, 364-8 ;r hook for were, 371-3; enlarged r hook 
 to add all or will, 374-5; quasi r hook for you, 314%; limi- 
 tation of r hook as word indicator, 376. 
 
 Reed, T. A., testimony of, as to value of phrasing, 13. 
 
350 INDEX. 
 
 Regard, regret, how distinguished in phrases, 552. 
 
 Reporters, practice of, exemplified in this book, 4. 
 
 "Reporting license," when and why allowable, 111-2. 
 
 "Restoration," (a full outline instead of a word-sign), when 
 necessary, 106. 
 
 Rules, when and how violated for convenience or speed, 111- 
 121. 
 
 S circle word-signs (See Circle Word-signs). 
 
 8, ellipsis of, 159. 
 
 Safe ambiguity, law of, 83. 
 
 Saint, phrases beginning with, 63-5. 
 
 Say, see, how distinguished in phrases, 554. 
 
 Secretary, how expressed in phrases, 553. 
 
 See, say, how distinguished in phrases, 554. 
 
 Self or selves, following our, 368. 
 
 Sense relation, requisite for good phrases, 30. 
 
 Semi-circle, enlarged, to express we would, ivere you, etc., 
 304-14. 
 
 Session, how expressed in phrases, 555. 
 
 Shorthand books consulted in preparing this, 6. 
 
 Shorthand systems represented in this book, 10. 
 
 Should (See Tick Word-signs). 
 
 Similar signs, confusing succession of, to be avoided, 50. 
 
 Simple or word-joining phrases, defined, 15; list of, Chap. 
 XXIV, 575. 
 
 Special or irregular phrase, defined, 23. (See Phrases, Ir- 
 regular). 
 
 Special methods of writing particular words or phrases, 
 Chap. XXI, 525-565. 
 
 Spontaneity, requisite for a good phrase, 54 ; spontaneity the 
 result of education -and practice, 55. 
 
 Stairs, how expressed in phrases, 556. 
 
 State, how expressed in phrases, 557. 
 
 Stock, how expressed in phrases, 558. 
 
 Store, how expressed in phrases, 559. 
 
 Street, how expressed in phrases, 560. 
 
 Student, errors of, 56-9. 
 
INDEX. 351 
 
 Systems of shorthand represented in this book, 10. 
 
 Syllables, ellipsis of, when and why allowable, 150. 
 
 T, ellipsis of, 153-7. 
 
 Than expressed by n hook, 452-6. 
 
 That, "fictitious primitive" for, 420. 
 
 The, ellipsis of, 132; "fictitious primitive" for, 420-1. (See 
 Tick Word-signs). 
 
 Their, there or they are, expressed by double-lengthing, 399- 
 409, 419-421, 426-7; expressed by changing circle, to str 
 loop, 396-7. 
 
 There, first syllable of therefore, etc., expressed by double- 
 lengthing, 408-9. 
 
 There, their, or they are, expressed by double-lengthing, 399- 
 409, 419-421, 426-7; expressed by changing circle to str 
 loop, 896-7. 
 
 Therefore, how expressed in phrasing, 408-9, 561. 
 
 They, ellipsis of, 165. 
 
 They are, expressed in phrases by double-lengthing, 410-11; 
 expressed by changing circle to str loop, 396-7. 
 
 Tick word-signs (a, already, all, before, but, he, how, I, of, 
 or, on, ought, should, the, there, to, who) Chap. IX, 169-245; 
 tick word-signs, initial, 171-188, 226-230, 234-243; tick word- 
 signs, final, 189-195, 206-208, 231; tick word-signs, initial 
 or final, 196-205, 209-223; a, 201, 204-5; all, 178; an, 202- 
 204; and, 203; before, 180; but, 177; he, 186-194; how, 226- 
 230; I, 212-222; of, 173; on, 182-3; or, 176; should, 184-5; 
 the, 207-8; there or their, 231-3; to, 174; too, 179; who, 
 181; tick word-signs with hooks for all, are, have, not, 
 of, own, will, 234-8; tick word-signs with the Initial or 
 final hook and appended circle, tick, ing dot, you, or dis- 
 joined tick, 241-3; tick word-signs attached to tick word- 
 signs, 243-5; tick word-signs, "initial displacement" of, 
 223-5; tick word-signs with what or would appended, 239- 
 240. 
 
 Time, how expressed in phrases, 562. 
 
 To, ellipsis of, 138-145; to, expressed by hairing, 465-6. (See 
 Tick Word-signs.) 
 
352 INDEX. 
 
 To be, special phrase sign, 381-2. 
 
 To have, expressed by f-v hook, 480-488; expressed by ti<^k 
 and f-v hook, 234, 237. 
 
 To have been, special phrase-sign, 38i>-4. 
 
 Too, initial, 179. 
 
 Triple-length strokes (whether there, etc.) 428-9. 
 
 Until, at all, how distinguished in phrases, 528. 
 
 Us, expressed by circle, 252-3. 
 
 V hook (See F-V Hook.) 
 
 Variation of outline, to facilitate brevity, verbal distinc- 
 tions and facile junctions, 90-1, 101-121; variation by use 
 of phrase word-signs, 103-4; variation by "word-splitting," 
 105; variation by "restoration," 106; variation without 
 curtailment, 107; variation by "fictitious primitives," 108; 
 variation by omission of letters, 109; variation by contra- 
 normal expedients, 111-121. 
 
 Vocabulary, the phrasing, Chap. II, 25-27; what words may 
 or may not be phrased, 25-27. 
 
 Vocalization, a means of word distinction, 92-100; full vocal- 
 ization not necessary, 97; peculiar vocalization, 99; vocal- 
 ization of badly-shaped outlines, 100. 
 
 W and y, brief, word-signs (we, with, were, what, icould, ye, 
 yet, you, beyond, 275-314; we, initial, 276; with, initial, 
 277; were, initial, 278; what, initial, 281; would, initial, 
 282; would, medial or final, 283; you, initial, 285; you, 
 medial or final, 286; ye, yet, and beyond, initial, 287; 
 junction of "brief w and y" signs with each other, 288-9; 
 junction with * circle, 290; initial hook for we and with, 
 291-4; we know, special phrase for, 293; with our, special 
 phrase for, 295; you and would following a circle, 296-7; 
 we, were, would, you, inversion of, 298-300; you used for 
 your, 301-2; you and your, position of, 303; Mr. Graham's 
 method of expressing you would, would you, etc., by en- 
 larged semi-circle, 304-314. 
 
 Walker, Clarence E., work on "Speed and Legibility" re- 
 ferred to, 84 (note), 226 (note), 389 (note). 
 
 W hook, ellipsis of , 160 ; w hook to express we or with, 291-5. 
 
INDEX. 353 
 
 Way, away, how expressed in phrases, 563. 
 
 We, ellipsis of, 165; ice, initial, 276, 291; we or with ex- 
 pressed by hook, 291; inversion of we, 298-9. 
 
 We know, special phrase, 293-4. 
 
 We were, were we, how phrased, 313. 
 
 We, were, would, you, inversion of, 298-9. 
 
 We would, how phrased, 304-6. 
 
 Were, phrases beginning with, 278; phrases ending with, 
 279; "fictitious primitive" for, 108, 463-4; expressed by r 
 hook, 371-3; several methods of expressing, in phrases, 
 564; inversion of, 298-9. 
 
 Were it, how phrased, 463-4. 
 
 Were you, how phrased, 304-5, 311. 
 
 What, initial, 281. 
 
 What ice, what were, how phrased, 304-5, 308. 
 
 What would, how phrased, 313. 
 
 What you, how phrased, 304-5, 311, 314. 
 
 Whether, expressed by double-lengthing, 424-5, 432-3. 
 
 With and toe, expressed by initial hook, 291. 
 
 Who (See Tick Word-signs.) 
 
 Will or all, expressed by I hook on consonant strokes, 350- 
 361; expressed by I hook on tick word-signs, 234-5; ex- 
 pressed by enlarging r hook, 374-5. 
 
 With, ellipsis of, 137; ivith, initial, 277, 291-5; with, "ficti- 
 tious primitive" for, 358-9, 420. 
 
 With all, how phrased, 358-9. 
 
 With our, special phrase, 295. 
 
 With you, were you, what you, would you, how phrased, 311, 
 314; with your, etc., similarly expressed, 312. 
 
 Word-blending phrase, defined, 16-19. 
 
 Word-joining phrase, defined, 15. 
 
 Word-distinction, Chap. VI, 82-100; methods of, by position, 
 85-87; by "exclusion," 88-9; by variation of outline, 90-1; 
 by vocalization, 92-100. 
 
 "Word-splitting," 105. 
 
 Words, what may or may not be phrased, 25-7; not too many 
 in a phrase, 51. 
 
354 INDEX. 
 
 Words or expressions, particular, special methods of writ- 
 ing, Chap. XXI, 525-565. 
 
 Would, initial, 282; not initial, 283;inversion of, 298-9; junc- 
 tion with preceding circle, 296-7; expressed by half- 
 lengthing, 467-470. 
 
 Would have, expressed by f-v hook, 489. 
 
 Would we, how phrased, 305, 307, 313. 
 
 Would you, what you, etc., how phrased, 304-9, 314. 
 
 Y, brief, word-signs (See W and Y, Brief, Word-signs). 
 
 Ye, yet and beyond, initial, 287. 
 
 Year, how expressed in phrases, 565. 
 
 Yet, initial, 287. 
 
 You, ellipsis of, 165; you, initial or not initial, 285-6; you, 
 initial, position of, 303; you, inversion of, 298-9; you, ex- 
 pressed by quasi r hook, 314 Vi>; you, used for your, 301-2; 
 junction of you with preceding circle, 296-7. 
 
 You were and you would, how phrased, 304-5, 309-310. 
 
 Your, sometimes expressed by you, 301-2, 312; expressed by 
 you, inverted, 303; your, initial, position of, 303; your 
 following with, were, what, icould, 312. 
 
 4*23 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 Form L9-25m-9,'47(A3618)444 
 
 LOS ANGELES 
 
A 000564814 2 
 
 Z56 
 B812s